MAHARASHTRA UNIVERSITY OF HEALTH SCIENCES, NASHIK

SYLLABUS : FINAL BDS

Candidate will be examined in the following subjects :
1. Prosthodontics
2. Conservative Dentistry including Endodontics.
3. Pedodontics.
4. Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery.
5. Periodontics.
6. Orthodontics.
7. Oral Medicine and Radiology.

Subject 1 : PROSTHODONTICS AND CROWN AND BRIDGE

LECTURES: 50 Lectures.
Complete Denture Prosthodontics :
1. Introduction to Prosthodontics, Terminologies , Aims , Objectives and scope
2. Human Masticatory apparatus : General consideration.
3. Anatomical & Physiological Landmarks of the maxillary and Mandibular
Foundations and their significance.
4. Patients education related to complete denture prosthesis.
5. History taking, examination, diagnosis and treatment planning of an edentulous
patient.
6. Importance of Diet and Nutrition.
7. Surgical and Non surgical preparation of the patient.
8. Impressions for complete Denture:
Definition, Objectives.
Theories and Techniques of impression making.
9. Bordor moulding procedure with special attention to Posterior platal seal area.
Various techniques for cast preparation.
10) Record Bases and occlusion rims :-
materials and methods of preparation.
11) Jaw relation records – Methods and instrumentation.
Orientation relation (Face bow record)
Vertical Jaw Relation
Horizontal Jaw Relations.
12) Mandibular Movements and different types of articulators.
13) Selection and arrangement of teeth- Anterior and posterior
Concepts of occlusion, Balanced occlusion and factors responsible for the same.
14) Try in of waxed up Dentures.
Reproduction of gingival tissue morphology .
15) laboratory procedures ; Elasking , wax elimination, , packing, acrylisation, recovery of
dentures.
16) Correction of processing errors – laboratory Remount procedure.
17) Trial insertion of Denture and Clinical Remount procedures.
18) Inserton of denture and instruction to a patient ; Recalls.
19) Repair of Broken denture; Relining & Rebasing of a denture.
20) Problems associated with the use of complete denture and their
treatment.
21) Prosthetic Management of poor foundation cases (Atrophied Ridges)
22) Treatment of Abused oral tissues.
23) Recent advances.
 B] Removable partial Dentures. :30 Lectures.

1. Introduction to partial denture, various terminologies used in partial denture.

2. Various components of fixed and removable partial denture and their comparison.
3. Classification of partially edentulous dental arches.
4. Dental cast surveyor and use of surveying procedure, path of insertion and removal.
5. Components of partial dentures; Their selection, requirements of design
and indications. (principles of designing and stress control)
a) The partial denture bases.
b) The artificial teeth.
c) The Direct Retainer.
d) The major connector.
e) The minor connector.
f) The indirect retainer.
g) The stress breaker.
h) The precision attachments.
6. Examination, diagnosis , treatment planning, surveying of diagnostic cast.
7.Preparation of patient to receive partial denture : General preparation.
8.Tooth alteration procedure. Making final impression to get master cast. Various
impression procedure and Reviews on materials used.
9.Definitive analysis of master cast, work authorization to Dental Technician.
10. Laboratory procedures related to casting for fabrication of partial denture framework
(Audio Visual demonstration.)
11. Trying of cast partial framework in mouth, adjusting the occlusion. The functional
impression : Altered cast technique.
12.Jaw Relation record, selection and arrangement of teeth & try-in of denture.
13. Acrylization of partial denture bases-
14. Insertion of Removable partial denture & instructions to patient .
15. Patients Complaints and their solution.
16.Factors influencing magnitude of stress transfer on abutment teeth.
17.Management of Kennedy Cl I & II Cases and Cl III & IV cases.
18.Perioprosthodintic relationship.
 FIXED PROSTHODONTICS : Lectures :- 30.

1. Aims and objectives of fixed partial denture prosthesis, and effects of loss of natural
tooth/ teeth.
2. Examination & Diagnosis for patient of fixed partial denture .
3. Treatment required prior to fixed denture prosthesis.
4. Oral anatomy, physiology and histology as related to fixed partial denture prosthesis
5. Terminologies related to fixed prosthodontics.
6. Types of fixed partial dentures.
7. Component parts of fixed partial denture - Retainer, Pontic & Connector
8. Abutment selection and Questionable abutment.
9. Individual abutment preparation to receive
1. acrylic jacket crown
2. Porcelain fused to Metal jacket crown
3. Partial veneer.
4. Metal veneer crowns.
10. Tissue management and gingival dilatation methods.
11. Impression procedures in fixed prosthodontics
12. Temporization procedures.
13. Die preparation and review of materials used for die preparation , Laboratory
procedures for fabrication.
14. Try in of fixed partial denture.
15. Cementation of fixed partial denture,
16. Maintenance of fixed partial denture, instructions to patients , recall visits repair of
F.P.D. Management of failures in fixed partial denture treatment.
17. Restoration of Endodontically treated tooth.
18. Introduction to adhesive bridges, laminates, All ceramic crowns.
 Special Prosthesis : Lectures :- 20
Brief introduction & general consideration.
1. Maxillofacial prosthesis - Aims & objectives, various types , materials used for
maxillofacial prosthesis. Obturators & splints.
2. Overdentures, Immediate denture, Intermediate/ Interim or denture Implant denture,
3. Prosthodontic consideration in geriatric patient.
Theory Hours :
1. Complete Denture : 50 Hours
2. R.P.D. : 30 Hours
3. Fixed partical Denture : 30 Hours
4. Maxillofacial Prosthesis : 20 Hours
hand special
Total 130 Hours
130 Hours Spread over Ist to IVth BDS
_______________________________________________________________
Preclinical Hours : .... 360 Hrs.
Spread over Ist & II BDS.
Clinical Hours : .... 540 Hrs.
Spread over IIIrd & IV BDS.
Total Duration : .... 1000 Hrs.
_______________________________________________________________
EXAMINATION PATTERN
I. Theory (Maximum) ---------------------------------------- 60 Marks
Theory (written) paper shall be of three hours duration.
Theory paper shall have three parts A,B, & C.
Section A : MCQ - Total 20 Marks.
20 multiple choice questions carrying one mark each.... 20 marks.
Section B : SAQ - Total 20 marks.
Ten short questions carrying two marks each ............... 20 marks.
Section C : LAQ - Total 20 Marks.
Two long answer question carrying ten marks each ..... 20 marks.
II. A) CLINICALS
i) Clinical for C.D. .... 60 Marks. (breakup as per proforma)
ii) Chairside Orals .... 15 Marks.
iii) Journal (work reacord) .... 05 Marks.
Total .... 80 Marks
B) i) Oral (Viva Voce) 20 Marks.
(A+B)= 100 Marks
III) Internal Assessment (Theory -20 + Practical – 20) = 40 Marks

Subject 2 : CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY INCLUDING ENDODONTICS :

Theory Hours ... 70 Hrs. Spread over II,III & IV BDS
Preclinical Hrs .. 240 Hrs. Spread over II BDS.
Clinical Hours ... 360 Hrs. Spread over III rd & IV BDS.

Total Duration ... 670 Hrs.

LECTURES :
1. Definition and scope.
2. Oral Hygiene in relation to conservative dentistry.
3. Instruments-Nomenclature, design and formulae, care and
Sterilization.
4. Examination, diagnosis and treatment planning.
5. Charting and recording of cases.
6. Histology of the tooth structure as related to the operative
procedures.
7. Hypoplasias, Attrition, abrasion, erosion and their management.
8. Dental caries, etiology, Pathology, Clinical features,
Classification diagnosis, prevention & control.
9. Cavities-classification and nomenclature.
10. Choice of filling materials.
11. Principles of cavity preparation, control of pain.
12. Prevention of damage to hard and soft tissue during
operative procedures.
13. Methods employed for exclusion of saliva.
14. Bio-Mechanics of cavity design and restoration with filling
materials. Pulp and tissue protection. Airotors - high
speed equipment, air motor and micromotor Cavity preparation
for various types of restorations including onlays inlays
 and pinlays, Restorative procedures Matrices.
15. Drugs used in conservative dentistry.
16. Introduction to recent advances in restoration materials
and procedures.
17. Fractured teeth and their management, effect of systemic
diseases on dental tissues.
18. Sensitive dentine - its management.
19. Ceramics in Conservative Dentistry.
20. Perio-operative problems.
21. Biological aspects of restorative materials.
22. Role of conservative Dentistry in esthitics.
23. Current advances
ENDODONTICS :
1. Definition, aims, objects.
2. Rationale of endodontic therapy, morphology of root canal.
3. Diseases of the pulp and periapical tissue & endodontic
entries.
4. Diagnostic aids in Endodontics.
5. Endodontic Instruments.
6. Care and sterilization on instruments for endodontics
treatment of vital and non vital pulp. Tests for sterility
of the root canal.
7. Drug used in root canal therapy.
8. Biomatarial preparation & obularation of Root canal various techniques and
material used.
13. Geriatric endodantics.
10. Bleaching of teeth, Restoration of endodontically treated
teeth.
11. Surgical treatment in Endodontics.
12. Emergencies in Endodontics, Endo-Perio Problems.
13. Recent advances.
EXAMINATION PATTERN :
I. Theory (Maximum)--------------------------------------------- 60 Marks
Theory (written) paper shall be of three hours duration.
Theory paper shall have three parts A,B, & C.
Section A : MCQ - Total 20 Marks.
20 multiple choice questions carrying one mark each 20 marks.
 Section B : SAQ - Total 20 marks.
Ten short questions carrying two marks each 20 marks.
Section C : LAQ - Total 20 Marks.
Two long answer question carrying ten marks each .... 20 marks
II. A) CLINICALS
i) History taking -------------------------------------------------- 10 Marks
ii) Cavity preparation for silver Amalgam 25 Marks
modified class II MO or DO
or Class I with Buccal and lingual extention
iii) Base / Lining along with matrix Band adaptation 15 Marks
iv) Permanent filling Restoration with Silver Amalgam
& chair side Orals. 25 Marks.
iv) Record (Clinical Journal ) 05 Marks.
Total 80 Marks.
B) i] Oral (Viva Voce) 20 Marks.
-------------------
(A+B)= 100 Marks
III) Internal Assessment (Theory -20 + Practical – 20) = 40 Marks
Subject 3 : PEDODONTICS

Theory Hours ... 40 Hrs. Spread over III & IV BDS.

Clinical Hours ... 150 Hrs. Spread over III & IV BDS.
-------------
Total Duration ... 190 Hrs.
LECTURES :
1. Introduction, definition, scope, practice mangagement and
importance of pedodontics.
2. Growth and development of Dental and oro- facial structure
and normal occlusion. Developmental anomolies Genetics
related to pedodontics.
3. Morphology of Dentitions and its applications :
a) Allied Morphology and Histology of primary and young permanent teeth.
b) Importance of first permanent molar.
4. Fundamental of Dental Health.
a) Biological factors responsible for maintenance of dental and
Oral Health.
b) Contributory Local factors affecting oral health plaque & Saliva etc.
5. Child psychology and management of child patient.
a. Physical development of child
b. Milestone of child development & behavioral pattern as narrated in various
theories.
c. Fear & anxiety related to pedodontics.
6. Preventic, intercepative and early corrective orthdontics for
children.
7. Examination, diagnosis and treatment planning.
8. Preventive dentistry, fluorides, fissure sealants diet
counselling etc.Endemic flurosis.
9. Endodontics in pediatric dentistry.
10. Clinical aspects of pediatric dentistry as related to
Setting of pedodontic clinic.
Teeth disorders.
Development Anomalies
Dental caries in children
Restorative Dentistry
Pulp Therapy and Endodontics
Space Maintainers & Myofunctional appliances .
Treatment of traumatized teeth.
Management of problems of the primary and mixed dentition
period,
Gingival disorders in children.
Stomatological conditions in children
 Management of handicapped children
Mouth habits and their managements.
Epidemology- Definition and general principal
11. Current advances.
CLINICALS
Case history diagnosis & treatment planning of 10 cases.
EXAMINATION PATTERN :
I. Theory (maximum)-------------------------------------------- 60 Marks
Theory (written) paper shall be of three hours duration.
Theory paper shall have three parts A,B, & C.
Section A : MCQ - Total 20 Marks.
20 multiple choice questions carrying one mark each.... 20 marks.
Section B : SAQ - Total 20 marks.
Ten short questions carrying two marks each .............. 20 marks.
Section C : LAQ - Total 20 Marks.
Two long answer question carrying ten marks each ..... 20 marks.
II. A) CLINICALS
i) Case History & Diagnosis ... 35 Marks
ii) Chair side Orals ... 25 Marks.
iii) Treatment Planning ... 10 Marks.
iv) Journal ... 10 Marks.
Total ----------------- 80 Marks.
B) Oral (Viva Voce) 20 Marks.
A+B = 100 Marks
III. Int. Assessment (Theory 20 + Practical 20 ) ------- 40 Marks
 Subject 4 : ORAL & MAXILLOFACIAL SURGERY.
Theory Hours :
1. Anaesthesia (Local & general) ... 10 Hours
2. Exodontia ... 10 Hours
3. Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery ... 40 Hours
----------------------
60 Hours
Spread over III & IV BDS.
Clinical Hours : .... 220 Hours
Total Duration : .... 280 Hours
LECTURES :
Local Anaesthesia :
1. Introduction, Theories of Local Anaesthesia.
2. Properties of an Ideal Local anaesthetic drug.
3. Classification & Properties of common local anaesthetic
drugs in use.
4. Choice of anaesthesia, Local and general anesthesia.
5. Indications and contra-indications, advantages and
disadvantages of local anaesthesia.
6. Components of a standard local anaesthetic solution.
7. Mechanism of action of local anaesthesia.
8. Pre-anaesthetic medication.
9. Technique of infiltration anaesthesia, Nerve block
Anaesthesia. Signs and Symptoms of anaesthesia.
10. Complications associated with local anaesthesia and their
management.
General Anaesthesia :
1. Properties of general anaesthetic drugs commonly used.
2. Pre-anaesthetic preparation of a patient and pre-medication.
3. Evaluation of a patient for general anaesthesia.
4. Short anaesthesia in Oral surgery, Endotracheal
Anaesthesia, Intravenous anaesthesia.
5. Signs and Symptoms of general anaesthesia.
6. Complications arising during the administration of general
naesthesia and their management.
Exodontia :
1. Objectives.
 2. Indications and contra-indication for tooth extraction.
3. Pre-operative assessment.
4. Forcep extraction. (Intra-alveolar extraction.)
5. "Surgical extraction" (Trans-alveolar extraction).
6. Extraction under general anaesthesia in the dental chair.
7. Complications of tooth extraction and their management.

Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery :

1. Introduction of oral and maxillofacial surgery.

2. Diagnosis in Oral Surgery.
a) History taking
b) Clinical examination.
c) Special Investigations.
3. importance of general conditions of the patient in relation
to Oral surgery.
4. Instruments used in Oral Surgery.
5. Basic principles of surgery. Sterilization & Asepsis,
Suturing techniques.
6. Use of antibiotics in oral surgery.
7. Diagnosis, pre-operative assessment and treatment of impacted
teeth.
8. Surgical procedure in relation to endodontic therapy
(Apicectomy).
9. Pre-prosthetic surgery including oral implantology
10. Oro-facial infections, their diagnosis and treatment.
11. Inflammatory diseases of jaw bone and their management..
12. Diagnosis and management of Cysts of Oral Cavity.
13. Fractures of facial skeleton, Diagnosis and management.
14. Diagnosis and treatment of benign & malignant neoplastic
lesions of the oral cavity (odontogenic & non-odontogenic).
15. Precancerous lesions of oral cavity, diagnosis and management.
16. Surgical Orthodontics - broad outlines.
17. Diseases of Maxillary sinus. with special reference to
Oro-antral fistula.
18. Management of haemorrhage and shock in Oral Surgery.
19. Diseases of salivary glands, Diagnosis and Treatment.
20. Diseases of temperomandibular joint & its management.
21. Neurological disorders, Trigeminal Neuralgia & facial palsy.
22. Cleft lip & cleft palate.
23. Emergencies in oral surgery and its management.
24. Recent advances
EXAMINATION PATTERN :
I. THEORY (Maximum)--------------------------------------------- 60 MARKS.
Theory (written) paper shall be of three hours duration.
Theory paper shall have three parts A,B, & C.
Section A : MCQ - Total 20 Marks.
20 multiple choice questions carrying one mark each.... 20 marks.
Section B : SAQ - Total 20 marks.
Ten short questions carrying two marks each................ 20 marks.
Section C : LAQ - Total 20 Marks.
Two long answer question carrying ten marks each ..... 20 marks.
II. A) CLINICALS
i) History Taking X-ray Interpretation,
Instruments & Drugs ... 20 Marks
ii) Local Anaesthesia Technique ... 15 Marks.
iii) Exodontia Technique ... 25 Marks.
iv) Post Operative instructions,
Management & Chairside orals ... 15 Marks.
v) Journal ... 05 Marks.
Total 80 Marks.
B) Oral (Viva Voce) .. 20 Marks.
A+B = 100 Marks
III. Int. Assessment (Theory 20 + Prct. 20) ... 40 Marks

Subject 5 : PERIODONTICS.
Theory Hours : ..... 60 Hours.
Clinical Hrs. : ..... 220 Hours.
Total Duration : ... 280 Hours. Spread over III & Final BDS
LECTURES :
1. Introduction - Scope and applicability of the subject.
Historical background of periodontology.
2. Maintenance of Health Role and scope of oral physiotherapy
measures, patient education programme and perodic check.
3. Etiopathogenesis Classification of gingival and periodontal discares. Defence
machanism of oral cavity.
4. Gingival enlargement.
5. Infective muco-gingival conditions-specific and non-specific.
6. Degenerative conditions-Viz disquanative gignivities and Junvenile periodontics
(Gingivosis and Periodontosis.)
7. Atrophic conditions affecting gingival and periodontal
tissues including aging.Periodontal problems in growing children.
8. Local and systematic factors in the causation of gingival
and periodontal lesions.
9. Periodontitis and its sequelae.
10. Malocclusion, Malalignment and traumatic occlusion, Bruxsim
and Tempero mandibular joint disturbances, occlusal equilibration.
11. Diagnosis and diagnostic aids including roentgenography and
its uses and limitations.
12. Prognosis.
13. Morphological defects of the muco-gingival structures
influencing periodontium and their treatment.
14. Treatment of all gingival and periodontal disturbances
treatment planning phase and rationale. And periodontal charting
Different available therapeutic procedures.
Healing Mechanism.
15. Role of Nutrition in etiology and treatment of periodontal diseases.
16. Drugs & materials used in periodontics.
17. Instrumentation.
18. Splints.
19. Preventive periodontics.
20. Concept of focal infection.
21. Oral hygiene practices in India.
22. Inter disciplinary care & recent advances, Implants,
23. Systemic effects of periodontal diseases in brief.
24. Recent advances in perirodontics .
 EXAMINATION PATTERN :
I.THEORY (Maximum)-------------------------------------------------60 MARKS.
Theory (written) paper shall be of three hours duration.
Theory paper shall have three parts A,B, & C.
Section A : MCQ - Total 20 Marks.
20 multiple choice questions carrying one mark each.... 20 marks.
Section B : SAQ - Total 20 marks.
Ten short questions carrying two marks each ....... 20 marks.
Section C : LAQ - Total 20 Marks.
Two long answer question carrying ten marks each ..... 20 marks.
II. A) CLINICALS
i) Case History . 20 Marks
ii) Instrumentation & Scaling ... 40 Marks.
iii) Post Operative instructions
and chairside orals. ... 15 Marks.
iv) Journal ... 05 Marks.
Total ----------------- 80 Marks.
B) Oral (Viva Voce) . 20 Marks.
A+B = 100 Marks.
III. Internal Assessment (Theory 20 + Practical 20) ..... 40 Marks.
-----------------------------------------------------------------
 Subject 6 : ORTHODONTICS.
Theory Hours : ..... 40 Hours.
Practicals & Clinical Hrs. : ..... 150 Hours.
--------------------
Total Duration : ... 190 Hours. Spread over III & Final BDS
LECTURES :
Stress in lectures should be on the Preventive and Interceptive
principles of Orthodontics.

1. Definition, Aims, objects and scope of Orthodontics.

2. Growth and Development of jaws, teeth, face and skull.
3. Genetics as applied to Orthodontics.
4. Normal occlusion and its characteristics. Factors
responsible for establishment and maintenance of normal
occlusion.
5. Malocculsion-types, different classifications & differential diagnosis.
6. Aetiology of malocclusion.
7. History taking and examination of patient and case analysis
and differential diagnosis including photographic analysis,
cephalometrics and analysis and treatment planning and prognosis.
8. a) Preventive and interceptive treatment aids of malocclusion.
b) Space management in orthodontics.
c) Treatment of Cl I, Cl II, Cl III malocclusions
9. Appliances used in Orthodontic treatment - Adequate
knowledge of removable and fixed appliances, Mechanical
appliances and functional appliances
10. Biological and biomechanical aspects of Orthodontics treatment.
11. Retention after treatment and relapse.
12. Materials used in Orthodontics.
13. Habit breaking appliances.
14. Surgical Orthodontics.
15. Current advances.

EXAMINATION PATTERN :
I.THEORY (Maximum)---------------------------------------------- 60 MARKS.
Theory (written) paper shall be of three hours duration.
Theory paper shall have three parts A,B, & C.
Section A : MCQ - Total 20 Marks.
20 multiple choice questions carrying one mark each.... 20 marks.
Section B : SAQ - Total 20 marks.
Ten short questions carrying two marks each ....... 20 marks.
Section C : LAQ - Total 20 Marks.
Two long answer question carrying ten marks each ..... 20 marks.

II. A) PRACTICALS / CLINICALS

i) Wire bending and Preparation
of an appliance in wax ... 40 Marks.
ii) Model Analysis (any two indices
with brief treatment plan) ... 15 Marks.
iii) Identification of appliances,
cephalometric landmarks. ... 20 Marks.
iv) Journal ... 05 Marks.
Total 80 Marks.
B) Oral (Viva Voce) ... 20 Marks.
A+B = 100 Marks.
III. Internal Assessment (Theory 20 + Prctical. 20 ) ...40 Marks.
 Subject 7 : ORAL MEDICINE, DIAGNOSIS & RADIOLOGY.
Theory Hours : ..... 40 Hours.
Clinical Hrs. : ..... 90 Hours.
Total Duration : ... 130 Hours. Spread over III & IV BDS
LECTURES :
Oral Medicine and Diagnosis :
1. Scope and importance of the subject.
2. Acute infections of oral & perioral structures.
3. Ulcerative & Vesicullobullous lesions of oral cavity.
4. Red and White lesions affecting oralmucosa.
5. Pigmentation of oral-tissues.
6. Diseases of tongue.
7. Diagnosis and differential diagnosis of Caries, Pulpitis &
Periodontitis & regressive changes of dentition.
8. Metabolic, allergic and Endocrine disturbances and their
oral manifestations.
9. Nutritional deficiencies and their significance in dentistry.
10. Blood dyserasias and their management.
11. Oral sepsis and its effect on general system.
12. Dermatological disorders & their oral manifestations.
13. Disorder of Tempero-mandibular joints.
14. Diseases of Jaw-bone.
15. Diseases of Maxillary-Sinus.
16. Oral Pre-malignant lesions.
17. Benign & malignant neoplasms of oral cavity.
18. Cervico-facial lymphadenopathy.
19. Diseases of salivary glands.
20. Oro-Facial pain.
21. Cysts of the oral cavity.
22. Management of Cardiac patient in dentistry.
23. Methods of diagnosis including special investigations.
24. Immunological concepts of oral lesions, HIV Infection,
Hepatitis & other viral infections.
25. Forensic odontology.
26. Recent advances.
 RADIOLOGY
1. Physics of radiation Production and properties of X-rays and radiation biology.
2. Principles of X-ray production & fluoroscopy factors affecting procedure
radiographs, Intensifying screens and grids and dark room procedures.
3. Technique of intra oral and extra-oral Radiography and
normal anatomical land marks.
4. Radiological interpretation of abnormal dental and jaw
conditions. & manifestation of systemic disease in jaw.
5. Elements of Radiation treatment in oral and facial
conditions and their sequelae.
6. Contrast radiography and recent advances in dental
Radiology including Radioactive traces.
7. Recent advances in imaging.
EXAMINATION PATTERN :
I. THEORY(Maximum) 60 Marks.
Theory (written) paper shall be of three hours duration.
Theory paper shall have three parts A,B, & C.
Section A : MCQ - Total 20 Marks.
20 multiple choice questions carrying one mark each.... 20 marks.
Section B : SAQ - Total 20 marks.
Ten short questions carrying two marks each ....... 20 marks.
Section C : LAQ - Total 20 Marks.
Two long answer question carrying ten marks each ..... 20 marks.
II.A) CLINICALS
i) Case History, clinical examination, 25 Marks.
Diagnosis,treatment planning of a
case and chairside orals ...
ii) Taking an IOPA and processing
with Interpretation ... 25 Marks.
iii) Interpretation of five clinical
slides/or Radiographs. .... 25 Marks.
iv) Journal ... 05 Marks.
Total ------------- 80 Marks.
B) Oral (Viva Voce) ... 20 Marks.
A+B = 100 Marks.
III) Internal Assessment (Theory -20 , Practical – 20) = 40 Marks
 APPENDIX-C
SCHEME OF INTERNAL ASSESSMENT
To assess the overall progress of the students by evaluating the professional skills
he/she has developed and the knowledge he has got it is necessary to assess the students
periodically. The marks to be allotted should be real estimate of the students achievement of
skills and subject knowledge without any prejudice.
Maximum marks allotted for internal assessment for each subject head in theory
and practical/clinical will be 20 % of the total marks.

In all four college tests shall be conducted in one academic year i.e. two tests in each term.
Each test will have marks as under:
For final B.D.S. subjects :- Four college tests tube conducted in theory in final B.D.S.
only. However for clinical & Practical test – 2 tests to be
conducted in 3rd B.D.S. as a post ending test and 2 tests to be conducted in final BDS as a post
ending test during clinical posting as under.-
FIRST TERM.
a. First internal (for the syllabus completed from the start of term till commencement
of the examination) Unit Test.
b. Second Internal : Should include entire syllabus completed in first term
(TERMINAL EXAMINATION)

SECOND TERM
c. Third internal : Should including the topics covered only in the second term till
the commencement of the examination (Unit Test)
d. Fourth Internal should include entire syllabus prescribed by the university
(PRELIMINARY EXAMINATION)
e. The pattern of Internal Assessment will be as under:
1. THEORY
Written .... 40 Marks.
(Section A : 20 MCQ ... 10 Marks, Section B : 10 SAQ ... 20
Marks, Section C : Two LAQ ... 10 Marks,)
Oral .... 10 Marks.
Total -------- 50 Marks.
2. PRACTICAL/CLINICAL ..... 50 Marks.
The marks for each test will be brought down to ... 5 Marks.
 MAHARASHTRA UNIVERSITY OF HEALTH SCIENCE, NASHIK

Scheme of Practical & /or Clinical examination

University Practical/Clinical Examination ... 80 Marks

The Practical/Clinical examination shall be conducted at the centres where adquate facilities

are available to conduct such examinations and the centre/college is approved/recognised by Dental
Council of India.

Not more than 30 students to be examined per day. The marks should be submitted in the

proforma (Appendix - E & F) supplied by the University Authority. This proforma should be signed

by the examiners. Over writing or scratching will not be permitted. Any corrections made, must have

the counter-signature of external examiners .The sealed envelop containing this proforma shall be

submitted on the same day to the Dean for onward transmission to the Controller of examinations,

Maharashtra University of Health Sciences, Nashik. No examiner or any other person connected with

the work of practical examination is permitted to carry any paper or violate the rules of examination.

The person found guilty will be debarred from such Confidential work for a minimum period of 5

Consecutive University examinations or the actions as suggested by the relevant Committee to

investigate such matters.
APPENDIX-E
FORMAT OF THE PRACTICAL / CLINICAL EXAMINATION MARKS
MAHARASHTRA UNIVERSITY OF HEALTH SCIENCES, NASHIK
Chart showing marks obtained by the candidates in practical / clinical
examination, to be submitted by the examiner in sealed cover through the Dean of the
college to the Controller of Examination ,MUHS , Nashik

Name of Examination : Final B.D.S. Summer / Winter 200___

Centre : __________________________________________________________________
1) SUBJECT : PROSTHODONTIC, CROWN AND BRIDGE Max. Marks 80
NOTE :- SCRATCHING OR OVERWRITING IN MARKS ARE NOT ALLOWED
Roll Checking of Border Moulding Final History and Clinical Work Total
No. Special Procedure or Impression Examinations Record
Tray/or Record Establishing or Recording T/P and (Journel)
Bases (To Be Vertical Jaw Centric Jaw Chair Side Orals
kept ready by Relation Relation Related to
the Student) Clinical Work
(10) (25) (25) (15) (5) (80)
2) SUBJECT : CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY INCLUDING ENDOTONTICS Max. Marks:- 80
NOTE :- SCRATCHING OR OVERWRITING IN MARKS ARE NOT ALLOWED
Roll History taking Cavity Preparation Base/Lining Registration with Clinical Total
No. Examinations for Silver Arnolgum alwong with Dental Amalgum Work
and Treatment Modified Class II Materix Band and Chair side Record
Planning MO. or DO or Class adapation orals related with
one Cavity with exercises
Buccal or Lingual
Extentions
(10) (25) (15) (25) (5) (80)
3) SUBJECT : PEDODONTICS Max. Marks:- 80
NOTE :- SCRATCHING OR OVERWRITING IN MARKS ARE NOT ALLOWED
Roll Clinical Case Exam. of a Child Chair Side Orals Treatment Record Total
No. History taking and Diagnesis Planning (Journal)
(35) (25) (10) (10) (80)
4) SUBJECT : ORAL MAXILLOFACIAL SURGERY Max. Marks:- 80
NOTE :- SCRATCHING OR OVERWRITING IN MARKS ARE NOT ALLOWED
Roll Clinical Case History Local Exodontia Post Operative Journal Total
No. Exam. Anaesthesia Technique Instructions,
X-ray Enterpretation Technique Management and
Instruments and Drugs. Chair Side Orals
(20) (15) (25) (15) (5) (80)
5) SUBJECT : PERIODONTICS Max. Marks:- 80
NOTE :- SCRATCHING OR OVERWRITING IN MARKS ARE NOT ALLOWED
Roll Clinical Case History Scalling and Post Operative Journal Total
No. Exam. Treatment Polishing and Instructions and Chair
Planning Instrumentation Side Orals (5) (80)
(20) (40) (15)
6) SUBJECT : ORTHODONTICS Max. Marks:- 80
NOTE :- SCRATCHING OR OVERWRITING IN MARKS ARE NOT ALLOWED
Roll Wire Bending and Model Analysis Identification of Journal Total
No. preparation of an (Any tow indices with Appliances
appliance in Wax Brief Treatment Plan) Cephalomteric
Landmarks
(40) (15) (20) (5) (80)

7) SUBJECT : ORAL MEDICINES (ORAL DIAGNOSIS) RADIOLOGY Max. Marks:- 80

NOTE :- SCRATCHING OR OVERWRITING IN MARKS ARE NOT ALLOWED
Roll Clinical Case History Exam. Taking IOPA and Interpretation of Journal Total
No. Treatment Planning and Processing with Five Clinical Slides
Chair side Oral Interpretation or Radiographs
(25) (25) (25) (5) (80)

NAME AND SIGNATURE OF EXAMINERS

1) External Examiner : ____________________________________ _______________
2) Enternel Examiner :____________________________________ _______________

(Common to All)
 APPENDIX - F
MAHARASHTRA UNIVERSITY OF HEALTH SCIENCES,NASHIK
Final B.D.S. Summer / Winter 200___ Examination
Subject : _____________________________________________________________
Name ofthe Centre: ____________________________________________________
Date of Practical Conduction: ____________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
(No Straching or overwriting please) correction if any to be signed by External &
Internal Examiners both.
: ORAL EXAMINATION MARKS :

Roll No. Enrollment No. Marks alloted out of 20 (Max)

in figures in words

External Examiners : Internal Examiners :

Name: _________________________ Name: ________________________

Signature: ______________________ Signature: ______________________

 APPENDIX B
MAHARASHTRA UNIVERSITY OF HEALTH SCIENCES,NASHIK
Scheme of Examination for Final B.D.S Examination
Sr.No. Subject Subheads Maximum Minimum Maxim Minimum marks
marks allotted marks um required for
required to marks awarding
pass in each allotted distinction
sub head
1 Prosthodontic i) Theory (Written) 60 -
s ii) Oral 20 -
iii) Theory + Oral 80 40
iv) Internal Assessment 20 -
(Theory) 200 150
iv) Theory + Oral + 100 50
Internal Assessment
(Theory)
i) Practical/Clinical 80 40
ii) IA Practical/Clinical 20 -
iii) Practical/Clinical +Internal 100 50
Assessment (Practical/Clinical)
2 Conservative i) Theory (Written) 60 -
Dentistry ii) Oral 20 -
including iii) Theory + Oral 80 40
Endodontics iv) Internal Assessment 20 -
(Theory) 200 150
iv) Theory + Oral + 100 50
Internal Assessment
(Theory)
i) Practical/Clinical 80 40
ii) IA Practical/Clinical 20 -
iii) Practical/Clinical +Internal 100 50
Assessment (Practical/Clinical)
3 Pedodontics i) Theory (Written) 60 -
ii) Oral 20 -
 iii) Theory + Oral 80 40
iv) Internal Assessment 20 -
(Theory) 200 150
iv) Theory + Oral + 100 50
Internal Assessment
(Theory)
i) Practical/Clinical 80 40
ii) IA Practical/Clinical 20 -
iii) Practical/Clinical +Internal 100 50
Assessment (Practical/Clinical)
4 Oral and i) Theory (Written) 60 -
Maxillofacial ii) Oral 20 -
Surgery iii) Theory + Oral 80 40
iv) Internal Assessment 20 -
(Theory) 200 150
iv) Theory + Oral + 100 50
Internal Assessment
(Theory)
i) Practical/Clinical 80 40
ii) IA Practical/Clinical 20 -
iii) Practical/Clinical +Internal 100 50
Assessment (Practical/Clinical)
5 Pedodontics i) Theory (Written) 60 -
ii) Oral 20 -
iii) Theory + Oral 80 40
iv) Internal Assessment 20 -
(Theory) 200 150
iv) Theory + Oral + 100 50
Internal Assessment
(Theory)
i) Practical/Clinical 80 40
ii) IA Practical/Clinical 20 -
iii) Practical/Clinical +Internal 100 50
Assessment (Practical/Clinical)
6 Orthodontics i) Theory (Written) 60 -
ii) Oral 20 -
iii) Theory + Oral 80 40
iv) Internal Assessment 20 -
(Theory) 200 150
iv) Theory + Oral + 100 50
Internal Assessment
(Theory)
i) Practical/Clinical 80 40
ii) IA Practical/Clinical 20 -
iii) Practical/Clinical +Internal 100 50
Assessment (Practical/Clinical)
7 Oral i) Theory (Written) 60 -
Medicine ii) Oral 20 -
and iii) Theory + Oral 80 40
Radiology iv) Internal Assessment 20 -
(Theory) 200 150
iv) Theory + Oral + 100 50
Internal Assessment
(Theory)
i) Practical/Clinical 80 40
ii) IA Practical/Clinical 20 -
iii) Practical/Clinical +Internal 100 50
Assessment (Practical/Clinical)
Grand Total 1400 1050
 Appendix – D

MAHARASHTRA UNIVERSITY OF HEALTH SCIENCS, NASHIK

INTERNAL ASSESSMENT MARKS FOR ….B.D.S. SUMMER/WINTER EXAMINATION, YEAR

Subject: ____________________________________________ Subhead – Theory / Practical

College: ____________________________________________

Sr. Enrollment Roll Name of Internal Assessment Test Aggregate Net total In Words Signature
No. No No. the First Second Third Fourth Total (after rounding (Out of of
Student Max 5 Max 5 Max 5 Max 5 Out of 20 the fraction, if any) Twenty) Student
Marks obtained out
of 20

Certificate that the marks entered in above proforma are as obtained by the candidates. The department will produce the
necessary documents for verificat University Authority if required.

Date : ____________ _____________________ ___________________________

Signature of Subject Teacher) (Signature of Head of the Department)
 Duration of the Courses:

The undergraduate dental training programme leading to BDS degree shall be of 4

(four) Academic years with 240 teaching days in each academic year, plus one year paid
rotating internship in a dental college. Every candidate will be required, after passing the final
BDS examination, to be undergo one year paid rotating internship in a dental college. The
detailed curriculum of Dental Internship Dental Programme is annexed as Annexure-A
The Internship shall be compulsory and BDS Degree shall be granted after completion of one
year paid internship.
During this period, the student shall be required to have engaged in full time study at a dental
college recognized or approved by the Dental Council of India.

Migration:
Migration from one dental college to other is not a right of a student. However,
migration of students from one dental college to another dental college in India may
be considered by the Dental council of India. Only in exceptional cases on extreme
compassionate ground*, provided following criteria are fulfilled. Routine migrations
on other ground shall not be allowed.
Both the colleges, i.e. one at which the student is studying at present and one to
which migration is sought, are recognised by the Dental Council of India.
The applicant candidate should have passed first professional BDS examination.
The applicant candidate submits his application for migration, complete in all
respects, to all authorities concerned within a period of one month of passing
(declaration of results) the first professional Bachelor of Dental Surgery (BDS)
examination.
The applicant candidate must submit an affidavit stating that he/she will pursue 240
nd
days of prescribed study before appearing at II professional Bachelor of Dental
Surgery (BDS) examination at the transferee dental college, which should be duly
certified by the Registrar of the concerned University in which he/she is seeking
transfer. The transfer will be applicable only after receipt of the affidavit.

Note 1:
nd
(i) Migration is permitted only in the beginning of II year BDS Course in recognized
Institution.

1
 All applications for migration shall be referred to Dental Council of India by college
authorities. No Institution / University shall allow migrations directly without the prior
approval of the Council.
Council reserved the right, not to entertain any application which is not under the
prescribed compassionate grounds and also to take independent decisions where
applicant has been allowed to migrate without referring the same to the Council.

Note 2: *compassionate ground criteria:

Death of supporting guardian.
Disturbed conditions as declared by Government in the Dental College area.

III. Attendance requirement, Progress and Conduct

75% in theory and 75% in practical / clinical in each year.
In case of a subject in which there is no examination at the end of the academic
year / semester, the percentage of attendance shall not be less than 70%.
However, at the time of appearing for the professional examination in the subject,
the aggregate percentage of attendance in the subject should satisfy condition (i)
above.

IV. Subjects of Study:

First Year
General Human Anatomy including Embryology and Histology
General Human Physiology and Biochemistry, Nutrition and Dietics
Dental Anatomy, Embryology and Oral Histology
Dental Materials
Pre-clinical Prosthodontics and Crown & Bridge

Second Year
General Pathology & Microbiology
General and Dental Pharmacology and Therapeutics
Dental Materials
Pre clinical Conservative Dentistry
Pre clinical Prosthodontics and Crown & Bridge
Oral Pathology & Oral Microbiology

2
Third Year
General Medicine
General Surgery
Oral Pathology and Oral Microbiology
Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics
Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery
Oral Medicine and Radiology
Orthodontics & Dentofacial Orthopaedics
viii)Paediatric & Preventive Dentistry
Periodontology
Prosthodontics and Crown & Bridge

Fourth Year
Public Health Dentistry
Periodontology
Orthodontics & Dentofacial orthopaedics
Oral Medicine & Radiology
Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery
Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics
Prosthodontics and Crown & Bridge
Paediatric & Preventive Dentistry
OR
Part I
Public Health Dentistry
Periodontology
Orthodontics & Dentofacial orthopaedics
Oral Medicine & Radiology
Part II
Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery
Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics
Prosthodontics and Crown & Bridge
Paediatric & Preventive Dentistry

3
 MINIMUM WORKING HOURS FOR EACH SUBJECT OF STUDY
(BDS COURSE)
Lecture Practical Clinical Total
Subject Hours Hours Hours Hours
General Human Anatomy Including
Embryology, Osteology and Histology 100 175 275
General Human Physiology 120 60 180
Biochemistry 70 60 130
Dental Materials 80 240 320
Dental Anatomy Embryology, Oral
Histology 105 250 355
Dental Pharmacology & Therapeutics 70 20 90
General Pathology 55 55 110
Microbiology 65 50 115
General Medicine 60 90 150
General Surgery 60 90 150
Oral Pathology and Microbiology 145 130 275
Oral Medicine and Radiology 65 170 235
Paediatric and Preventive Dentistry 65 170 235
Orthodontics and Dental orthopaedics 50 170 220
Periodontology 80 170 250
Oral Maxillofacial Surgery 70 270 340
Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics 135 200 370 705
Prosthodontics and Crown and Bridge 135 300 370 805
Public Health Dentistry 60 200 260
Total 1590 1540 1989 5200

Note : There should be a minimum of 240 teaching days each academic year consisting of 8
working hours including one hour of lunch break.
Internship 240X8 hours-1920 clinical hours
MINIMUM WORKING HOURS FOR EACH SUBJECT OF STUDY
(BDS COURSE)
I. B.D.S.
Lecture Practical Clinical Total
Subject Hours Hours Hours Hours
General Human Anatomy Including
Embryology, Osteology and Histology 100 175 275
General Human Physiology 120 60 180
Biochemistry 70 60 130
Dental Materials 20 40 60
Dental Anatomy Embryology, Oral Histology 105 250 355
Pre clinical Prosthodontics and crown and
bridge - 100 100
Total 415 685 1100

4
 II. B.D.S.
Lecture Practical Clinical Total
Subject Hours Hours Hours Hours
General & Dental Pharmacology & 70 20 90
Therapeutics
General Pathology 55 55 110
Microbiology 65 50 115
Dental Materials 60 200 260
Oral Pathology and Oral Microbiology 25 50 75
Pre clinical Prosthodontics and crown & 25 200 225
Bridge
Pre Clinical Conservative Dentistry 25 200 225
Total 325 775 1100

III. B.D.S.
Lecture Practical Clinical Total
Subject Hours Hours Hours Hours
General Medicine 60 90 150
General Surgery 60 90 150
Oral Pathology and Oral Microbiology 120 80 200
Oral Medicine and Radiology 20 70 90
Paediatric and Preventive Dentistry 20 70 90
Orthodontics and dentofacial orthopaedics 20 70 90
Periodontology 30 70 100
Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery 20 70 90
Conservative Dentistry & Endodontics 30 70 100
Prosthodontics and Crown & Bridge 30 70 100
Total 410 750 1160

IV. B.D.S.
Lecture Practical Clinical Total
Subject Hours Hours Hours Hours
Prosthodontics 80 300 380
Oral Medicine & Radiology 45 100 145
Periodontics 50 100 150
Public Health Dentistry 60 200 260
Conservative Dentistry 80 300 380
Oral Surgery 50 200 250
Orthodontics 30 100 130
Pedodontics 45 100 145
Total 440 1400 1840

5
 HUMAN ANATOMY, EMBRYOLOGY, HISTOLOGY & MEDICAL GENETICS

GOAL

The students should gain the knowledge and insight into, the functional anatomy of the
normal human head and neck, functional histology and an appreciation of the genetic basis of
inheritance and disease, and the embryological development of clinically important structures.
So that relevant anatomical and scientific foundations are laid down for the clinical years of
the BDS course.

B) OBJECTIVES :
a) KNOWLEDGE AND UNDERSTANDING :
At the end of the 1st year BDS Course in Anatomical Sciences the undergraduate student is
Expected to :
Know the normal disposition of the structures in the body while clinically examining a
patient and while conducting clinical procedures.
Know the anatomical basis of disease and injury.
Know the microscopic structure of the various tissues, a pre requisite for understanding of
the disease processes.
Know the nervous system to locate the site of lesions according to the sensory and or
motor deficits encountered.
Have an idea about the basis of abnormal development critical stages of development,
effect of teratogens, genetic mutations and environmental hazards.
Know the sectional anatomy of head neck and brain to read the features in radiographs
and pictures taken by modern imaging techniques.
Know the anatomy of cardio-pulmonary resuscitation.

b) SKILLS
To locate various structures of the body and to mark the topography of the living anatomy.
To identify various tissues under microscope.
To identify the features in radiographs and modern imaging techniques.
To detect various congenital abnormalities.
C) INTEGRATION :
By emphasizing on the relevant information and avoiding unwanted details, the anatomy
taught integrally with other basic sciences and clinical subjects not only keeps the curiosity
alive in the learner but also lays down the scientific foundation for making a better doctor, a
benefit to the society.
This insight is gained in a variety of ways :
Lecturers and small group teaching
Demonstrations
Dissection of the human cadaver
Study of dissected specimens
Osteology
Surface anatomy on living individual
Study of radiographs and other modern imaging techniques
Study of Histology slides
Study of embryology models.
Audio visual aids.
Throughout the course, particular emphasis is placed on the functional correlation, clinical
application and on integration with teaching in other bio dental disciplines.

D) AN OUTLINE OF THE COURSE CONTENT :

General anatomy : Introduction of anatomical terms and brief outline of various systems of
the body.
Regional anatomy of head and neck with osteology of bones of head and neck with
emphasis on topics of dental importance.
General disposition of thoracic, abdominal and pelvic organs.
The regional Anatoly of the sites of intramuscular and intra vascular injections and lumbar
puncture
General embryology and systemic embryology with respect to development of head and
neck.
6. Histology of basic tissues and of the organs of gastrointestinal, respiratory endocrine,
excretory systems and gonads
7. Medical genetics.
E) FURTHER DETAILS OF THE COURSE:
I. INTRODUCTION TO :
Anatomical terms
Skin, superficial fascia and deep fascia
Cardiovascular system, portal system collateral circulation and arteries.
Lymphatic system, regional lymph nodes
Osteology - including ossification and growth of bones
Myology - Including types of muscle tissue and innervation
Syndesmology - including classification of Joints
Nervous system
II. HEAD & NECK :
01. Scalp, face and temple, lacrimal apparatus 02. Neck - Deep fascia of neck, posterior
triangle suboccipital triangle, anterior triangle, anterior median region of the neck deep
structure in the neck. 03. Cranial cavity - Meninges, parts of brain, ventricles of brain, dural
venous sinuses, cranial nerves attached to the brain, pituitary gland. 04. Cranial nerves - III,
IV, V, VI, VII, IX,, XII in detail. 05. Orbital Cavity - Muscles of the eye ball, supports of the eye,
ball, nerves and vessels in the orbit. 06. Parotid gland. 07. Temporo mandibular joint, muscles
of mastication, infratemporal fossa, pterygo - palatine fossa. 08. Submandibular region. 09.
Walls of the nasal cavity, paranasal air sinuses. 10. Palate. 11. Oral cavity, Tongue 12.
Pharynx (palatine tonsil and the auditory tube) Larynx. OSTEOLOGY - foetal skull, adult skull,
individual bones of the skull , hyoid bone and cervical vertebrae.

III. THORAX : Demonstration on a dissected specimen of

Thoracic wall
Heart Chambers
Coronary arteries
Pericardium
5, Lungs - surfaces ; pleural cavity
6. Diaphragm

IV. ABDOMEN : Demonstration on a dissected specimen of

Peritoneal cavity
Organs in the abdomonial and pelvic cavity
V. CLINICAL PROCEDURE :
a) Intramuscular injections : Demonstration on a dissected specimen and on a living person of
the following sites of injection.
Deltoid muscles and its relation to the axillary nerve and radial nerve.
Gluteal region and the relation of the sciatic nerve.
Vastus lateralis muscle.
Intravenous injections and venesection : Demonstration of veins in the dissected specimen
and on a living person.
1. Median cubital vein 2. Cephalic Vein 3. Basilic vein 4. Long saphenous vein
Arterial pulsations : Demonstration of arteries on a dissected specimen and feeling of
pulsation of the following arteries on a living person.
1. Superficial temporal 2. Facial 3. carotid 4. Axillary 5. Brachial 6. Radial 7. Ulnan Femoral
9. Popliteal 10. Dorsalispedis
d) Lumbar puncture: Demonstration on a dissected specimen of the spinal cord cauda equine
and epidural space and the inter vertebral space between L4 & L5

VI. EMBRYOLOGY
Oogenesis, Spermatogenesis, Fertilisation, Placenta, Primitive streak, Neural crest, Bilaminar
and trilaminar embryonic disc, Intra embryonic mesoderm - formation and fate, notochord
formation and fate, Pharyngeal arches, pouches and clefts, Development of face, tongue,
palate, thyroid gland, pituitary gland, salivary glands and anomalies in their development,
Tooth development in brief.

VII. HISTOLOGY :
The Cell :
Basic Tissues - Epithelium, connective tissue including cartilage and bone, Muscle Tissues,
nervous tissue : Peripheral Nerve, optic nerve, sensory ganglion, motor ganglion, skin.
Classification of Glands
Salivary glands (serous, mucous and mixed gland), Blood vessels, Lymphoid tissue Tooth, lip,
tongue, hard palate, oesphagus, stomach, duodenum, ileum, colon, vermiform appendix Liver,
Pancreas, Lung, Trachea, Epiglottis, Thyroid gland, para thyroid gland, supra renal gland and
pituitary gland, kidney, ureter, Urninary bladder, Ovary and testis.
VIII. MEDICAL GENETICS :
Mitosis, meiosis, Chromoscomes, gene structure, Mendelism, modes of inheritance

RECOMMENDED BOOKS :
SNELL (Richrad S.) Clinical Anatomy for Medical students Ed. 5, Little Brown & Company
Boston.
RJ. LAST s Anatomy : McMinn, 9th edition.
ROMNANES (G.J.) Cunningham Manual of Practical Anatomy : Head & Neck & Brain Ed.
Vol. III, Oxford Medical Publication.
WHEATER, BURKITT & DANIELS, Functuional Histology, Ed. 2, Churchill Livingstone.
SADLER, LANGMAN S, Medical Embryology, Ed. 6.
JAMES E ANDERSON, Grant s Atlas of Anatomy. Williams & Wilkins.
WILLIAMS, Gray s Anatomy, Ed. 38., Churchill Livingstone.
EMERY, Medical Genetics.
Text book of Human Histology with Colour Atlas - Inderbir Singh, 5th Edition
10. B.D. Chaurasiya s Hand Book of General Anatomy - B. D. Chaurasiya 3 rd Edition
11. Human Embryology - Inderbir Singh, C P Pal 8th Edition
B D Chaurasiya s Human Anatomy Regional & Applied - B.D. Chaurasiya- 5th Edition Vol. I, II, III
Anand s Human Anatomy Complete book for Dental Students (A text book of human
Anatomy) - Mahindra Kr. Anand - 1st Edition
Text book of Anatomy with Colour Atlas - Inderbir Singh 4th Edition, Vol. I, II, III

2. HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY
A) GOAL
The broad goal of the teaching undergraduate students in Human Physiology aims at
providing the student comprehensive knowledge of the normal functions of the organ systems
of the body to facilitate an understanding of the physiological basis of health and disease.
OBJECTIVE :
a) KNOWLEDGE :
At the end of the course, the student will be able to :
1. Explain the normal functioning of all the organ systems and their interactions for well co-
ordinated total body function.
Assess the relative contribution of each organ systems towards the maintenance of the
milieu interior.
List the physiological principles underlying the pathogenesis and treatment of disease.
b) SKILLS :
At the end of the course, the student shall be above to :
Conduct experiments designed for the study of physiological phenomena.
Interpret experimental and investigative data.
Distinguish between normal and abnormal data derived as a result of tests which he / she
has performed and observed in the laboratory.
c) INTEGRATION :
At the end of the integrated teaching the student shall acquire an integrated knowledge of
organ structure and function and its regulatory mechanisms.
B) COURSE CONTENT THEORY
1. GENERAL PHYSIOLOGY
Homeostasis: Basic concept, Feed back mechanisms.
Structure of cell membrane, transport across cell membrane.
Membrane potential.
2. BLOOD
Composition & functions of blood
Specific gravity, packed cell volume, factors affecting & methods of determination.
Plasma proteins : Types concentration, functions & variations.
Erythrocyte - Morphology, functions & variations. Erythropoietin & factors affecting
erythropoiesis.
ESR - Methods of estimation, factors affecting, variations & significance.
Haemoglobin - Normal concentration, method of determination & variation in
concentration. Blood Indices - MCV, MCH,MCHC - definition, normal values, variation.
Anaemia - Definition. classification, life span of RBC s destruction of RBC s, formation & fate
of bile pigments, Jaundice - types.
Leucocytes : classification, number percentage, distribution morphology, properties, functions
& variation. role of lymphocytes in immunity, leucopoiesis life span & fate of leucocytes.
Thromobocytes - Morphology, number, variations, function & thrombopoiesis.
Haemostatsis - Role of vasoconstriction, platelet plug formation in haemostasis, coagulation
factors, intrinsic & extrinsic pathways of coagulation, clot retraction.
Tests of haemostatic function, platelet count, clotting time, bleeding time, prothrombin time -

normal values, method & variations. Anticoagulants - mechanism of action. Bleeding disorders.

Blood groups : ABO & Rh system method of determination, importance, indications & dangers
of blood transfusion, blood substitutes.
Blood volume : Normal values variations.
Body fluids : distribution of total body water, intracellular & extra cellular compartments, major
anions & cations in intra and extra cellular fluid.
Tissue fluids & lymph : Formation of tissue fluid, composition, circulation and functions of
lymph. Oedema - causes.
Functions of reticulo endotrelial system.
3. MUSCLE AND NERVE
classification of nerves, structure of skeletal muscle - Molecular mechanism of muscle
contraction, neuromuscular transmission. Properties of skeletal muscle. Structure and
properties of cardiac muscle & smooth muscle.
4. DIGESTIVE SYSTEM :
Introduction to digestion : General structure of G.I. tract, Innervation
Salivary glands : Structure of salivary glands, composition, regulation of secretion and
functions of saliva.
Stomach : composition and functions of gastric juice, mechanism and regulation of gastric
secretion.
Exocrine Pancreas - Structure, composition of pancreatic juice, functions of each component,
regulation of pancreatic secretion.
Liver : structure, composition of bile, functions of bile, regulation of
secretion Gall bladder : structure, functions
Small intestine - Composition, functions & Regulation of secretion of intestinal
juice. Large Intestine - Functions
Motor functions of GIT : Mastication, deglutition, gastric filling & emptying, movements of
small and large intestine, defecation.
5. EXTRETORY SYSTEM :
Structure & functions of kidney, functional unit of kidney & functions of different
parts. Juxta glomerular apparatus, renal blood flow.
Formation of Urine : Glomerular filteration rate - definition, determination, normal values,
factors influencing G.F.R. Tubular reabsorption - Reabsorption of sodium, glucose, water &
other substances. Tubular secretion Secretion of urea, hydrogen & other substances.
Mechanism of concentration & dilution of urine.
Role of kidney in the regulation of pH of the blood.
Micturition : anatomy & innervation of Urinary bladder, mechanism of miturition & abonrmalities
 BODY TEMPERATURE & FUNCTIONS of SKIN
ENDOCRINOLOGY
General endocrinology - Enumeration of endocrine glands & hormones - General functions of
endocrine system, chemistry, mechanism of secretion, transport, metabolism, regulation of
secretion of harmonous.
Hormones of anterior pituitary & their actions, hypothamic regulation of anterior pituitary
function. Disorders of secretion of anterior pituitary hormones.
Posterior pituitary : Functions, regulation & disorders of secretion.
Thyroid : Histology, synthesis, secretion & transport of hormones, actions of hormones
regulation of secretion & disorders, Thyroid function tests.
Adrenal cortex & Medulla - synthesis, secretion, action, metabolism, regulation of secretion of
hormones & disorders.
Other hormones - Angiotensin A.N.F.
8. REPRODUCTION
Sex differentiation, Physiological anatomy of male and female sex organs,
Female reproductive system: Menstrual cycle, functions of ovary, actions of oestrogen &
Progesterone, control of secretion of ovarian hormones tests for ovulation, fertilization,
implantation, material changes during pregnancy, pregnancy tests & parturition.
Lactation, composition of milk factors controlling lactation, milk ejection, reflex,
Male reproductive system : spermatogenesis, semen and contraception.
9. CARDIO VASCULAR SYSTEM
Functional anatomy and innervation of heart properties of cardiac
muscle. Origin & propagation of cardiac impulse and heart block.
Electrocardiogram - Normal electrocardiogram. Two changes in ECG in myocardial infarction.
Cardiac cycle - Phases, Pressure changes in atria,, ventricles &
aorta. Volume changes in ventricles. Jugular venous pulse, arterial
pulse. Heart sounds : Mention of murmurs
Heart rate : Normal value, variation & regulation
Cardiac output : Definition, normal values, one method of determination, variation factors
affecting heart rate and stroke volume.
Arterial blood pressure : Definition, normal values & variations, determinants, regulation &
measurement of blood pressure.
coronary circulation.
Cardio vascular homeostasis - Exercise & Posture.
10. RESPIRATORY SYSTEM
Physiology of Respiration: External & internal respiration
Functional anatomy of respiratory passage & lungs.
Respiratory movements : Muscles of respiration, mechanism of inflation & deflation of lungs
Intra pleural & intra pulmonary pressures & their changes during the phases of
respiration. Mechanics of breathing - surfactant, compliance & work of breathing.
Spirometry : Lung volumes & capacities definition, normal values, significance, factors
affecting vital capacity, variations in vital capacity, FEV & its variations.
Pulmonary ventilation - alveolar ventilation & dead space - ventilation
Composition of inspired air, alveolar air and expired air.
Exchange of gases : Diffusing capacity, factors affecting it
Transport of Oxygen & carbon dioxide in the blood
Regulation of respiration - Neural & chemical
Hypoxia cyanosis, dyspnoea, periodic breathing
Artificial respiration, pulmonary function tests.
11. CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM
Organization of central nervous system
Neuronal organization at spinal cord level
Synapse receptors, reflexes, sensations and tracts
Physiology of pain
Functions of cerebellum thalamus, hypothalamus and cerebral cortex
Formation and functions of CSF
Autonomic nervous system
12. SPECIAL SENSES
Fundamental knowledge of vision, hearing taste and smell
PRACTICALS
The following list of practical is minimum and essential. all the practical have been categorized
as procedures and demonstrations. The procedures are to be performed by the students
during practical classes to acquire skills. All the procedures are to be included in the University
practical examination. Those categorized as demonstrations are to be shown to the students
during practical classes. However these demonstrations would not be included in the
University examinations but question based on this would be given in the form of charts,
graphs and calculations for interpretation by the students.
PROCEDURE
Enumeration of Red Blood Cells
Enumeration of White Blood Cells
Differential leucocyte counts
Determination of Haemoglobin
Determination of blood group
Determination of bleeding time and clotting time
Examination of pulse
Recording of blood pressure.
DEMONSTRSTION
Determination of packed cell volume and erythrocyte sedimentation rate
Determination of specific gravity of blood
Determination of erythrocyte fragility
Determination of vital capacity and timed vital capacity
Skeletal muscle experiments
study of laboratory appliance in experimental physiology. Frog s gastocneminus sciatic
preparation. Simple muscle curve, effects of two successive stimuli, effects of increasing
strength of stimuli, effects of temperature, genesis of fatigue and tetanus. Effect of after load
and free load on muscle contraction, calculation of work done.
Electrocardiography : Demonstration of recording of normal Electro cardiogram
Clinical examination of cardiovascular and respiratory system.
TEXT BOOKS
Guyton ; Text book of Physiology, 9th edition
Ganong ; Review of medical Physiology, 19 th edition
Vander, Human Physiology, 5th edition
Choudhari ; Concise Medical Physiology, 2nd edition
Chaterjee : Human Physiology, 10th edition
A.K. Jain : Human Physiology for BDS students, 1 st edition.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
Berne & Levey ; Physiology, 2nd edition
Vest-Best & Taylor s Physiological basis of Medical Practise, 11 th edition
EXPERIMENTAL PHYSIOLOGY ;
Rannade ; Practical Physiology, 4th edition
Ghai; a text book of practical physiology
Hutchison s ; Clinical Methods, 20th edition
 BIOCHEMISTRY

AIMS AND SCOPE OF THE COURSE IN BIOCHEMISTRY

The major aim is to provide a sound but crisp knowledge on the biochemical basis of the life
processes relevant to the human system and to dental / medical practice. The contents should
be organized to build on the already existing information available to the students in the pre
university stage and reorienting. A mere rehash should be avoided.
The chemistry portion should strive towards providing information on the functional groups,
hydrophobic and hydrophilic moieties and weak valence forces that organize
macromolecules. Details on structure need not be emphasized.
Discussion on metabolic processes should put emphasis on the overall change,
interdependence and molecular turnover. While details of the steps may be given, the student
should not be expected to memories them,. An introduction to biochemical genetics and
molecular biology is a must but details should be avoided. The exposure to antivitamins,
antimetabolites and enzyme inhibitors at this stage, will provide a basis for the future study of
medical subjects. An overview of metabolic regulation is to be taught by covering hormonal
action, second messengers and regulation of enzyme activities. Medical aspects of
biochemistry should avoid describing innumerable functional tests, most of which are not in
vogue. Cataloguing genetic disorders under each head of metabolism is unnecessary. A few
examples which correlate genotype change to functional changes should be adequate.
At the end of the course of the students would be able to acquire a useful core of information
which can be retained for a long time. Typical acid tests can be used to determine what is to
be taught or what is to be learnt. A few examples are given below.
Need not know the structure of cholesterol. Should kbnow why it cannot be carried free in
plasma
Mutarotation should not be taught. Student should know why amylase will not hydrolyse
cellulose.
Need not know the details of alpha - helix and beta - pleats in proteins should know why
haemoglobin is globular and keratin is fibrous.
Need not know mechanism of oxidative phosphorylation.
Should know more than 90% of ATP is formed by this process
5. Need not know details of the conversion of pepsinogen to pepsin
Should know hydrochloric acid cannot break a peptide bond at room
temperature. 6. Need not remember the steps of glycogenesis.
should know that excess intake of carbohudrate will not increase glycogen level in liver or
muscle.
7. Need not know about urea or cretinine clearance tests.
Should know the basis of increase of urea and cretinine in blood in renal insufficiency.
8. Need not know the structure of insulin
should know why insulin level in circulation is normal in most cases of maturity onset diabetes.
9. Need not know the structural details of ATP.
Should know why about 10 g of ATP in the body at any given time meets all the energy
needs. 10. Need not know the mechanism of action of prolyhydroxylase
should know why the gum bleeds in scurvy.
11. Need not know the structure of vitamin K.
Should know the basis of internal bleeding arising due to its deficiency.
12. Need not remember the structure of HMGCoA.
should know why it does not lead to increased cholesterol synthesis in starvaticn.

BIOCHEMISTRY & NUTRITION

1. CHEMISTRY OF BIOORGANIC MOLECULES

Carbohydrates : Definition, Biological importance and classification. Monosaccharides -
Isomerism, anomerism. Sugar derivatives, Disaccharides. Polysaccharides. Structure of starch
and glycogen.
Lipids : Definition, biological importance and classification. Fats and fatty acids. Introduction to
compound lipids. Hydrophobic and hydrophilic groups. Cholesterol. Bile salts. Micelle.
Bimolecular leaflet.
Proteins : Biological importance. Aminoacids : Classification. Introduction to peptides. Proteins
: simpe and conjugated ; globular and fibrous. Charge properties. Buffer action. Introduction to
protein conformation : Denaturation.
Nucleic acids : Building units, Nucleotides. Outline structure of DNA and RNA.
High energy compounds : ATP, Phosphorylamidines, Thiolesters, Enol phosphates.
2. MACRONUTERIENTS AND DIGESTION
Energy needs : Basal metabolic rate. dietary carbohydrates, fibres. Dietary lipids, essential
fatty acids. Nitrogen balance. Essential amono acids. Protein quality and requirement
(methods for evaluation of protein quality to be excluded). Protein calorie malnutrition.
Balanced diet.
Enzymatic hydrolysis of dietary carbohydrates. Mechanism of uptake of monosaccharides.
Digestion and absorption of triacylglycerols. Enzymatic hydrolysis of dietary proteins and
uptake of amino acids.
3. MICRONUTRIENTS :
Vitamins : Definition, classification, daily requirement, sources and deficiency symptoms. Brief
account of water- soluble vitamins with biochemical functions. Vitamins A functions including
visual process. Vitamin D and its role in calcium metabolism. Vitamin E. Vitamin K and
gamma carboxylation. Introduction to antivitamins and hypervitaminosis.
Minerals : Classification, daily requirement. Calcium and phosphate: sources, uptake,
excretion, function, serum calcium regulation. Iron : Sources uptake and transport.
Heme and nonheme iron functions deficiency. Iodine; Brief introduction to thyroxine
synthesis. General functions of thyroxine. Fluoride : function, deficiency and excess
indications of role of other minerals.
4. ENERGY METABOLISM
Overview : Outline of glycolysis pyruvate oxidation and citric acid cycle. Beta oxidation of fatty
acids. Electron transport chain and oxidative phosphyorylation. Ketone body formation and
utilization. Introduction to glycogenesis, glycogenolysis, fatty acid synthesis, lipogenesis and
lipolysis. Gluconeogenesis. Lactate metabolism. Protein utilization for energy. Glucogenic and
ketogenic amino acids. Integration of metabolism.
5. SPECIAL ASPECTS OF METABOLISM
Importance of pentose phosphate pathway. Formation of glucuronic acid. Outlines of
cholesterol synthesis and breakdown. Ammonia metabolism. Urea formation phosphocretine
formation. Transmethylation. amines. Introduction to other functions of amino acids including
one carbon transfer. Detoxication : Typical reactions. Examples of toxic compounds. Oxygen
toxicity.
6. BIOCHEMICAL GENETICS AND PROTEIN SYNTHESIS
Introduction to nucleotides formation and degradation. DNA as genetic material. Introduction
to replication and transcription. Forms and function of RNA. Gnetic code and mutation. Outline
of translation process. Antimetabolies and antibiotics interfering in replication. transcription
and translation. Introduction to cancer, viruses and oncogenes.
7. ENZYME AND METABOLIC RELATION
Enzymes : definition, classification, specificity and active site. Cofactros. Effect of pH
temperature and substrate concentration. Introduction to enzyme inhibitors, proenzymes
and isoenzymes. Introduction to allosteric regulation, covalent modification and regulation by
induction / repression.
Overview of hormones, Introduction to second messengers, cyclic AMP, calcium ion, inositol
triphosphate. Mechanism of action steroid hormones, epinephrine, glucagons and insulin in
brief. Acid base regulation. Electrolyte balance.
8. STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS AND BLOOD PROTEINS
Connective tissue : Collagen and elastin. Glycosaminoglycans. Bone structure. Structure of
membranes. Membrane associated processes in brief. Exocytosis and endocytosis.
Introduction to cytoskeleton. Myofibril and muscle contraction in brief.
Hemoglobin : Functions. Introduction to heme synthesis and degradation. Plasma protein
classification and separation. Functions of albumin. A brief account of immunoglobulins.
Plasma lipoproteins : Formation; function and turnover.
9. MEDICAL BIOCHEMISTRY
Regulation of blood glucose. Diabetes mellitus and related disorders. Evaluation of glycemic
status. Hyperthyroidism and hypothyroidism : Biochemical evaluation. Hyperlipoproteinemias
and atherosclerosis, Approaches to treatment. Jaundice : classification and evaluation. Liver
function tests : Plasma protein pattern, serum enzymes level. Brief introduction to kidney
function tests and gastric function tests. Acid base imbalance. Electrolyte imbalance
evaluation. Gout Examples of genetic disorders including lysosomal storage disorders
glycogen storage disorders, glucose 6 - phosphate dehydrogenase deficiency,
hemoglobinopathies, inborn errors of amino acid metabolism and muscular dystrophy (one or
two examples with biochemical basis will be adequate). serum enzymes in diagnosis.
PRACTICAL : Contact hours 50
1. Quantitative analysis of carbohydrates 4
2. Color reactions of proteins and amino acids 4
3. Identification of nonprotein nitrogen substance 4
4. Normal constituents of urine 4
5. Abnormal constituents of urine 4
6. Analysis of saliva including amylase 2
7. Analysis of milk Quantitative estimations 2
8. Titrable acidity and ammonia in urine 2
9. Free and total acidity in gastric juice 2
10. Blood glucose estimation 2
11. Serum total protein estimation 2
12. Urine creatinine estimation Demonstration 2
13. Paper electrophoresis charts / clinical data evaluation 2
14. Glucose tolerance test profile 2
15. Serum lipid profiles 1
16. Profiles of hypothyrodisim and hyperthyrodisim 1
17. Profiles of hyper and hypoparathyrodism 1
18. Profiles of liver function 1
19. Urea, uric acid creatinine profile in kidney disorders 1
20. Blood gas profile in acidosis / alkalosis 1
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
“Essential of Biochemistry” as a Text Book for Ist year BDS Course – Pankaja Naik
Concise text book of Biochemistry (3rd edition) 2001, T.N. Pattabiraman
Nutritional Biochemistry 1995, S. Ramakrishnan and S. V. Rao
Lecture notes in Biochemistry 1984, J. K. Kandlish

Reference Books :
Test book of Biochemistry with clinical correlations 1997, T. N. Devlin
Harper s Biochemistry, 1996., R. K. Murray et.al
Basic and applied Dental Biochemistry, 1979, R.A.D. Williams & J.C. Elliot.

DENTAL ANATOMY, EMBRYOLOGY AND ORAL HISTOLOGY

INTRODUCTION
Dental Anatomy including Embryology and Oral Histology - a composite of basic Dental
Sciences and their clinical applications.
SKILLS
The student should acquire basic skills in :
Carving of crowns of permanent teeth in wax.
Microscopic study of Oral tissues.
Identification of Deciduous & Permanent teeth
Age estimation by patterns of teeth eruption from plaster casts of different age groups.
OBJECTIVES :
After a course on Dental Anatomy including Embryology and Oral Histology,
1. The student is expected to appreciate the normal development, morphology, structure and
functions of oral tissues and variations in different pathological / non pathological states
The student should understand the histological basis of various dental treatment
procedures and physiologic ageing process in the dental tissues.
3. The students must know the basic knowledge of various research methodologies.
I. TOOTH MORPHOLOGY
1. Introduction to tooth morphology :
Human dentition, types of teeth & functions, Palmer s & Binomial notation systems, tooth
surfaces, their junctions - line angles & point angles, definition of terms used in dental
morphology, geometric concepts in tooth morphology, contact areas & embrasures - clinical
significance.
2. Morphology of permanent teeth :
Description of individual teeth, alongwith their endodontic anatomy and including a note on
their chronology of development differences between similar class of teeth and identification
of individual teeth.
Variations and Anomalies commonly seen in individual teeth
3. Morphology of Deciduous teeth :
Generalized differences between Deciduous & Permanent teeth
Description of individual deciduous teeth, including their chronology of development
endodontic anatomy, differences between similar class of teeth & identification of individual
teeth
4. Occlusion :
Definition, factors influencing occlusion - basal bone, arch, individual teeth, external and
internal forces and sequence of eruption.
Inclination of individual teeth - compensatory curves.
Centric relation and centric occlusion - protrusive, retrusive and lateral occlusion.
Clinical significance of normal occlusion.
Introduction to and classification of Malocclusion.

II. ORAL EMBRYOLOGY :

Brief review of development of face, jaws, lip, palate & tongue, with applied aspects.
Development of teeth :
Epithelial mesenchymal interaction, detailed study of different stages of development of
crown, root & supporting tissues of tooth & detailed study of formation of calcified tissues.
Applied aspects of disorders in development of teeth.
3. Eruption of deciduous and permanent teeth.
Mechanisms in tooth eruption, different theories & histology of eruption, formation of
dentogingival junction, role of gubernacular cord in eruption of permanent teeth.
Clinical or applied aspects of disorders of eruption.
4. Shedding of teeth.
Factors & Mechanisms of shedding of deciduous teeth.
Complications of shedding.

III ORAL HISTOLOGY

1. Detailed microscopic study of Enamel, Dentine, Cementum and Pulp tissue. Age changes
and Applied aspects (clinical and forensic significance) of histological consideration Fluoride
applications, transparent dentine; dentine hypersensitivity, reaction of pulp tissue to varying
insults to exposed dentine ; Pulp calcifications & Hypercementosis.
2. Detailed microscopic study of Periodontal ligament and alveolar bone, age changes,
histological changes in periodontal ligament and bone in normal and orthodontic tooth
movement, applied aspects of alveolar bone resorption.
Detailed microscopic study of Oral Mucosa, variation in structure in relation to functional
requirements, mechanisms of keratinization, clinical parts of gingiva, Dentogingval and
Mucocutaneous junctions and lingual papillae. Age changes and clinical considerations.
Salivary Glands :
Detailed microscopic study of acini and ductal system.
Age changes and clinical considerations.
5. T.M. Joint :
Review of basic anatomical aspects and microscopic study and clinical considerations.
6. Maxillary sinus :
Microscopic study, anatomical variations, functions and clinical relevance of maxillary
sinus in dental practice.
7. Processing of Hard and soft tissues for microscopic study :
Ground sections, decalcified sections and routine staining procedures
8. Basic histochemical staining patterns of oral tissues.

IV. ORAL PHYSIOLOGY

1. Saliva :
Composition of saliva - variations, formation of saliva and mechanisms of secretion, salivary
reflexes, brief review of secretomotor pathway, functions, role of saliva in dental caries and
applied aspects of hyper and hypo salivation.
2. Mastication :
Masticatory force and its measurement - need for mastication, peculiarities of masticatory
muscles, masticatory cycle, masticatory reflexes and neural control of mastication.
3. Deglutition :
Review of the steps in deglutition, swallowing in infants, neural control of deglutition and
dysphagia.
4. Calcium Phosphorous and fluoride metabolism :
Source, requirements, absorption, distribution, functions and excretion, clinical
considerations, hypo & hypercalcemia & hyper & hypo phosphatemia & fluorosis.
5. Theories of Mineralization :
Definition, mechanisms, theories & their drawbacks.
Applied aspects of physiology of mineralization, pathological considerations - calculus
formation.
6. Physiology of Taste :
Innervations of taste buds and taste pathway, physiologic basis of taste sensation, age
changes and applied aspects - taste disorders.
7. Physiology of speech
Review of basic anatomy of larynx and vocal cords.
Voice production, resonators, production of vowels and different consonants - Role of
palate, teeth and tongue.
Effects of dental prosthesis and appliances on speech and basic speech disorders.
RECOMMENDED TEXT BOOKS :
Orban s Oral Histology & Embryology - S. N. Bhaskar.
Oral Development & Histology - James & Avery
Wheeler s Dental Anatomy, Physiology & Occlusion - Major M, Ash
Dental Anatomy - its relevance to dentistry - Woelfel & Scheid
Applied Physiology of the mouth - Lavelle
Physiology & Biochemistry of the mouth - Jenkins

4. GENERAL PATHOLOGY
AIM :
At the end of the course the student should be competent to :
Apply the scientific study of disease processes, which result in morphological and functional
alterations in cells, tissues and organs to the study of pathology and the practice of dentistry.
OBJECTIVES :
Enabling the student
To demonstrate and apply basic facts, concepts and theories in the field of Pathology.
To recognize and analyze pathological changes at macroscopically and microscopical levels
and explain their observations in terms of disease processes.
3. To integrate knowledge from the basic sciences, clinical medicine and dentistry in the study
of pathology.
To demonstrate understanding of the capabilities and limitations of morphological
Pathology in its contribution to medicine, dentistry and biological research.
To demonstrate ability to consult resource materials outside lectures, laboratory and tutorial
classes.
COURSE COUNTENT
A. General Pathology
Ā Ȁ ⸀Ā ⸀ Ā ⸀ Ā ⸀ Ā ⸀
ntroduction to Pathology
Terminologies
The cell in health
The normal cell structure
The cellular functions
Ā Ȁ ⸀Ā ⸀ Ā ⸀ Ā ⸀
tiology and Pathogenesis of Disease
Cell Injury
Types - congenital
Acquired
Mainly Acquired causes of disease
(Hypoxic injury, chemical injury, physical injury, immunological injury)
Ā Ȁ ⸀Ā ⸀ Ā ⸀ Ā ⸀ Ā ⸀
egenerations
Amyloidosis
Fatty change
Cloudy swelling
Hyaline change, mucoid degernation
Ā Ȁ ⸀Ā ⸀ Ā ⸀ Ā ⸀
ell death & Necrosis
Apoptasis
Def, causes, features and types of necrosis
Gangrene - Dry, wet, gas
Pathological Calcification

(Dystrophic and metastatic)

Inflammation
- Definition, causes types, and
features Acute inflammation
a. The vascular response
The cellular response
Chemical Mediators
The inflammatory cells
Fate
Chronic inflammation
Granulomations inflammation
Healing
- Regeneration
- Repair
Mechanism
Healing by primary intention
Healing by secondary intention
Fracture healing
Factors influencing healing process
Complications
Tuberculosis
- Epidemiology
- Pathogenesis (Formation of tubercle)
- Pathological features of Primary and secondary
TB - Complications and Fate
Syphilis
- Epidemiology
- Types and stages of syphilis
- Pathological features
- Diagnostic criterias
- Oral lesions
Typhoid
- Epidemiology
- Pathogenesis
- Pathological features

- Diagnostic crtiterias.
 Thrombosis
Definition, Pathophysiology
Formation, complications & Fate of a thrombus.
Embolism
Definition
Types
Effects
Ischaemia and infraction
Definition, etiology, types
Infraction of various organs.
Derangements of body fluids
Oedema - Pathogenesis
Different types
Disorders of circulation
Hyperaemia
Shock
Nutritional Disorders
Common Vitamin Deficiencies
Immunological mechanisms in disease
Humoral & cellular immunity
Hypersensitivity & autommunity
AIDS and Hepatitis
Hypertension
Definition, classification
Pathophysilogy
Effects in various organs.
Diabetes Mellitus
Def, Classification, Pathogenesis, Pathology in different organs.l
Adaptive disorders of growth
Atrophy & Hypertrophy, Hyperplasia, Metaplasia and Dysplasia
General Aspects of neoplesia
Definition, terminology, classification
Differences between benign and malignant neoplasms
The neoplastic cell
Metastasis
 Etiology and pathogenesis of neoplasia, Carcinogenesis
Tumour biology.
Oncogenes and anti oncogenes
Diagnosis
Precancerous lesions
j Common specific tumours, Sq papilloma & Ca, Basal cell Ca, Adenoma & Adenoca, Fibroma
& Fibrosarcoma, Lipoma and
liposarcoma B. Systematic Pathology -
Anaemias
Iron Deficiency anaemia, Megaloblastic Anaemia
Leukaemias
Acute and chronic leukaemias, Diagnosis and clinical features
Diseases of Lymph nodes
Hodgkin s disease, Non Hodgkins lymphoma, Metastatic carcinoma
Diseases of Oral cavity
Lichen planus, stomatitis, Leukoplakia, Sq cell ca, Dental caries, Dentigerious cyst,
Ameloblastoma
Disease of salivary glands
Normal structure, siaiadenitis, Tumours.
Common diseases of Bones
Osteomyelitis, Metabolic bone diseases, Bone Tumours, Osteosarcoma,
Osteocalstoma, Giant cell Tumours, Ewing s sarcoma, fibrous dysplasia,
Aneurysmal bone cyst.
Diseases of Cardiovascular system
Cardiac failure
Congenital heart disease - ASD, VSD,
PDA Fallot s Tetrology
Infective Endocarditis
Atherosclerosis
Ischaemic heart Disease
Haemorrhagic Disorders
Coagulation cascade
Coagulation disorders
Platelet function
Platelet disorders
Practicals
Urine - Abnormal constitutients
Sugar, albumin, Ketone bodies
Urine - Abnormal constituents
Blood, bile salts, bile pigments
Haemoglobin (Hb) estimation
Total WBC count
Differential WBC count
Packed cell volume (PCV,) rythrocyte sedimentation Rate (ESR)
Bleeding time & Clotting time
Histopathology
Tissue Processing
Staining
Histopathology slides
Acute appendicitis, Granulation tissue, fatty liver.
Histopathology slides.
CVC lung, CVC liver, kidney amyloidosis
11. Histopathology slides
tuberculosis, Actionomycosis,
Rhinosporidiosis 12. Histopathology slides
Papilloma, Basal cell Ca, Sq cell
Ca 13. Histopathology slides
Osteosarcoma, osteoclastoma,
fibrosarcoma 14. Histopathology slides
Malignant melanoma, Ameloblastoma
Adenoma 15. Histopathology slides
Mixed parotid tumour, metastatic
carcinoma in lymph node
List of Textbooks
Robins - Pathologic Basis of Disease Cotran, Kumar, Robbins
Anderson s Pathology Vol 1 & 2 Editors - Ivan Damjanov & James Linder
Wintrobe s clinical Haematolog Lee, Bithell, forester, Athens, Lukens
 MICROBIOLOGY
AIM:
To introduce the students to the exciting world of microbes. To make the students aware of
various branches of microbiology, importance, significance and contribution of each branch to
mankind and other fields of medicine. The objectives of teaching microbiology can be
achieved by various teaching techniques such as :
Lecturers
Lecture Demonstrations
Practical exercises
Audio visual aids
Small group discussions with regular feed back from the students.
OBJECTIVE :
A. KNOWLEDGE AND UNDERSTANDING
At the end of the Microbiology course the student is expected to:
Understand the basics of various branches of microbiology and able to apply the
knowledge relevantly
Apply the knowledge gained in related medical subjects like General Medicine and General
Surgery and Dental subjects like Oral Pathology, Community Dentistry, Periodontics Oral
Surgery, Pedodontics, Conservative Dentistry and Oral medicine in higher classes.
Understand and practice various methods of sterilization and disinfection in dental clinics.
Have a sound understanding of various infectious diseases and lesions in the Oral Cavity.
A. SKILLS
Student should have acquired the skill to diagnose, differentiate various oral lesions.
Should be above to select, collect and transport clinical specimens to the laboratory.
Should be able to carry out proper aseptic procedures in the dental clinic
A brief syllabus of Microbiology is given as follows ;

A. GENERAL MICROBIOLOGY
Histology, Introduction, Scope, Aims and Objectives
Morphology and Physiology of Bacteria
Detail account of Sterilization and Disinfection
Brief account of Culture media and Culture techniques
Basic knowledge of selection, collection, transport, processing of clinical specimens and
identification of bacteria.
6. Bacterial Genetics and Drug Resistance in bacteria
B. IMMUNOLOGY
Infection - Definition, Classification, Source, mode of transmission and types of infectious
disease.
Immunity
Structure and functions of Immune system
The complement system
Antigen
Immunoglobulins : Antibodies - General structure and the role played in defense
mechanism of the body.
Immune response
Antigen - Antibody reactions - with reference to clinical utility
Immuno deficiency disorders - a brief knowledge of various types of immuno deficiency
disorders - A sound knowledge of immuno deficiency disorders relevant to dentistry.
Hypersensitivity reactions
Autoimmune disorders - Basic knowledge of various types - sound knowledge of
autoimmune disorders of oral cavity and related structure
Immunology of Transplantation and Malignancy
Immunehaematology

C. SYSTEMATIC BACTERIOLOGY :
Pyogenic cocci - Staphylococcus, Streptococcus, Pneumococcus, Gonococcus,
Meningococcus - brief account of each coccus - detailed account of mode of spread,
laboratory diagnosis, chemo therapy and prevention - Detailed account of cariogenic
streptococci
Corynebacterium diphtheriae - mode of spread, important clinical feature, Laboratory
diagnosis , Chemotherapy and Active immunization.
Mycobacteria - Tuberculosis and Leprosy
Clostridium - Gas gangrene, food poisoning and tetanus.
Non - sporing Anaerobes - in, brief about classification and morphology, in detail about
dental pathogens - mechanism of disease production and prevention.
Spirochaetes - Treponema Pallidum - detailed account of Oral Lesions of syphilis,
Borrelia vincentii
7. Actinomycetes.
D. VIROLOGY
Introduction
General properties, cultivation, host - virus interaction with special reference to interferon 3,
Brief account of Laboratory diagnosis, Chemotherapy and immuno prophylaxis in general
4. A few viruses of relevance to dentistry
Herpes Virus
Hepatitis B Virus - brief about other types
Human Immunodeficiency virus (HIV)
Mumps Virus
Brief - Measles and Rubella Virus
5. Bacteriophage - Structure and Significance
E. MYCOLOGY
Brief Introduction
candidosis - in detail
Briefly on oral lesions of systemic mycoses.
F. PARASITOLOGY:
Brief introduction - protozoans and helminths
Brief knowledge about the mode of transmission and prevention of commonly seen
parasitic infection in the region.
RECOMMENDED BOOKS FOR REGULAR READING
Text book of Microbilogy - A. Ananthanarayan & C.K. Jayaram Paniker
Medical Microbiology - David Greenwood etal

BOOKS FOR FURTHER READING / REFERENCE

Microbiology - Prescott, etal
Microbiology - Bernard D. Davis, etal
Clinical & Pathogenic Microbiology - Barbara J. Howard, etal
Mechanisms of Microbial diseases - Moselio Schaechter, etal
Immunology an Introduction - Tizard
Immunology 3rd edition - Evan Roitt, etal

5.GENERAL AND DENTAL PHARMACOLOGY AND THERAPEUTICS

GOAL :
The broad goal of teaching under graduate students in pharmacology is to inculcate rational
and scientific basis of therapeutics keeping in view of dental curriculum and Profession.
OBJECTIVES :
At the end of the course the student shall be able to :
Describe the pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics of essential and commonly used
drugs in general and in dentistry in particular
List the indications, contraindications; interactions, and adverse reactions of commonly
used drugs with reason.
Tailor the use of appropriate drugs in disease with consideration to its cost, efficacy safety
for individual and mass therapy needs.
Indicate special care in prescribing, common and essential drugs in special medical
situations such as pregnancy, lactation, old age, renal, hepatic damage and immuno
compromised patients.
Integrate the rational drug therapy in clinical pharmacology
Indicate the principles underlying the concepts of Essential Drugs .

SKILLS :
At the end of the course the student shall be able to:
Prescribe drugs for common dental and medical ailments
To appreciate adverse reactions and drug interactions of commonly used drugs.
Observe experiments designed for study of effects of drugs
Critically evaluate drug formulations and be able to interpret the clinical pharmacology of
marketed preparations commonly used in dentistry.
INTEGRATION : practical knowledge of use of drugs in clinical practice will be acquired
through integrated teaching with clinical departments.
LECTURE:
GERNERAL PHARMACOLOGY :
General principles of pharmacology ; sources and nature of drugs dosage forms;
prescription writing; pharmacokinetics (absorption, distribution, metabolism and
excretion of drugs), mode of action of drugs, combined effect of drugs, receptor
mechanism of drug action, factors modifying drug response, adverse drug reactions;
drug interactions, Implications of General Principles in clinical dentistry.
CNS drugs; General anaesthetics, Hypnotics, analgescis psychotropic drugs, anti-
epileptics, muscle relaxants, local anaesthetics, implications of these drugs in clinical
dentistry.
Autonomic drugs ; sympathomimetics, antiadrenergic drugs parasympothomimetics and
parasympatholytics, Implications of Autonomic drugs in clinical dentistry.
 Cardiovascular drugs ; cardiac stimulants ; antihypertensive drugs, vasopressor agents,
treatment of shock, Antianginal agents and diuretics, Implications of these drugs in
clinical dentistry.
Autocoids :
Histamine, antihistamines, prostaglandins, leukotriens and bronchodilators,
Implications of Autocoids in Clinical dentistry.
Drugs acting on blood : coagulants and anticoagulants, hematinics, Implications of these
drugs in clinical dentistry.
G.I.T. Drugs, Purgatives, anti-diarrhoeal, antacids, anti-emetics, implications of these
drugs in clinical dentistry.
Endocrines; Emphasis on treatment of diabetes and glucocorticoids, thyroid and
antithyroid agents, drugs affecting calcium balance and anabolic steroids, Implications
of these drugs in clinical dentistry.
Chemotherapy : Antimicrobial agents (against bacteria, anaerobic infections, fungi, virus
and broad spectrum). Infection management in dentistry. Pharmacotherapy of
Tuberculosis, leprosy and chemotherapy of malignancy in general. Implications of
chemotherapy in clinical dentistry.
Vitamins : Water soluble vitamins, Vit. D, Vit.K. and Vit E, Implications of Vitamins in
clinical dentistry.
Pharmacotherapy of emergencies in dental office and emergency drugs tray Implications
of Pharmacotherapy in clinical dentistry.
Chealating agents - BAL, EDTA and desferrioxamine,

II DENTAL PHARMACOLOGY
Anti - septics, astringents, obtundents, mummifying agents, bleaching agents, styptics,
disclosing agents, dentifrices, mouth washes, caries and fluorides.
Pharmacotherapy of common oral conditions in dentistry
Practicals and Demonstrations:
To familiarize the student with the methodology: prescription writing and
dispensing. Rationale of drug combinations of marked drugs.

LIST OF BOOKS RECOMMENDED FOR READING AND REFERENCE

R.S. Satoskar, Kale Bhandarkar s Pharmacology and Pharmacolherapentics, 10 th
Edition, Bombay Popular Prakashan 1991.
Bertam G Katzung, Basic and Clinical pharmacology 6 th ed. Appleton & Lange 1997.
 Lauerence D.R. Clinical Pharmacology 8 th ed. Churchill Livingstone 1997.
Satoskar R.S. & Bhandarkar S.D., Pharmacology and Pharmacotherapeutics part I & part
ii, 13th Popular prakashan Bombay 1993.
Tripathi K.D. Essentials of Medical Pharmacology 4 th ed Jaypee Brothers 1999.

6. DENTAL MATERIALS
The science of Dental Material has undergone tremendous changes over the years.
Continued research has led to new material systems and changing concepts in the dental
field. Interlinked with various specialized branched of chemistry, practically all engineering
applied sciences and biological characteristics, the science of dental material emerged as a
basic sciences in itself with its own values and principles.

INTRODUCTION
AIMS :
Aim of the course is to present basic chemical and physical properties of Dental materials as
they are related to its manipulation to give a sound educational background so that the
practice of the dentistry emerged from art to empirical status of science as more information
through further research becomes available. It is also the aim of the course of Dental
materials to provide with certain criteria of selection and which will enable to discriminate
between facts and propaganda with regards to claims of manufactures.
OBJECTIVES :
To understand the evolution and development of science of dental material
To explain purpose of course in dental materials to personnel concerned with the profession of
the dentistry. Knowledge of physical and chemical properties. Knowledge of biomechanical
requirements of particular restorative procedure. An intelligent compromise of the conflicting
as well as co-ordinating factors into the desired Ernest. Laying down standards or
specifications of various materials to guide to manufactures as well as to help professionals.
Search for newer and better materials which may answer our requirements with greater
satisfaction. To understand and evaluate the claims made by manufactures of dental
materials.

NEED FOR THE COURSE

The profession has to rise from an art ot a science, the need for the dentist to possess
adequate knowledge of materials to exercises his best through knowledge of properties of
different of types of materials. The growing concern of health hazards due to mercury toxicity,
inhalation of certain vapour or dust materials, irritations and allergic reaction to skin due to
contact of materials. Materials causing irritation of oral tissues, pH of restorative materials
causing inflammation and necrosis of pulp which is a cause for the dentist to posses wider
knowledge of physical, chemical and biological properties of materials being used. For the
protection for the patient and his own protection certain criteria of selection are provided that
will enable the dentist to discriminate between facts and propaganda, which will make a
material biologically accept.
SCOPE
The dental materials is employed in mechanical procedures including restorative dentistry such as
Prosthodontics, endodontics, periodontal, Orthodontics and restorative materials. There is
scarcely a dental procedure that does not make use of dental materials in one form or another
and therefore the application of dental material is not limited to any one branch of dentistry.
Branches such as minor surgery and periodontics require less use of materials but the
physical and chemical characters of materials are important in these field.
The toxic and tissue reaction of dental materials and their durability in the oral cavity where
the temperature is between 32 & 37 degree centigrade, and the ingestion of hot or cold food
ranges from 0-70 degree centigrade. The acid an alkalinity of fluids shown pH varies from 4 to
8.5. The load on 1 sq. mm of tooth or restorative materials can reach to a level as high a
many kilograms. Thus the biological properties of dental materials cannot be separated from
their physical and chemical properties.
2) STRUCTURE OF MATTER AND PRINCIPLES OF ADHESION
Change of state, inter atomic primary bonds, inter atomic secondary bonds, inter atomic bond
distance and bonding energy, thermal energy, crystalline structure, non crystalline structures,
diffusion, adhesion and bonding and adhesion to tooth structures.
3) IMPORTANT PHYSICAL PROPERTIES ALLICABLE TO DENTAL MATERIALS
Physical properties are based on laws of mechnics, acoustics, optics, thermodynamics,
electricity, magnetism, radiation, atomic structure or nuclear phenomena, Hue, value chroma
and translucency physical proerties based on laws of optics, dealing with phenomena of light,
vision and sight. Thermal conductivity and coefficient of thermal expansion are physical
properties based on laws of thermodynamics. Stress, strain proportional limit, elastic limit yield
strength, modulus of elasticity, flexibility, resilience, impact, impact strength, permanent
deformation, strength, flexure strength fatigue, static fatigue, toughness, brittleness, ductility
and malleability, hardness, abrasion resistance, relaxation, rheology, Thixotropic, creep, static
creep, dynamic creep, flow, color, three dimensional colour - hue values, chroma, Munsell
system, metamersim, fluorescence, physical properties of tooth stress during mastication.
4) BIOLOGICAL CONSIDERATIONS IN USE OF DENTAL MATERIALS
Materials used are with the knowledge of appreciation of certain biological considerations for
use in oral cavity. Requirement of materials with biological compatibility. Classification of
material from perspective of biological compatibility. eg. contact with soft tissues, affecting
vitality of pulp, used for root canal fillings, affecting hard tissues of teeth, laboratory materials
that could be accidentally be inhaled or ingested during handling. Hazards associated with
materials : pH effecting pulp, polymers causing chemical irritation, mercury toxicity, etc.
Microleakage, Thermal changes, Galvanism, toxic effect of materials. Biological evaluation for
systematic toxicity, skin irritation, mutagenecity and carcinogenicity. Disinfection of dental
materials for infection control.
5) GYPSUM & GYPSUM PRODUCTS
Gypsum - its origin chemical formula, products manufactured from gypsum.
Dental plaster, Dental stone, Die stone, high strength, high expansion stone.
Application and manufacturing procedure of each, macroscopic and microscopic structure of
each. Supplied as and commercial names.
Chemistry of setting, setting reaction, theories of setting, gauging water, Microscopic structure
of set material.
Setting time : working time and setting time, Measurement of setting time and factors
controlling setting time.
Setting expansion, Hygroscopic setting expansion - factors affecting each
Strength : wet strength, dry strength, factors affecting strength, tensile
strength Slurry - need and use.
Care of cast.
ADA classification of gypsum products
Description of impression plaster and dental investment
Manipulation including recent methods or advanced
methods. Disinfection : infection control, liquids, sprays,
radiation Method of use of disinfectants
Storage of material - shelf life
6) IMPRESSION MATERIALS USED IN DENTISTRY
Impression plaster, Impression compound, Zinc oxide eugenol impression paste and bite
registration paste incl., non eugenol paste, Hydrocolloids, reversible and irreversible,
Elastomeric impression materials. Polysulphide, Condensation silicones, Addition silicones,
Polyether, visible light cure polyether urethane dimethacrylate, Historical background and
development of each impression material,
Definition of impression, Purpose of making impression, Ideal properties required and
application of material, classification as per ADA specification, general & individual impression
material.
Application and their uses in different disciplines, Marketed as and their commercial names,
Mode of supply and mode of application bulk / wash impression. Composition, chemistry of
setting, Control of setting time, Type of impression trays required, Adhesion to tray
manipulation, instruments and equipments required. Techniques of impression, storage of
impression, (Compatibility with cast and die material). Any recent advancements in material
and mixing devices. Study of properties : Working time, setting time, flow, accuracy, strength,
flexibility, tear strength, dimensional stability, compatibility with cast & die materials incl.,
electroplating Biological properties : tissue reaction, Shelf life & storage of material, Infection
control-disinfection, Advantages & disadvantages of each material.
7) SYNTHETIC RESINS USED IN DENTISTRY
Historical, background and development of material, Denture base materials and their
classification and requirement
Classification of resins
Dental resins - requirements of dental resins, applications, polymerization, polymerization
mechanism stages in addition polymerization, inhibition of polymerisation, co polymerization,
molecular weight, crosslinking, plastixizers, Physical properties of polymers, polymer
structures types of resins.
ACRYLIC RESINS :
Mole of polymerization : Heat activated, Chemically activated, Light activated, Mode of supply,
application, composition, polymerization reaction of each. Technical considerations : Methods
of manipulation for each type of resin. Physical properties of denture base resin.
Miscellaneous resins & techniques. Repair resins, Relining and rebasing. Short term and long
- term soft - liners, temporary crown and bridge resins, Resin impression trays, Tray materials,
Resin teeth materials in maxillofacial prosthesis, Denture cleansers, Infection control in detail,
Biological properties and allergic reactions.
RESTORATIVE RESINS
Historical background, Resin based restorative materials, Unfilled & filled, Composite
restorative materials, Mode of supply, Composition, Polymerisation mechanisms : Chemically
activated. Light activated, Dual cure : Degree of conversion, Polymerisation shrinkage
Classification of Composites : Application, co,position and proerties of each Composites of
posterior teeth, Prosthodontics resins for veneering. Biocompatibility - microleakage, pulpal
reaction, pulpal protection Manipulation of composites: Techniques of insertion of Chemically
activated, light activated, dual cure Polymerisation, finishing and polishing of restoration,
Repoair of composites Direct bonding Bonding: Need for bonding, Acid - etch technique,
Enamel bonding, Dentin bonding agents. Mode of bonding, Bond strength, Sandwich
technique its indication and procedure. Extended application for composites : Resins for
restoring eroded teeth, Pit and fissure sealing, Resin inlays system - Indirect & direct, Core
build up, Orthodontics applications.
8) METAL AND ALLOYS :
Structure and behaviour of metals, Solidification of metals, mechanism of crystallization
amorphous & crystalline. Classification of alloys, Solid solutions, Constitutes or equilibrium
phase diagrams : Electric alloys, Physical properties, Peritectic alloys, Solid state reaction
other binary systems : Metallography & Heat treatment. Tarnish and corrosion. Definition :
cause of corrosion, protection agaist corrosion., Corrosion of dental restorations, clinical
significance of galvanic current. Dental Amalgam.
History :
Definition of dental amalgam, application, Alloy classification, manufacture of alloy
powder composition - available as.
Amalgamation : setting reaction & resulting structure, properties, Microleakage
Dimensional stability, Strength, Creep, Clinical performance
Manipulation : Selection of alloy proportioning, mechanism of trituration, condensation,
carving & finishing. Effect of dimensional changes, Marginal deterioration., Repair of
amalgam, mercury toxicity, mercury hygiene.
DIRECT FILLING GOLD:
Properties of pure gold, mode of adhension of gold for restoration forms of direct filling gold
for using as restorative material
Classification : gold Foil, electrolytic precipitate, powdered gold.
Manipulation : Removal of surface impurities and compaction of direct filling
gold. Physical properties of compacted gold, Clinical performance.
DENTAL CASTING ALLOYS :
Historical background, desirable properties of casting alloys.
Alternatives to cast metal technology: direct filling gold, amalgam, mercury free condensable
intermetallic compound - an alternative to metal casting process CAD-CAM process for metal
& ceramic inlays - without need of impression of teeth or casting procedure, pure titanium,
most bio compatible metal which are difficult to cast can be made into crowns with the aid of
CAD -CAM technology. Another method of making classification of casting alloys : By function
& description.
Recent classification, High noble (HN), Noble (N) and predominantly base metal (PB)
Alloys for crown & bridge, metal seramic & removable partial denture. Composition, function
constituents and application, each alloy both noble and base metal. Properties of alloys:
Melting range; mechanical properties, hardness, elongation, modulus of elasticity, tarnish and
corrosion.
Casting shrinkage and compensation of casting shrinkage. Biocompatibility - Handling hazards
& precautions of base metal alloys; casting investments used. Heat treatment : Softening &
hardening heat treatment. Recycling of metals, Titanium alloys & their application, properties &
advantages. Technical considerations in casting. Heat source, furnaces.

9) DENTAL WAXES INCLUDING INLAY CASTING WAX

Introduction and importance of waxes : Sources of natural waxes and their chemical nature.
Classification of Waxes :
Properties : melting range, thermal expansion, mechanical properties, flow & residual stresses,
ductility. Dental Wax : Inlay wax : Mode of supply : Classification & composition, Ideal
requirements : properties of inlay wax : Flow, thermal properties Wax distoration & its causes.
Manipulation of inlay wax : instruments & equipment required, including electrically heated
instruments metal tips and thermostatically controlled wax baths.
Other waxes : Applications, mode of supply & properties.
Casting Wax, Base plate wax, Processing wax, Boxing wax, Utility wax, Sticky wax,
Impression wax for corrective impressions, Bite registration wax.
10) DENTAL CASTING INVESTMENTS
Definition, requirements, classification
Gypsum bonded - classification, Phosphate bonded, silica bonded
Mode of Supply : Composition, application, setting mechanism, setting time & factors
controlling.
Expansions : setting expansion, Hygroscopic Setting expansion, & thermal expansion : factors
affecting. Properties : Strength porosity, and fineness & storage. Technical consideration :
For casting procedure Preparation of die, Wax pattern, spruing, investing, control of shrinkage
compensation, wax burnout, and heating the invested ring, casting. Casting machines, source
of heat for melting the alloy. Defect in casting.
11) SOLDERING, BRAZING AND WELDING
Need of joining dental appliances, Terms & Definition
Solders : Definition, ideal requirement types of solders - Soft & hard and their fusion
temperature, application. Mode of supply of solders, composition and selection, properties.
Tarnish & corrosion resistance mechanical properties, microstructure of soldered joint. Fluxes
& Anti fluxed : Definition, function, Types, commonly used fluxes & their selection Technique
of soldering & Brazing : Free hand soldering and investment, steps and procedure. Welding :
Definition, application, requirements, procedure, weld decay - causes and how to avoid it.
Laser welding.
WROUGHT BASE METAL ALLOYS
Applications and different alloys used mainly for orthodontics purpose
Stainless steel
Cobalt chromium nickel
Nickel titanium
Beta titanium
Properties required for orthodontic wires, working range, springiness, stiffness, resilence,
Formability, ductility, ease of joining, corrosion resistance, stability in oral environment, bio
compatibility
Stainless steels : Description, type, composition & properties of each type. Sensitisation &
stabilization, Mechanical properties - strength, tensile, yield strength, KHN. Braided & twisted
wires their need, Solders for stainless steel, Fluxes, welding
1. Wrought cobalt chromium nickel alloys, composition, allocation, properties, heat treatment,
Physical properties
Nickel - Titanium alloys, shape, memory & super elastic
Titanium alloys, application, composition, properties, welding, Corrosion resistance.
12) DENTAL CEMENTS
Definition & Ideal requirements:
Cement : Silicate, Glass ionomer, metal modified glass ionomer, resin modified glass
ionormer, zinc oxide eugenol, modified zinc oxide eugenol, zinc phosphate, zinc silico
phosphate, zinc poly carboxylate, Cavity liners and cement bases, Varnishes Calcium
hydroxide, Gutta Percha.
Application, classification (general and individual), setting mechanism, mode of supply,
Properties, factors affecting setting, special emphasis on critical procedures of manipulation
and protection of cement, mode of adhension, biomechanics of caries inhibition.
Agents for pulpal protection., Modifications and recent advances, Principles of cementation.
Special emphasis on cavity liners and cement bases and luting agents.
13) DENTAL CERAMICS
Historical background & General applications.
Dental ceramic : definition, classification, application, mode of supply, manufacturing procedure,
methods of strengthening. Properties of fused ceramic : Strength and factors affecting, modulus of
elasticity, surface hardness, wear resistance, thermal properties, specific gravity, chemical
stability, esthetic properties, biocompatability, technical considerations.
Metal Ceramic (PFM) : Alloys - types and composition of alloys. Ceramic - Type and
composition.
Metal Ceramic Bond : Nature of bond. Bonding using electro deposition, foil copings, bonded
platinum foil, swaged gold alloy foil coping. Technical considerations for porcelain and
porcelain fused metal restotations. Recent advances - all porcelain restorations, Manganese
core, injection moulded castable ceramics, glass infiltrated alumina core ceramic (In ceram),
ceramic veners, inlays and onlays and CAD - CAM ceramic. Chemical attack of ceramic by
fluoride. Porcelain furnaces.
14) ABRASION & POLISHING AGENTS
Definition of abrasion and polishing. Need of abrasion and polishing. Types of abrasives :
Finishing, polishing & cleaning. Types of abrasives : Diamond, Emery, aluminium oxides
garnet, pumice, Kieselgurh, Tripoli, rouge, tin oxide, chalk, chromic oxide, sand, carbides,
diamond, zirconium silicate Zinc oxide.
ABRASIVE ACTION :
Desirable characteristics of an abrasive, Rate of abrasion, size of particle, pressure and
speed Grading of abrasive & polishing agents. Binder, polishing materials & procedures used.
Technical consideration - Material and procedure used for abrasion and polishin Electrolytic
polishing and burnishing
15) DIE AND COUNTER DIE MATERIALS INCLUDING ELECROFORMING AND
ELECTROPOLISHING
types - Gypsum products, Electroforming, Epoxy resin, amalgam
DENTAL IMPLANTS : Evolution of dental implants, types and materials
MECHANICS OF CUTTING : Burns and points
At the end of the course the student should have the knowledge about the composition,
properties, manipulative techniques and their various commercial names. The student should
also acquire skills to select and use the materials appropriately for laboratory and clinical use.
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
Philips Science of Dental Materials : 10th edn. - Kenneth J. Anusavice
Restorative Dental Materials - 10 edn. Robert G. Craig
Notes on Dental Materials - E.C. combe
 PRE CLINICAL CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY LABORATORY EXERCISES.
Identification and study of handcutting instrument chisles, gingival margin trimmers,
excavators and hatchet.
Identification and use of rotary cutting instruments in contra angle hand pieces burs
(Micromotor)
Preparation class I and extended class I and class II and MOD s and class V amounting
to 10 exercises in plaster models.
4. 10 exercises in mounted extracted teeth of following class I, 4 in number class I
extended cavities 2, class II 4 in number and Class V 2 in number. Cavity preparation base
application matrix and wedge placement restoration with amalgam.
Exercises on phantom head models which included cavity preparation base and varnish
application matrix and wedge placement followed by amalgam restoration.
Class I 5
Class I with extension 2
Class II 10
Class H mods 2
Class V and III forglass ionmers 4
Class V for amalgam 2
Polishing of above restorations
Demonstration of class III and class V cavity preparation. For composites on extracted
tooth completing the restoration.
Polishing and finishing of the restoration of composites.
Identification and manipulation of varnish bases like Zinc Phosphate, Poly carboxylate,
Glass Ionomers, Zinc Oxide, Euginol cements.
Identification and manipulation of various matrics, tooth separators and matrials like
composites and modified glassionomer cements.
Cast Restoration
Preparation of Class II inlay cavity
Fabrication of wax pattern
sprue for inner attachment investing
Investing of wax pattern
Finishing and cementing of class II inlay in extracted tooth
Endodontics
Identification of basic endodontics instruments
Cornal access cavity preparation on extracted. Upper central incisiors.
 Determination of working length
Biomechanical Preparation of root canal space of central incisor
Obfuration of root canal spaces. Absens of cornal access cavity
Closure of acess cavity

8 ORAL PATHOLOGY & ORAL MICROBIOLOGY

OBJECTIVES :
At the end of Oral pathology and Oral Microbiology course, the student should be able to
comprehend -
The different types of pathological processes, that involve the oral cavity.
The manifestation of common diseases, their diagnosis and correlation with clinical
pathological processes.
An understanding of the oral manifestations of systemic disease should help in correlating
with the systemic physical signs and laboratory findings.
The student should understand the underlying biological principles governing treatment of
oral disease.
The principles of certain basic aspects of Forensic Odontology.
SKILLS:
Microscopic study of common lesions affecting oral tissues through mocroscopic slides &
projection slides.
Study of the disease process by surgical specimen
Study of teeth anomalies / polymorphisms through tooth specimens & plaster casts.
Microscopic study of plaque pathogens.
Study of haematological preparations (blood films) of anaemias & leukemias.
Basic exercises in Forensic Odontology such as histological methods of age estimation
and appearance of teeth in injuries.
INTRODUCTION:
A bird s eye view of the different pathological processes involving the oral cavity & oral
cavity involvement in systemic disease to be brought out. Interrelationship between
General Medicine & General Surgery & Oral pathology to be emphasized.
Developmental disturbances of teeth, Jaws and soft tissues of oral & paraoral region :
Introduction to developmental disturbances - Hereditary, Familial mutation, Hormonal
etc. causes to be highlighted.
 Developmental disturbances of teeth - Etiopathogenesis, clinical features, radiological
features & histopathological features as appropriate.
The size, shape, number, structure & eruption of teeth & clinical significance of the
anomalies to be emphasized
Forensic Odontology
Developmental disturbances of jaws - size & shape of the jaws.
Developmental disturbances of oral & paraoral soft tissues - lip & palate - clefts,
tongue, gingiva, mouth, salivary glands & face.
Dental caries
Etiopathogenesis, microbiology, clinical features, diagnosis, histopathology,
immunology, prevention of dental caries & its sequelae.
Pulp & Periapical Pathology & Osteomyelitis
Etiopathogenesis & interrelationship, clinical features, microbiology, histopathology &
radiological features (as appropriate) of pulp & perapical lesions osteomyelitis.
Sequelae of periapical abscess - summary of space infections, systemic complications
& significance.
Periodontal Diseases :
Etiopathogenesis, microbiology, clinical features, histopathology & radiological features
(as appropritate) of gingivitis, gingival enlargements & periodontitis. Basic
immunological mechanisms of periodontal disease to be highlighted.
Microbial infections of oral soft tissues :
Microbiology, defence mechanisms including immunological aspects, oral
manifestations, histopathology and laboratory diagnosis of common bacterial, viral &
fungal infections namely :-
Bacterial : Tuberculosis, Syphilis, ANUG & its complications - Cancrum Oris.
Viral : Herpes Simplex, Varicella zoster, Measles, Mumps & HIV
infection. Fungal : Candidal infection, Apthous Ulcers.
Common non - inflammatory diseases involving the jaws :
Etiopathogenesis, clinical features, radiological & laboratory values in diagnosis of :
Fibrous dysplasia, Cherubism, Osteogenesis Imperfecta Paget s disease, Cleidocranial
dysplasia, Rickets, Achondroplasia, Marfan s syndrome & down s syndrome.
Diseases of TM joint :
Ankylosis, summary of different types of arthritis & other developmental malformations,
traumatic injuries & myofascial pain dysfunction syndrome.
Cysts of the Oral & Paraoral region :
 Classification, etiopathogenesis, clinical features, histopathology, laboratory &
radiological features (as appropriate) of Odontogenic cysts, Non-Odontogenic cysts,
Pseudocysts of jaws & soft tissue cysts of oral & paraoral region.
Tumours of the Oral Cavity
Classification of Odontogenic, Non-Odontogenic & Salivary Gland Tumours.
Etiopathogenesis, clinical features, histopathology, radiological features & laboratory
diagnosis (as appropriate) of the following common tumours :
Odontogenic - all lesions.
Non - odontogenic
Benigh Epithelial : Papilloma, Keratoacanthoma & Naevi.
Benign Mesenchymal - Fibroma, Aggressive fibrous lesions, Lipoma
Haemangioma, Lymphangioma Neurofibroma
Schwannoma, Chondroma, Osteoma & Tori
- Malignant Epithelial - Basal Cell Carcinoma, Verrucous Carcinoma,
Squamous Cell carcinoma &
Malignant Melanoma.
- Malignant Mesenchymal- Fibrosarcoma, Osteosarcoma, Giant cell
tumour, Chondrosarcoma, Angiosarcoma
Kaposi s sarcoma, Lymphomas, Ewing s sarcoma &
Other Reticuloendothelial tumours.
c) Salivary
Gland
- Benign Epithelial neoplasms - Pleomorphic Adenoma, Warthin s tumour,
& Oncocytoma
- Malignant Epithelial neoplasms - Adenoid Cystic Carcinoma
Mucoepidermoid Carcinoma,
Acinic Cell Carcinoma & Adenocarcinomas.

d) Tumours of Disputed Congenital Epulis & Granular Cell Myoblastoma.

Origin - e) Metastatic Tumors metastasizing to & from oral cavity &
tumours -
the routes of metastasis.
Traumatic, Reactive & Regressive lesions Oral Cavity :
Pyogenic & Giant cell granuloma, exostoses Fibrous Hyperplasia, Traumatic Ulcer &
Traumatic Neuroma.
Attrition, Abrasion, Erosion, Bruxism, Hypercementosis, Dentinal changes, pulp
calcifications & Resorption of teeth.
 Radiation effects of oral cavity, summary of physical & Chemical injuries including
allergic reaction of the oral cavity.
Healing or Oral wounds & complications - Dry socket.
Non neoplastic Salivary Gland Diseases :
Sialolithiasis, Sialosis, sialadenitis, Xerostomia & ptyalism.
Systemic Diseases involving Oral Cavity ;
Brief review & Oral manifestations, diagnosis & significance of common Blood,
Nutritional, Hormonal & Metabolic diseases of Oral cavity.
Mucocutaneous Lesions :
Etiopathogenesis, clinical features & histopathology of the following common lesions.
Lichen Planus, Lupus Erythematosus, Pemphigus & Pemphigoid lesions, Erythema
Multiforme, Psoriasis, Scleroderma, Ectodermal Dysplasia, Epidermolysis bullosa &
white sponge nevus.
Diseases of the Nerves :
Facial neuralgias - Trigeminal & Glossopharyngeal. VII nerve paralysis,
causalgia Psychogenic facial pain & Burning mouth syndrome
Pigmentation of Oral & Paraoral region & Discolouration of teeth :
Causes & clinical manifestations
Disease of Maxillary Sinus :
Traumatic injuries to sinus, Sinusitis, Cysts & Tumours involving antrum
a) ORAL PRECANCER - CANCER ; Epidemiology, aetiology, clinical and
histopatholotgical features, TNM classification. Recent advances in dagnosis,
management and prevention.
b) Biopsy : Types of biopsy, value of biopsy, cytology, histo chemistry & frozen sections
in diagnosis of oral disease.
Principles of Basic forensic Odontology (Pre-clinical Forensic Odontology):
Introduction, definition, aims & scope.
Sex and ethnic (racial) differences in tooth morphology and histological age estimation
Determination of sex & blood groups from buccal mucosa / saliva.
Dental DNA methods
Bite marks, rugae patterns & lip prints. Dental
importance of poisons and corrosives,
Overview of forensic medicine and toxicology
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1. A Text Book of Oral Pathology - shafer, Hine & Levy
2. Oral Pathology - Clinical Pathologic correlations - Regezi & Sciubba
3. Oral Pathology - Soames & southam
4. Oral Pathology in the Tropics - Prabhu, Wilson, Johnson & Daftary
GENERAL MEDICINE
GUIDELINES :
Special emphasis should be given throughout on the importance of various disease as
applicable to dentistry.
Special precautions / contraindication of anaesthesia and various dental procedures
in different systemic diseases.
Oral manifestations of systemic diseases.
Medical emergencies in dental practice.
A dental student should be taught in such a manner he / she is able to record the arterial
pulse, blood pressure and be capable of suspecting by sight and superficial examination of
the body - disease of the heart, lungs, kidneys, blood etc. He should be capable of handling
medical emergencies encountered in dental practice.
THEORY SYLLABUS
CORE TOPICS COLLATERAL TOPICS
(Must Know) (Desirable to know)
1. Aims of medicine Definition of signs, symptoms,
diagnosis, differential diagnosis treatment &
prognosis
2. Infections Infectious mononucleosis mumps, measles,
Enteric fever, AIDS, herpes simplex, herpes rubella, malaria.
zoster, syphilis diphtheria
3. G.I.T. Diarrhea
Stomatitis, gingival hyperplasia, dysphagia, acid Dysentery
peptic disease, jaundice, acute and chronic Amoebiasis
hepatitis, cirrhosis of liver ascites. Malabsorhtion
4. CVS
Acute rheumatic fever rheumatic valvular heart
disease, hypertension, ischemic heart disease,
infective endocarditis, common arrhythmias,
congenital heart disease, congestive cardiac
failure.
5. RS Lung Abscess
Pneumonia, COPD, Pulmonary TB, Bronchial Pleural effusion
Asthma Pneumothorax
Bronchiectasis
Lung cancers
6. Hematology
Anemias, bleeding & clotting, disorders, leukemias
lymphomas, agranulocytosis, splenomegaly, oral
manifestations of hematologic disorders,
generalized.
Lymphadenopathy

7. Renal system Renal failure

Acute nephritis
Nephrotic syndrome
8. Nutrition Balanced diet
Avitaminosis PEM
Avitaminosis
9. CNS - Meningitis
Facial palsy, facial pain including trigeminal - Examination of comatose patient
neuralgia, epilepsy, headache including migraine. - Examination of cranial nerves

10. Endocrines Addison s disease, Cushing s syndrome

Diabetes Mellitus Acromegaly, Hypothyroidism,
Thyrotoxicosis, Calcium metabolism and
parathyroids.
11. Critical care Ac LVF
Syncope, cardiac arrest, CPR, Shock ARDS
CLINICAL TRAINING :
The student must be able to take history, do general physical examination (including build,
nourishment, pulse, BP, respiration, clubbing, cyanosis, jaundice, lymphadenopathy, oral
cavity) and be able to examine CVS, RS and abdomen and facial nerve.

10. GENERAL SURGERY

AIMS :
To acquaint the student with various diseases, which may require surgical expertise and to
train the student to analyze the history and be able to do a through physical examination of
the patient. The diseases as related to head and neck region are to be given due importance,
at the same time other relevant surgical problems are also to be addressed. At the end of one
year of study the student should have a good theoretical knowledge of various ailments, and
be practically trained to differentiate benign and malignant diseases and be able to decided
which patient requires further evaluation.
HISTORY OF SURGERY
The development of surgery as a speciality over the years, will give the students an
opportunity to know the contributions made by various scientists, teachers and
investigators. It will also enable the student to understand the relations of various
specialities in the practice of modern surgery.
GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF SURGERY
Introduction to various aspects of surgical principles as related to orodental diseases.
Classification of diseases in general. This will help the student to understand the
various diseases, their relevance to routine dental practice.
WOUND
Their classification, wound healing, repair, treatment of wounds, medico-legal aspects
of accidental wounds and complications of wounds.
INFLAMMATION
Of soft and hard tissues. Causes of inflammation, varieties, treatment and sequelae.
INFECTIONS :
Acute and chronic abscess skin infections, cellulites, carbuncle and erysepelas.
Specific infections such as tetanus, gangrene, syphilis, gonorrhoea, tuberculosis,
Actinomycosis, Vincents angina, cancrum oris, Pyaemia, toxaemia and septicaemia.
TRANSMISSABLE VIRAL INFECTIONS :
HIV and Hepatitis B with special reference to their prevention and precautions to be
taken in treating patients in a carrier state.
SHOCK AND HAEMORRHAGE :
Classification, causes, clinical features and management of various types of shock.
Syncope, Circulatory collapse. Haemorrhage - different types, causes, clinical features
and management. Blood groups, blood transfusion, precautions and complications of
blood and their products. Hemophilia s, their transmission, clinical features and
management especially in relation to minor dental procedures.
TUMOURS, ULCERS, CYSTS, SINUS AND FISTULAE :
Classification, clinical examination and treatment principles in various types of benign
and malignant tumours, ulcers, cysts, sinus and fistulae.
DISEASES OF LYMPHATIC SYSTEM:
Especially those occurring in head and neck region. Special emphasis on identifying
diseases such as tubercular infection, lymphomas, leukaemias, metastatic lymph node
diseases.
DISEASES OF THE ORAL CAVITY
Infective and malignant diseases of the oral cavity and oropharynx including salivary
glands with special emphasis on preventive aspects of premalignant and malignant
diseases of the oral cavity.
DISEASES OF LARYNX, NASOPHARYNX:
Infections and tumours affecting these sites. Indications, procedure and complications
of tracheostmy.
NERVOUS SYSTEM :
Surgical problems associated with nervous system with special reference to the
principles of peripheral nerve injuries, their regeneration and principles of treatment.
 Detailed description of afflictions of facial nerve and its management. Trigeminal
neuralgia, its presentation and treatment.
FRACTURES :
General principles of fractures, clinical presentation and treatment with additional
reference to newer methods of fracture treatment. Special emphasis on fracture
healing and rehabilitation.
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATIVE SURGERY:
Principles as applicable to minor surgical procedures including detailed description of
asepsis, antiseptics, sterilization, principles of anesthesia and principles of tissue
replacement. Knowledge of sutures, drains, diathermy, cryosurgery and use of Laser in
surgery.
ANOMOLIES OF DEVELOPMENT OF FACE :
Surgical anatomy and development of face. Cleft lip and cleft palate - principles of
management.
DISEASES OF THYROID AND PARATHYROID :
Surgical anatomy, pathogenesis, clinical features and management of dysfunction of
thyroid and parathyroid glands. Malignant diseases of the thyroid - classification, clinical
features and management.
SWELLING OF THE JAW :
Differential diagnosis and management of different types of swellings of the jaw.
BIOPSY :
Different types of biopsies routinely used in surgical practice.
Skills to be developed by the end of teaching is to examine a routine swelling, ulcer and
other related diseases and to perform minor surgical procedures such as draining an
abscess, taking a biopsy etc.
11. CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY AND ENDODONTICS :
OBJECTIVES :
Knowledge and understanding
Skills and
Attitudes
A. Knowledge and understanding :
The graduate should acquire the following knowledge during the period of training.
To diagnose and treat simple restorative work for teeth.
To gain knowledge about aesthetic restorative material and to translate the same to
patients needs.
 To gain the knowledge about endodontic treatment on the basis of scientific foundations.
To carry out simple endodontic treatment.
To carry out simple luexation of tooth and its treatment and to provide emergency
endodontic treatment.
SKILLS :
He should attain following skills necessary for practice of dentistry.
To use medium and high speed hand pieces to carry out restorative work.
Poses the skills to use and familiarize endodontics instruments and materials needed
for carrying out simple endodontic treatment.
To achieve the skills to translate patients esthetic needs along with function.

ATTITUDES :
Maintain a high standard of professional ethics and conduct and apply theses in all
aspects of professional life.
Willingness to participate in CDE programme to update the knowledge and professional
skill from time to time.
To help and participate in the implementation of the national oral health policy.
He should be able to motivate the patient for proper dental treatment at the same time
proper maintenance of oral hygiene should be emphasise which will help to maintain the
restorative work and prevent future damage.
INTRODUCTION :
Definition aims objectives of Conservative Dentistry scope and future of Conservative
Dentistry.
Nomenclature of Dentition :
Tooth numbering systems A.D.A. Zsigmondy palmer and F.D.I. systems.
Principles of Cavity Preparation :
Steps and nomenclature of cavity preparation classification of cavities, nomenclature of
floors angles of cavities.
Dental caries :
Aetiology classification clinical features, morphological features, microscopic features,
clinical diagnosis and sequel of dental caries.
Treatment Planning For Operative Dentistry :
 Detailed clinical examination, radiographic examination. tooth vitality tests, diagnosis
and treatment planning, preparation of the case sheet.
Gnathological Concepts of Restoration.
Physiology of occlusion, normal occlusion, Ideal occlusion, mandibular movements and
occlusal analysis. Occlusal rehabilitation and restoration.
Aramamentarium For Cavity Preparation :
General classification of operative instruments, Hand cutting instruments design formula
and sharpening of instruments. Rotary cutting instruments dental bur, mechanism of
cutting, evaluation of hand piece and speed current concepts of rotary cutting procedures.
Sterilization and maintenance of instruments. Basic instrument tray set up.
Control of Operating Filed
Light source sterilization field of operation control of moisture, rubber dam in detail,
cotton rolls and anti sialogagues.
Amalgam Restoration :
Indication contraindication, physical and mechanical properties, clinical behaviour,
cavity preparation for Class I, II, V and III. Step wise procedure for cavity preparation
and restoration. Failure of amalgam restoration.
Pulp protection :
Liners, varnishes and bases, Zinc phosphate, zinc polycarboxylate, zinc oxide eugenol
and glass inomer cements.
Anterior Restorations :
Selection of cases, selection of material, step wise procedures for using restorations,
silicate (theory only) glass inomers, composites, including sand witch restorations and
bevels of the same with a note on status of the dentine bonding agents.
Direct filling Gold restoration :
Types of direct filling gold indications and limitations of cohesive gold. Annealing of
gold foil cavity preparation and condensation of gold foils.
Preventive Measures In Restorative Practice :
Plaque Control, Pitand fissure sealants dietary measures restorative procedure and
periodontal health. Contact and contour of teeth and restorations matrices tooth
separation and wedges.
Temporisation or Interim Restoration.
Pin Amalgam Restoration Indication Contra Indication :
Advantages disadvantages of each types of pin methods of placement use of auto
matrix. Failure of pin amalgam restoration.
Management of Deep Carious Lesions Indirect And Direct Pulp Capping.
Non carious destruction s Tooth Structures Diagnosis and Clinical Management.
Hyper Sensitive Dentine And Its Management.
Cast Restorations
Indications, contra indications, advantages and disadvantages and materials used for
same class II and class I cavity preparation for inlays fabrication of wax pattern
spurring inverting and casting procedures and casting defects.
Die Materials And Preparation of Dies
Gingival Tissue Management For Cast Restoration And Impression Procedures.
Recent Cavity Modification Amalgam Restoration.
Differences between amalgam and Inlay Cavity preparation with note on all the types of
Bewels used for Cast Restoration.
Control of Pain During Operative Procedures.
Treatment Planning for Operative Dentistry Detailed Clinical Examination Radiographic
Examination.
Vitality Tests, Diagnosis And Treatment Planning And Preparation Of Case Sheet.
Applied Dental Materials :
Biological Considerations.
Evaluation, clinical application and adverse effects of the following materials.
Dental cements, Zinc oxide euginol cements zinc phosphate cements,
polycarboxylates glass ionomer cements, silicate cement calcium hydroxides
varnishes.
Dental amalgam, technical considerations mercury toxicity mercury hygiene.
Composite, Dentine bonding agents, chemical and light curing composites.
Rubber base Imp. Materials.
Nobel metal alloys & non noble metal alloys.
Investment and die materials
Inlay casting waxes.
Dental porcelain
Aesthetic Dentistry
Endodontics : introduction definition scope and future of endodontics.
Clinical Diagnostic methods
Emergency endodontics procedures
Pulpal diseases causes, types and treatment.
Periapical diseases: acute periapical abscess, acute periodontal abscess phoeix abscess,
chronic alveolar abscess granuloma cysts condensing osteits, external resorption.
Vital pulp therapy : indirect and direct pulp capping pulpotony different types and
medicaments used.
Apexogenisis and apexification or problems of open apex.
Rationale of endodntic treatment case selection indication and contraindications for root
canal treatments.
Principles of root canal treatment mouth preparation root canal instruments, hand
instruments, power driven instruments, standardization color coding principle of using
endodotic instruments. Sterilisation of root canal instruments and materials rubber dam
application.
Anatomy of the pulp cavity : root canals apical foramen. Anomalies of pulp cavities access
cavity preparation of anterior and premolar teeth.
Preparation of root canal space. Determination of working length, cleaning and shaping of
root canals, irrigating solution chemical aids to instrumentation.
Disinfection of root canal space intracanal medicaments, poly antibiotic paste roos mans
paste, mummifying agents. Out line of root canal treatment, bacteriological
examinations, culture methods.
Problems during cleaning and shaping of root canal spaces. Perforation and its
management. Broken instruments and its management, management of single and
double curved root canals.
Methods of cleaning and shaping like step back crown down and conventional methods.
Obturation of the root canal system. Requirements of an ideal root canal filling material
obturation methods using guttaa percha healing after endodontic treatment. Failures in
endodontics.
Root canal sealers. Ideal properties classification. Manipulation of root canal sealers.
Post endodontic restoration fabrication and components of post core preparation.
Smear layer and its importance in endodontics and conservative treatment.
Discoloured teeth and its management. Bleaching agents, vital and non vital bleaching
methods.
traumatized teeth classification of fractured teeth. Management of fractured tooth and root.
Luxated teeth and its management.
endodotic surgeries indication contraindications, pre operative preparation. Pre medication
surgical instruments and techniques apicectomy, retrograde filling, post
 operative sequale trephination hemisection, radiscetomy techniques of tooth
reimplantation (both intentional and accidental) endodontic implants.
root resorption.
emergency endodontic procedures.
lasers in conservative endodontics (introduction only) practice management.
professional association dentist act 1948 and its amendment 1993.
duties towards the govt. Like payments of professional tax, income tax.
financial management of practice.
dental material and basic equipment management.
Ethics.

ORAL & MAXILLOFACIAL SURGERY

AIMS :
To produce a graduate who is competent in performing extraction of teeth under both local
and general anaesthesia, prevent and manage related complications, acquire a reasonable
knowledge and understanding of the various diseases, injuries, infections occurring in the
Oral & Maxillofacial region and offer solutions to such of those common conditions and has an
exposure in to the in patient management of maxillofacial problems.
OBJECTIVES :
a) Knowledge & Understanding :
At the end of the course and the clinical training the graduate is expected to -
Able to apply the knowledge gained in the related medical subjects like pathology,
microbiology and general medicine in the management of patients with oral surgical
problem.
Able to diagnose, manage and treat (understand the principles of treatment of) patients
with oral surgical problems.
Knowledge of range of surgical treatments.
Ability to decide the requirement of a patient to have oral surgical specialist opinion or
treatment.
Understand the principles of in patient management.
Understanding of the management of major oral surgical procedures and principles
involved in patient management.
Should know ethical issues and communication ability.
Skills :
A graduate should have acquired the skill to examine any patient with an oral surgical
problem in an orderly manner. Be able to understand requisition of various clinical and
laboratory investigations and is capable of formulating differential diagnosis.
Should be competent in the extraction of teeth under both local and general anesthesia.
Should be able to carry out certain minor oral surgical procedures under L.A. like
frenectomy, alveolar procedures and biopsy etc.
Ability to assess, prevent and manage various complications during and after surgery.
Able to provide primary care and manage medical emergencies in the dental office.
Understanding of the management of major oral surgical problems and principles involved
in inpatient management.

DETAILED SYLLABUS
Introduction, definition, scope, aims and objectives.
Diagnosis in oral surgery :
History taking
Clinical examination
Investigations
Principles of infection control and cross-infection control with particular reference to HIV /
AIDS and Hepatitis.
Principles of Oral Surgery -
Asepsis: Definition, measures to prevent introduction of infection during surgery.
Preparation of the patient
Measures to be taken by operator
Sterilization of instruments - various methods of sterilization etc.
Surgery set up.
Painless Surgery:
Pre-anaesthetic considerations. Pre-medication: Purpose, drugs used
Anaesthetic considerations -
a) Local b) Local with IV sedations
Use of general anaesthetic
Access:
Intra-oral: Mucoperiosteal flaps, principles, commonly used intra oral incisions.
Bone removal : Methods of bone removal

Use of Burs : Advantages & precautions

 Bone cutting instruments : Principles of using chisel & osteotome.
Extra - oral : Skin incisions - principles, various extra oral incision to expose facial
skeleton.
Submandibular
pre auricular
Incision to expose maxilla & orbit
Bicoronal incision
Control of haemorrhage during surgery
Normal Haemostasis
Local measures available to control
bleeding Hypotensive anaesthesia etc.
Drainage & Debridement
Purpose of drainage in surgical
wounds Types of drains used
Debridement : Purpose, soft tissue & bone debridement
Closure of wounds
Suturing : Principles, suture material, classification, body response to various materials
etc.
post operative care
Post operative instructions
Physiology of cold and heat
Control of pain - analgesics
Control of infection - antibiotics
Control of swelling - anti-inflammatory drugs
Long term post operative follow up - significance.
Exodontia : General considerations
Ideal Extraction.
Indications for extraction of teeth
Extractions in medically compromised
patients. Methods of extraction -
Fo rceps or intra-alveolar or closed method
Principles, types of movement, force etc.
Trans-alveolar, Surgical or open method, indications, surgical procedure
Dental elevators : uses, classification, principles in the use of elevators, commonly used
elevators.
 Complications of Exodontia -
Complications during Exodontia
Common to both maxilla and mandible.
Post-operative complications
Prevention and management of
complications 6. Impacted teeth:
Incidence, definition, aetiology.
Impacted mandibular third molar.
Classification, reasons for removal,
Assessment - both clinical & radiological
Surgical procedures for removal
Complications during and after removal
Prevention and management
Maxilary third molar,
Indications for removal, classification,
surgical procedure for removal
Impacted maxillary canine
Reasons for canine impaction
Localisation, Indications for removal
Methods of management, labial and palatal approach,
Surgical exposure, transplantation, removal etc.
Pre- prosthetic surgery
Definition, classification of procedures
Corrective procedures : Alveoloplasty
Reduction of maxillary tuberosities,
Frenoctemies and removal of tori
Ridge extension or Sulcus extension procedures
Indications and various surgical procedures
Ridge augmentation and reconstruction
Indications, use of bone grafts, Hydroxyapatite
Implants - concept of osseo integration
Knowledge of various types of implants
and surgical procedure to place implants
8. Disease of the maxillary sinus

Surgical anatomy of the sinus

 Sinusitis both acute and chronic
Surgical approach of sinus - Caldwell - Luc
procedure Removal of root from the sinus
Oro-antral fistula - aetiology, clinical features and various
surgical methods for closure
9. Disorders of T.M. joint
Applied surgical anatomy of the joint
Dislocation - types, aetiology, clinical features and management
ankylosis - Definition, aetiology, clinical features and management
Myo-facial pain dysfunction syndrome, aetiology, clinical features
management Non surgical and surgical
Internal derangement of the joint
Arthritis of T.M. Joint 10.
Infections of the oral cavity
Introduction, factors responsible for infection, course of odontogenic
Infections, spread of odontogenic infections through various facial spaces
Dento - alveolar abscess - aetiology, clinical features and management
Osteomyelitis of the jaws - definition, aetiology, pre-disposing factors
Classification, clinical features and management
Ludwigs angina - definition, aetiology, clinical features, management and complications
Benign cystic lesions of the jaws Definition
- classification, pathogenesis
Diagnosis, Clinical features, radiological, aspiration biopsy, use of
constrast media and histopathology
Management - Types of surgical procedure, rationale of the
techniques indications, procedures, complications etc.
Tumours of the Oral cavity
General considerations
Non odontogenetic benign tumours occurring in oral cavity - fibroma,
papilloma, lipoma, ossifying fibroma mynoma etc.
Ameloblastoma - clinical features, radiological appearance and methods of
management
Carcinoma of the oral cavity
Biopsy - types

TNM classification
 outline of management of squamous
Cell carcinoma : Surgery, radiation and chemotherapy
Role of dental surgeons in the prevention and early detection of oral
cancer 13. Fractures of the jaws -
General considerations, types of fractures, aetiology, clinical features and
general principles of management
Mandibular fractures - Applied anatomy,
classification Diagnosis - clinical and radiological
Management - Reduction closed and open
Fixation and immobilization methods
Outline of rigid and semi-rigid internal fixation
Fractures of the condyle - aetiology, classification, clinical features, principles of
management
Fractures of the middle third of the face
Definition of the mid face, applied surgical anatomy, classification,
clinical features and outline of management
Alveolar fracture - methods of management
Fractures of the Zygomatic complex
Classification, clinical features, indications for treatment, various methods
of reduction and fixation
Complications of fractures - delayed union, non-union and
malunion 14. Salivery gland diseases -
Diagnosis of salivary gland diseases
Sialography, contrast media, procedure.
Infections of the salivary glands
Sialolithiasis - sub mandibular duct and gland and parotid
duct. Clinical features, management
Salivary fistulae
Common tumours of salivery glands like Pleomorphic adenoma
including minor salivary glands
15. Jaw deformities -
Basic forms - Prognathism, Retrognathism and open bite
Reasons for correction.
Outline of surgical methods carried out on mandible and
maxilla 16. Neurological disorders -
 Trigeminal neuralgia - definition, aetiology, clinical features and methods of
management including surgical
Facial paralysis - Aetiology, clinical features.
Nerve injuries - Classification, neurorhaphy etc.
17. Cleft Lip and Palate -
Aetiology of the clefts, incidence, classification, role of dental surgeon in the
management of cleft patients, Outline of the closure procedures.
18. Medical Emergencies in dental practice -
Primary care of medical emergencies in dental practice particularly -
(a) Cardio vascular (b) Respiratory (c) Endocrine
(d) Anaphylactic reaction (e) Epilepsy (f) Epilepsy
19. Emergency drugs & Intra muscular I.V. Injections -
Applied anatomy, Ideal Location for giving these injection, techniques etc.
Oral Implantology
Ethics

LOCAL ANAESTHESIA :
Introduction, concept of L.A., classification of local anaesthetic agents, ideal
requirements, mode of action, types of local anaesthesia, complications.
Use of Vaso constrictors in local anaesthetic solution -
Advantages, contra-indications, various vaso constrictors used.
Anaesthesia of the mandible -
Pterygomandibular space - boundaries, contents
etc. Interior Dental Nerve Block - various techniques
Complications
Mental foramen nerve block
Anaesthesia of Maxilla-Intra
- Orbital nerve block
Anaesthesia of Maxilla -
Intra - orbital nerve block.
Posterior superior alveolar nerve block
Maxillary nerve block - techniques.
GENERAL ANAESTHESIA -
Concept of general anaesthesia
Indications of general anaesthesia in dentistry
Pre-anaesthetic evaluation of the patient
Pre-anaesthetic medication - advantages, drugs used
Commonly used anaesthetic agents
Complication during and after G.A.
I.V. sedation with Diazepam and Medozolam
Indications, mode of action, technique etc.
Cardiopulmonary resuscitation
Use of oxygen and emergency drugs.
Tracheostomy.
RECOMMENDED BOOKS :
Impacted teeth : Alling John F & etal
Principles of oral and maxillofacial surgery ; Vol.1,2 & 3 peterson LJ & etal
Text book of oral and maxillofacial surgery ; Srinivasan B.
Handbook of medical emergencies in the dental office, Malamed SF.
Killeys Fractures of the mandible ; Banks P.
Killeys fractures of the middle 3rd of the facial skeleton; Banks P.
The maxillary sinus and its dental implications ; McGovanda
Killey and kays outline of oral surgery - part -1 ; Seward GR & etal
Essentials of safe dentistry for the medically compromised patients; Mc Carthy FM
Oral & maxillofacial surgery, Vol 2; Laskin DM
Extraction of teeth; Howe, GL
Minor Oral Surgery ; Howe. GL
Contemporary oral and maxillofacial surgery; Peterson I.J. &EA
Oral and maxillofacial infections ; Topazian RG & Goldberg MH

ORAL MEDICINE AND RADIOLOGY

AIMS :
To train the students to diagnose the common disorders of Orofacial region by clinical
examination and with the help of such investigations as may be required and medical
management of oro-facial disorders with drugs and physical agents.
To train the students about the importance, role, use and techniques radiographs / digital
radiograph and other imaging methods in diagnosis.
The principles of the clinical and radiographic aspects of Forensic Odontology.
The syllabus in ORAL MEDICINE & RADIOLOGY is divided into two main parts
 (I) Diagnosis, Diagnostic methods and Oral Medicine (II) Oral Radiology, Again the part
One is subdivided into three sections. (A) Diagnostic methods (B) Diagnosis and
differential diagnosis (C) Oral Medicine & Therapeutics.
COURSE CONTENT
Emphasis should be laid on oral manifestations of systemic diseases and ill-effects oral
sepsis on general health.
To avoid confusion regarding which lesion and to what extend the student should learn
and know, this elaborate syllabus is prepared. As certain lesions come under more
than one group, there is repetition.
Part - I ORAL MEDICINE AND DIAGNOSTIC AIDS
SECTION (A) - DIAGNOSTIC METHODS
Definition and importance of Diagnosis and various types of diagnosis.
Method of clinical examinations.
General Physical examination by inspection.
Oro-facial region by inspection, palpation and other means.
To train the students about the importance, role, use of saliva and techniques diagnosis of
saliva as part of oral disease
Examination of lesions like swellings, ulcers, erosions, sinus, fistula, growth pigmented
lesions, white and red patches.
Examination of lymph nodes
Forensic examination - Procedures for post-mortem dental examination; maintaining
dental records and their use in dental practice and post-mortem identification;
jurisprudence and ethics.
Investigations
Biopsy and exfoliative cytology
Hematological, Mecrobiological and other tests and investigations necessary for
diagnosis and prognosis.
SECTION (B) - DIAGNOSIS, DIFFERENTIAL DIGNOSIS
While learning the following chapters, emphasis shall be given only on diagnostic aspects
including differential diagnosis
Teeth : Developmental abnormalities, causes of destruction of teeth and their sequelae
and discoloration of teeth
Diseases of bone and Osteodystrophies : Development disorders: Anomalies, Exostosis and

tori, infantile cortical hyperostosis, osteogenisis imperfecta. Marfans syndrome,

 osteopetrosis. Inflamation - Injury, infection and spread of infection fascial space
infections osteoradionecrosis.
metabolic disorders - Histiocytosis
Endocrine - Acro - megaly and hyperparathyroidism
Miscellaneous - Paget s disease, Mono and polyostotic fibrous dysplasia, Cherubism.
Temparomandibular joint : Developmental abnormalities of the condyle. Rheumatoid
arthritis, Osteoarthritis, Sub-luxation and luxation.
Common cysts and Tumours:
CYSRS: Cysts of soft tissue : Mucocele and Ranula
Cysts of bone : Odontogenic and nonodontogenic
TUMORS :
Soft Tissue:
Epithelial: Papilloma, Carcinoma, Melanoma
Connective tissue : Fibroma, Lipoma, Fibrosarcoma
Vascular : Haemangioma, Lymphangioma
Nerve Tissue : Neurofibroma, Traumatic Nueroma, Neurofibromatosis
Salivary Glands ; Pleomorphic adenoma, Adenocarcinoma, Warthin s Tumour, Adenoid Cystic
carcinoma.
Hard Tissue :
Non Odontogenic : Osteoma, Osteosarcoma, Osteoclastoma, Chondroma,
Chandrosacroma, Central giant cell rumor, and Central haemangioma
Odontogenic : Enameloma, Ameloblastoma, Calcifying Epithlial Odontogenic tumor,
Adenomatoid Odontogenic tumor, Periapical cemental dysphasia and odontomas
Periodontal diseases: Gingival hyperplasia, gingivitis, periodontitis, pyofenic granuloma
Granulomatous diseases : Tuberculosis, Sarcoidosis, Midline lethal granuloma crohn s
Disease and Histiocytosis X
Miscellaneous Disorders : Burkitt lymphoma, sturge - Weber syndrome, CREST
syndrome, rendu-osler-weber disease.
SECTION (C) : ORAL MEDICINE AND THERAPEUTICS.
The following chapters shall be studied in detail including the eiology, pathogenerals, clinical
features, investigations, differential diagnosis, management and prevention.
Infections of oral and paraoral structures:
Bacterial : Streptococcal, tuberculosis, syphills, vincents, leprosy, actinomycosis,
diphtheria and tetanus
Fungal : Candida albicans
 Virus : Herpes simplex, herpes zoster, ramsay hunt syndrome measles, herpangina
mumps, infectious mononucleosis, AIDS and hepatitis B

Important common mucosal lesions :

White lesions : Chemical burns, leukodema, leukoplakia, Fordyce spots, stomatitis
nicotina palatinus, white sponge nevus, candidiasis, licherplanus, discoid lupus
erythematosis
Veiculo-bullous lesions : Herpes simplex herpes zoster herpangina, bullous lichen
planus, pemphigus, cicatricial pemphigoid erythema multiforme.
Ulcers : Acute and chronic ulcers
Pigmented lesions : Exogenous and endogenous
Red lesions : Eruthroplakia, Stomatitis venenata and medicamentosa, erosive, lesions
and denture sore mouth Cervico-
facial lymphadenopathy
Facial Pain :
(i) Organic pain : plain arising from the diseases of orofacial tissues like teeth, pulp,
gingival, periodontal tissue, mucosa, tongue, muscles, blood vessels, lymph tissue,
bone, paranasal sinus, salivary glands etc.
(ii) Pain arising due to C.N.S. diseases:
Pain due to intracranial and extracranial involvement of cranial nerves
(Multiple sclerosis, cerebrovascular disease trotter s syndrome etc.)
Neuralgic pain due to unknown causes : Trigeminal neuralgia,
glossopharyngeal neuralgia, sphenopalatine ganglion neuralgia, periodic
migrainous neuralgia and atypical facial pain.
Referred pain : Pain arising from distant tissues like heart, spine etc.,
Altered sensations : Cacogeusia halitosis.
Tongue in local and systemic disorders : (Aglossia, ankyloglossia, bifid tongue, fissured
tongue, scrotal tongue, macroglossia, microglossia, geographic tongue, median
rhomboid glossitis, depapillation of tongue, hairy tongue, atrophic tongue, reactive
lymphoid hyperplasia, glossodynia, glossopyrosis, ulcers, white and red patches etc.)
Oral manifestations of :
Metabolic disorders :
Porphyria
Haemochromatosis
Histocytosis X diseases
Endocrine disorders:
Pituitary : Gigantism, acromegaly, hypopituatism
Adrenal cortex : Addison s disease (Hypofunction)
Cushing s syndrome (Hyperfunction)
Parathyroid glands : Hyperparathyroidism.
Thyroid gland : (Hypothyroidism) Cretinism, myxedema
Pancreas : diabetes
Nutritional deficiency : vitamins : riboflavin, nicotinic acid, folic acid vitamin B12,
vitamin C (Scurvy)
Blood disorders :
Red blood cell diseases
Deficiency anemias : (Iron deficiency, plummer - Vinson syndrome, pernicious
anemia)
Haemolytic anemias : (Thalassemia, sickle cell anemia, erythroblastosis fetails)
Aplastic anemia
Polycythemia
White blood cell diseases
Neutropenia, cyclic neutropenia, agranulocytosis, infectious mononeucleosis
and lukemias
Haemorrhagic disorders :
Thrombocytopenia, purpura, hemophilia, chrismas disease and von willebrand s
disease
Disease of salivary glands :
Development disturbances : Aplasia, atresia and aberration
Functional disturbances : Xerostomia, ptyalism
Inflammatory conditions : Nonspecific sialadenitis, mumps, sarcoidosis heerdfort s
syndrome (Uveoparotid fever), Necrotising sialometaplasia
Cysts and tumors : Mucocele, ranula, pleomorphic adenoma, mucoepidermoid
carcinoma
Miscellaneous : sialolithiasis, sjogren s syndrome, mikuliez s disease and sialosis
Dermatological diseases with oral manifestations :
Ectodermal dysplasia (b) Hyperkerotosis palmarplantaris with
periodontopathy (c) Scleroderma (d) Lichen planus including ginspan s syndrome
(e) Luplus erythematosus (f) Pemphigus (g) Erythema multiforme (h) Psoriasis
Immunological diseases with oral manifestations
Leukemia (b) Lymphomas (c) Multiple mycloma (d) AIDS clinical
manifestations, opportunistic infections, neoplasms (e) Thrombcytopenia (f)
Lupus erythematosus (g) Scleroderma (h) dermatomyositis (I) Submucous
firbrosis (j) Rhemtoid arthritis (k) Recurrent oral ulcerations including behcet s
syndrome and reiter s syndrome
Allergy : Local allergic reactions anaphylaxis, serum sickness (local and systemic
allergic manifestations to food drugs and chemicals)
Foci of oral infection and their ill effects on general health
Management of dental problems in medically compromised persons :
Physiological changes : Puberty, Pregnancy and menopause
The patients suffering with cardiac, respiratory, liver, kidney and bleeding
disorders, hypertension, diabetes and AIDS. Post-irradiated patients.
Precancerous lesions and conditions
Nerve and muscle diseases :
Nerves : (a) Neuropraxia (b) Neurotemesis (c) Neuritis (d) Facial nerve
paralysis including Bell s palsy, Heerfordt s syndrome, Melkerson Rosenthel
syndrome and ramsay hunt syndrome (e) Neuroma (f) Neurofibromatosis (g)
Frey syndrome
Muscles : (a) Myositis ossificans (b) Myofascial pain dysfunction syndrome
(c) Trismus
Forensic Odontology:
Medicolegal aspects of orofacial injuries
Identification of bite marks
Determination of age and sex
Identification of cadavers by dental appliances, Restorations and tissue
remanants viz., antibiotics, chemotherapeutic agents, anti-inflammatory and
analgesic drugs, astringents, mouth washes, styptics, demelucents, local surface
anaesthetic, sialogogues, antisialogogues and drugs used in the treatment of
malignancy.
 Part - II BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCES AND ETHICS.
Part - III ORAL RADIOLOGY
Scope of the subject and history of origin
Physics of radiation : (a) Nature and types of radiations (b) source of radiations (c)
Production of X-rays (d) Properties of X-rays (e) Compton effect (f) Photoelectric effect
Radiation measuring units
Biological effects of radiation
Radiation safety and protection measures
Principles of image production
Radiographic techniques:
Intra-Oral : (a) Periapical radiographs (Bisecting and parallel techniques) (b) Bite
wing radiographs (c) Occlsal radiographs
Extra - Oral : (a) Laternal projections of skull and jaw bones and paranasal sinuses
Cephalograms (d) Orthopantomograph (e) Projections of temperomandibular joint
and condyle of mandible (f) Projections for Zygomatic arches
Specilised techniques : (a) Sialography (b) Xeroradiography (c) Tomography
Factors in production of good radiographs :
K.V.P. and MA of X-ray machine (b) Filters (c) Collimations (d) Intensifying screens
(e) Grids (f) X-ray films (g) Exposure time (h) Techniques (i) Dark room (j) Developer
and fixer solutions (k) Film processing
Radiographic normal anatomical landmarks
Faculty radiographs and artefacts in radiographs
Interpretation of radiographs in various abnormalities of teeth, bones and other orofacial
tissues
Principles of radiotherapy of oro-facial malignancies and complications of radiotherapy
Cantrast radiography and basic knowledge of radio-active isotopes
Radiography in Forensic Odontology - Radiographic age estimation and post-mortem
radiographic methods.
PRACTICALS / CLINICALS
Student is trained to arrive at proper diagnosis by following a scientific and systematic
procedure of history taking and examination of the orofacial region. Training is also
imparted in management wherever possible. Training also shall be imparted on saliva
diagnostic procedures. Training also shall be imparted in various radiographic
procedures and interpretation of radiographs.
 In view of the above each student shall maintain a record of work done, which shall be
evaluated for marks at the time of University examination.
The following is the minimum of prescribed work for recording
(a) Recording of detailed case histories of interesting cases 10
(b) Intra-oral radiographs (Periapical, bitewing, occlusal) ..25
(c) Saliva diagnostic check as routine procedure.
BOOKS RECOMMENDED:
a) Oral Diagnosis, Oral Medicine & Oral Pathology
Burkit - Oral Medicine _ J.B. Lippincott Company
Coleman - Principles of Oral Diagnosis - Mosby Year Book
Jones - Oral Manifestations of Systemic Diseases - W.B. Saunders Company
Mitchell - Oral Diagnosis & Oral Medicine
Kerr - Oral Diagnosis
Miller - Oral Diagnosis & Treatment
Hutchinson - Clinical Methods
Oral Pathology - Shafers
Sonis. S.T., Fazio. R.C. and Fang. L. - Principles and practice of Oral Medicine
b) Oral Radiology
White & Goaz - Oral Radiology - Mosby year Book
Weahrman - Dental Radiology - C.V. Mosby Company
Stafne - Oral Roentgenographic Diagnosis - W. B. Saunders
Co., c) Forensic Odontology
Derek H. Clark - Practical Forensic Odontology - Butterworth - Heinemann (1992)
C. Michael Bowers, Gary Bell - Manual of forensic Odontology - Forensic Pr (1995)

ORTHODONTICS & DENTAL ORTHOPAEDICS

COURSE OBJECTIVE :
Undergraduate programme in orthodontics is designed to enable the qualifying dental surgeon
to diagnose, analyse and treat common orthodontic problems by preventive, interceptive and
corrective orthodontic procedures. The following basic instructional procedures will be adapted
to achieve the above objectives.
Introduction, Definition, Historical Background, aims and Objectives of Orthodontics and
Need for Orthodontics care
Growth and Development : In General a.
Definition
 Growth spurts and Differential growth
Factors influencing growth and Development
Methods of measuring growth
Growth theories (Genetic, Sicher s, Scott s, Moss s, Petrovics, Multifactorial)
Genetic and epigenetic factors in growth
Cephalocaudal gradient in growth
Morphologic Development of Craniofacial structures
Methods of bone growth
Prenatal growth of craniofacial structures
Postnatal growth and development of : cranial base, maxilla, mandible,
dental arches and occlusion.
Functional Development of Dental Arches and Occlusion
Factors influencing functional development of dental arches and occlusion
Forces of Occlusion
Wolf s law of transformation of bone
Trajectories of forces
Clinical Application of Growth and development
Malocclusion - In General
Concept of normal occlusion
Definition of malocclusion
Description of different types of dental, skeletal and functional malocclusion.
Classification of Malocclusion
Principle, description, advantages and disadvantages of classification of malocclusion
by Angle s simon s, Licher s and Ackerman and Proffitt s
Normal and Abnormal Function of Stomatognathic system
Etiology of Malocclusion
Definition, importance, classification, local and general etiological factors.
Etiology of following different types of malocclusion:
Midline diastema
Spacing
Crowding
Cross - Bite: Anterior / Posterior
Class III Malocclusion
Class II Malocclusion
7)Deep Bite
 8) Open Bite
Diagnosis And Diagnostic Aids
a. Definition, Importance and classification of diagnostic aids
b. Importance of case history and clinical examination in orthodontics
c. Study Models: - Importance and uses - Preparation and preservation of study
models d. Importance of intraoral X-rays in orthodontics
e. Panoramic radiographs:- Principles, Advantages, disadvantages and
uses f. Cephalometrics: Its advantages, disadvantages
1. Definition
2. Description and use of cephalostat
3. Description and uses of anatomical landmarks lines and angels used
in cephalometric analysis
4. Analysis - Steiner s, Down s, Tweed s, Ricket s-E- line
g. Electromyography and its uses in orthodontics
h. Wrist X-rays and its importance in orthodontics
General Principles in Orthodontic Treatment Planning Of Dental And Skeletal
Malocclusions
Anchorage In Orthodontics - Definition, Classification, Types and Stability Of Anchorage
Biomechanical Principles In Orthodontics Tooth movement a.
Different types of tooth movements
b. Tissue response to orthodontic force application
c. Age factor in orthodontic tooth movement
Preventive Orthodontics a.
Definition
b. Different procedures undertaken in preventive orthodontics and their limitations.
Interceptive Orthodontics a.
Definition
b. Different procedures undertaken in interceptive orthodontics
c. Serial extractions: Definition, indications, contra-indication, technique, advantages
and disadvantages.
d. Role of muscle exercises as an interceptive procedure
Corrective Orthodontics
a. Definition, factors to be considered during treatment planning.
b. Model analysis: Pont s, Ashley Howe s, Bolton, Careys, Moyer s Mixed Dentition
Analysis
 c. Methods of gaining space in the arch:- Indications, relative merits and demerits of
proximal stripping, arch expansion and extractions
Extractions in Orthodontics - indications and selection of teeth for extraction.
Orthodontic Appliances: General
Requisites for orthodontics appliances
Classification, indications of Removable and Functional Appliances
Methods of force application
Materials used in construction of various orthodontic appliances - uses of stainless
steel, technical considerations in curing of acrylic, Principles of welding and soldering,
fluxes and antifluxes.
e. Preliminary knowledge of acid etching and direct bonding,
Ethics
REMOVABLE ORTHODONTIC APPLIANCES
Components of removable appliances
Different types of clasps and their uses
Different types of labial bows and their uses
Different types of springs and their uses
Expansion appliances in orthodontics:
Principles
Indications for arch expansion
Description of expansion appliances and different types of expansion devices and
their uses.
Rapid maxillary expansion
FIXED ORTHODONTIC APPLIANCES
Definition, Indications & Contraindications
Component parts and their uses
Basic principles of different techniques: Edgewise, Begg s, straight wire.
EXTRAORAL APPLIANCES
Headgears
chincup
reverse pull headgears
MYOFUNCTIONAL APPLIANCES
Definition and principles
Muscle exercise and their uses in orthodontics
Functional appliances:
 Activator, Oral screens, Frankels function regulator, bionatar twin blocks, lip bumper
Inclined planes - upper and lower
Orthodontic Management of Cleft Lip And Palate
Principles of Surgical orthodontics
Brief Knowledge of correction of :
a. Mandibular Prognathism and Retrognathism
b. Maxillary Prognathism and Retrognathism c.
Anterior open bite and deep bite
d. Cross bite
Principle, Differential diagnosis and methods of Treatment of : 1.
Midline diastema
2. Cross bite
3. Open bite
4. Deep bite
5. Spacing
6. Crowding
7. Class II -Division 1, Division 2
8. Class III Malocclusion - True and Psuedo Class III
Retention And Relapse
Definition, Need for retention, causes of relapse, Methods of retention, Different types of
retention devices, Duration of retention, Theories of retention.
CLINICALS AND PRACTICALS IN ORTHODONTICS
PRACTICAL TRAINING DURING II YEAR B.D.S.
I. Basic wire bending exercises gauge 22 or 0.7 mm
Straightening of wires (4 Nos.)
Bending of a equilateral triangle
Bending of a rectangle
Bending of a square
Bending of a circle
Bending of U.V.
II. Construction of Clasps (Both sides upper / lower) Gauge 22 or 0.7 mm
¾ clasp (C-clasp)
Full clasp (Jackson s Crib)
Adam s Clasp
Triangular clasp
 Construction of Springs (on upper bother sides) Gauge 24 or 0.5mm
Finger Spring
Single Cantelever Spring
Double Cantelever Spring (Z-spring)
T-Springs on premolars
IV. Construction of Canine retractors Gauge 23 or 0.6mm
U-Loop Canine retractor
(Both sides on upper & lower)
Helical canine retractor
(Both sides on upper & lower)
3. Buccal canine retractor
-self supported buccal canine
retractor with
Sleeve - 5mm wire or 24 gauge
Sleeve - 19 gauge needle on any one side.
4. Palatal canine retractor on upper both
sides Gauge 23 or 0.6mm
Labial Bow
Gauge 22 or 0.7 mm
One on both upper and lower
CLINICAL TRAINING DURING III YEAR B.D.S.
NO. EXERCISE
Making upper Alignate impression
Making lower Alignate impression
Study moral preparation
Model Analysis
Pont s analysis
Ashley Howe s Analysis
Carey s Analysis
Bolton s Analysis
Moyer s Mixed Dentition Analysis
CLINICAL TRAINING DURING FINAL YEAR B.D.S.
No. EXERCISE
Case History taking
Case discussion
 Discussion on the given topic
Cephalometric tracings
Down s Analysis
Steiner s Analysis
Tweed s Analysis
PRACTICAL TRAINING DURING FINAL YEAR B.D.S
Adam s Clasp on Anterior teeth Gauge 0.7 mm
Modified Adams Clasp on upper arch Gauge 0.7 mm
High Labial bow with Apron spring on upper arch
(Gauge of Labial bow - 0.9 mm, Apron spring - 0.3
mm) 4. Coffin spring on upper arch Gauge 1 mm
Appliance construction in Acrylic
Upper and Lower Hawley s Appliance
Upper Hawley s with Anterior bite plane
Upper Habit breaking Appliance
Upper Hawley s with Posterior bite plane with Z Spring
Construction of Activator
Lower inclined plane / Catalan s Appliance
Upper Expansion plate with Expansion screw
RECOMMENDED AND REFERENCE BOOKS
1. CONTEMPORARY ORTHODOTICS WILLIAM R. PROFIT
2. ORTHODONTICS FOR DENTAL STUDENTS WHITE AND GARDINER
3. HANDBOOK OF ORTHODONTICS MOYERS
ORTHODONTICS - PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE GRABER
DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION AND USE OF REMOVABLE
6. ORTHODONTIC APPLIANCES C. PHILIP ADAMS
7. CLINICAL ORTHODONTICS: VOL 1 & 2 SALZMANN

15. PAEDIATRIC & PREVENTIVE DENTISTRY

THEORY :
INTRODUCTION TO PEDODONTICS & PREVENTIVE DENTISTRY
Definition, Scope, Objectives and Importance.
GROWTH & DEVELOPMENT
Importance of study of growth and development in pedodontics
Prenatal and Postnatal factors in growth & development
 Theories of growth & development
Development of maxilla and mandible and related age changes
DEVELOPMENT OF OCCLUSION FROM BIRTH THROUGH ADELOSCENCE
Study of variations and abnormalities
DENTAL ANATOMY AND HISTOLOGY
Development of teeth and associated structures.
Eruption and shedding of teeth
Teething disorders and their management
Chronology of eruption of teeth
Differences between deciduous and permanent teeth
Development of dentition from birth to adolescence.
Importance of first permanent molar.
DENTAL RADIOLOGY RELATED TO PEDODONTICS
ORAL SURGICAL PROCEDURES IN CHILDREN
Indication and contraindications of extractions of primary and permanent teeth in
children
Knowledge of Local and General Anesthesia
Minor surgical procedures in children
DENTAL CARIES:
Historical background
Definition, aetiology and pathogenesis
Caries pattern in primary, young permanent and permanent teeth in children
Rampant caries, early childhood caries and extensive caries
Definition, aetiology, pathogenesis, Clinical features, Complications &
Management
Role of diet and nutrition in Dental Caries
Dietary modifications and diet counseling
Caries activity, tests, caries prediction, caries susceptibility & their clinical application.
GINGIVAL & PERIODONTAL DISEASES IN CHILDREN
Normal gingiva & periodontium in children
Definition, aetiology and Pathogenesis
Prevention & Management of gingival & Periodontal diseases
CHILD PSYCHOLOGY
Definition
Theories of child psychology
 Psychological development of children with age
Principles of psychological growth & development while managing child patient.
Dental fear and its management
Factors affecting child s reaction to dental treatment
BEHAVIOUR MANAGEMENT
Definitions.
Types of behaviour encountered in the dental clinic
Non - pharmacological & pharmacological methods of Behaviour Management.
PEDIATRIC OPERATIVE DENTISTRY:
Principles of Pediatric Operative Dentistry
Modifications required for cavity preparation in primary and young permanent teeth
Various Isolation Techniques
Restorations of decayed primary, young permanent and permanent teeth in children
using various restrorative materials like Glass Ionomer, Composites and Silver
Amalgam. Stainless steel, Polycarbonate & Resin Crowns.
PEDIATRIC ENDODONTICS
Principles & Diagnosis.
Classification of Pulpal Pathology in primary, young permanent & permanent teeth
Management of Pulpally involved primary, young permanent & permanent teeth
Pulp capping - direct & indirect
Pulpotomy
Pulpectomy
Apexogenesis
Apexification
Obturation Techniques & material used for primary, young permanent & permanent
teeth in children
TRAUMATIC INJURIES IN CHILDREN
Classifications & Importance
Sequelae & reaction of teeth of trauma
Management of Traumatized teeth.
PREVENTIVE & INTERCEPTIVE ORTHODONTICS:
Definitions.
Problems encountered during primary and mixed dentition phases and their
management
 Serial extractions.
Space management
ORAL HABITS IN CHILDREN
Definition, Aetiology & Classification.
Clinical features of digit sucking, tongue thrusting, mouth breathing & various other
secondary habits
Management of oral habits in children
DENTAL CARE OF CHILDREN WITH SPECIAL NEEDS :
-Definition, Aetiology, Classification, Behavioural and Clinical features & Management
of children with :
Physically handicapping conditions:
Mentally Compromising conditions:
Medically compromising conditions
Genetic disorders
CONGENITAL ABNORMALITIES IN CHILDREN:
Definition, Classification, Clinical features & Management
DENTAL IMERGENCIES IN CHILDREN & THEIR MANAGEMENT
DENTAL MATERIAL USED IN PEDIATRIC DENTISTRY
PREVENTIVE DENTISTRY :
Definition
Principles & Scope
Types of prevention
Different preventive measures in Pediatric Dentistry including pit and fissure sealants
and caries vaccine.
DENTAL HEALTH EDUCATION & SCHOOL DENTAL HEALTH PROGRAMMES.
FLUORIDES :
Historical background
Systemic & Topical fluorides
Mechanism of action.
Toxicity & Management
Defluoridation techniques.
CASE HISTORY RECORDING :
Outline of principles of examination, diagnosis & treatment planning.
SETTING UP OF PEDODONTIC CLINIC
 ETHICS
PRACTICALS:
Following is the recommended clinical quota for under graduate students in the subject of
pediatric & preventive dentistry.
Restorations - Class I & II only : 45
Preventive measures e.g. Oral Prophylaxis - 20
Fluoride applications - 10
Extractions - 25
Case History Recording & Treatment Planning - 10
Education & motivation of the patients using disclosing agents. Educating patients about
oral hygiene measures like tooth brushing, flossing etc.

BOOKS RECOMMENDED & REFERENCE:

Pediatric Dentistry (Infancy through Adolescences) - Pinkham.
2. Kennedy s Pediatric Operative Dentistry Kennedy & Curzon.
3. Occlusal guidance in Pediatric Dentistry Stephen H. Wei.
Clinical use of Fluorides - Stephen H. Wei
Pediatric Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery - Kaban
Pediatric Medical Emergencies - P.S. Whatt
Understanding of Dental Caries - Niki Foruk
An Atlas of Glass Ionomer cements - G. J. Mount
Clinical Pedodontics - Finn
Textbook of Pediatric Dentistry - Braham Morris
Primary Preventive Dentistry - Norman O. Harris
Handbook of Clinical Pedodontics - Kenneth D.
Preventive Dentistry - Forrester.
The Metobolism and Toxicity of Fluoride - Garry M. Whitford
Dentistry for the Child and Adolescence - Mc Donald.
Pediatric Dentistry - Damle S.G.
Behaviour Management - Wright
18 Pediatric Dentistry _ Mathewson
Traumatic Injuries - andreason
Occlusal guidance in Pediatric Dentistry - Nakata
Pediatric Drug Therapy - Tomare
Contemporary Orthodontics - Profitt.
 Preventive Dentistry - Depaola
Metabolism & Toxicity of Fluoride - whitford G.M.
Endodontic Practice - Grossman
Principles of Endodontics - Munford
Endodontics - Ingle
Pathways of Pulp - Cohen
Management of Traumatized anterior Teeth - Hargreaves.

PUBLIC HEALTH DENTISTRY

GOAL :
To prevent and control oral diseases and promote oral health through organized community
efforts.
OBJECTIVES :
Knowledge :
At the conclusion of the course the student shall have a knowledge of the basis of public
health, preventive dentistry, public health problems in India, Nutrition, Environment and their
role in health, basics if dental statistics, epidemiological methods, National oral health policy
with emphasis on oral health policy.
Skill & Attitude :
At the conclusion of the course the student shall have require at the skill of identifying health
problems affecting the society, conducting health surveys, conducting health education
classes and deciding health strategies. Students should develop a positive attitude towards
the problems of the society and must take responsibilities in providing health.
Communication abilities :
At the conclusions of the course the student should be able to communicate the needs of the
community efficiently, inform the society of all the recent methodologies in preventing oral
disease.
Syllabus :
Introduction to Dentistry : Definition of Dentistry, History of dentistry, Scope, aims and
objective dentistry.
Public Health :
Health & Disease : Concepts, Philosophy, Definition and Characteristics.
Public Health : Definition & Concepts, History of Public Health
General Epidemiology : Definition, objectives, methods
 Environmental Health - Concepts, principles, protection, sources, purification
environmental sanitation of water disposal of waste sanitation, then role in
mass disorder.
Health Education : Definition, concepts, principles, methods, and
health education aids.
Public health administration : Priority, establishment, manpower, private
practice management, hospital management.
Ethics and Jurisprudence : Professional liabilities, negligence, malpractice,
consents, evidence, contracts and methods of identification in forensic dentistry.
Nutrition in oral diseases
Behavioural science : Definition of sociology, anthropology and psychology and
their in dental practice and community.
Health care delivery system : Centre and state, oral health policy, primary
health care, national programmes health organizations.

Dental Public Health

Definition and difference between community and clinical health
Epidemiology of dental diseases dental caries, periodontal
diseases, malocclusion, dental fluorosis and oral cancer.
Survey procedures : Planning, implementation and evaluation, WHO oral health
survey methods 1997, indices for dental diseases.
Delivery of dental care : Dental auxiliaries, operational and non-operational,
incremental and comprehensive health care, school dental health.
Payments of dental care : Methods of payments and dental
insurance, government plans.
Preventive Dentistry - definition, Levels, role of individual, Community and
profession, fluorides in dentistry, plaque control programmes.
Research Methodology and Dental Statistics
Health Information : Basic Knowledge of Computers, MS Office, Window 2000,
Statistical Programmes
Research Methodology : Definition, types of research, designing a
written protocol
Bio-Statistics : Introduction, collection of data, presentation of data, Measures of
Central tendency, measures of dispersion, Tests of significance, Sampling and
sampling techniques types, errors, bias, blind trails and calibration.
Practice Management
Place and locality
Premises & Layout
Selection of equipments
Maintenance of records / accounts /
audit Dentist Act 1948 with amendment
Dental Council of India and State Dental Councils
Composition and responsibilities
Indian Dental Association
Head Office, State, Local and branches.

PRACTICALS / CLINICALS / FIELD PROGRAMME IN COMMUNITY DENTISTRY

These exercises designed to help the student in IV year students:
Understand the community aspects of dentistry.
To take up leadership role in solving community oral health programme.
Exercises :
Collection of statistical data (demographic) on population in India, birth rates,
morbidity and mortality, literacy, per capita income
Incidence and prevalence of common oral diseases like dental caries,
periodontal disease, oral cancer, fluorosis at national and international levels.
Preparation of oral health education material posters, models, slides, lecturers,
play acting skits etc.
Oral health status assessment of the community using indices and WHO basic
oral health survey methods
Exploring and planning setting of private dental clinics in rural, semi urban and
urban locations, availment of finance for dental practices-preparing project
report.
Visit to primary health centre-to acquaint with activities and primary health care
delivery
Visit to water purification plant / public health laboratory / centre for treatment of
western and sewage water.
Visit to schools-to assess the oral health status of school children, emergency
treatment and health education including possible preventive care at school
(tooth brushing technique demonstration and oral rinse programme etc.)
 Visit to institution for the care of handicapped, physically, mentally or medically
compromised patients
Preventive dentistry : in the department application of pit and fissure sealants,
fluoride gel application procedure, A.R.T., Comprehensive health for 5 pts
at least 2 patients.

The colleges are encouraged to involve in the N.S.S. programme for college students for
carrying out social work in rural areas.
SUGGESTED INTERNSHIP PROGRAMME IN COMMUNITY DENTISTRY
AT THE COLLEGE
Students are posted t the department to get training in dental practice management
Total oral health care approach - in order to prepare the new graduates in their approach
to diagnosis, treatment planning, cost of treatment, prevention of treatment on
schedule, recall maintenance of records etc. at least 10 patients (both children and
adults of all types posting for at least one month).
The practice of chair side preventive dentistry including oral health education
AT THE COMMUNITY ORAL HEALTH CARE CENTRE (ADOPTED BY THE DENTAL
COLLEGE IN RURAL AREAS)
Graduates posted for at least on month to familiarize in :
Survey methods, analysis and presentation of oral health assessment of school children
and community independently using WHO basic oral health survey methods.
Participation in rural oral health education programmes
Stay in the village to understand the problems and life in rural areas.
III. DESIRABLE : Learning use of computers at least basic programme
Examination Pattern
Index : Case History
Oral hygiene indices simplified - Green and vermilion
Silness and Loe index for Plaque
Loe and Silness index for gingival
CPI
DMF : T & S, df:t and s
Deans fluoride index
Health Education
Make on - Audio visual aid
Make a health talk
 Practical work
Pit and fissure sealant
Topical fluoride application
BOOKS RECOMMENDED & REFERENCE :
Dentistry Dental Practice and Community by David F. Striffler and Brain A. Burt, Edn. -
1983, W.B. Saunders Company
Principles of Dental public health by James Morse Dunning. IV th Edition, 1986, Harward
University Press.
Dental Public Health and Community Dentistry Ed by Anthony Jong Publication by the
C. V. Mosby Company 1981
Community Oral Health - A system approach by Patricia P. Cormier and Jouce I. Levy
published by Appleton Century -Crofts / New York - 1981
Community Dentistry - A problem oriented approach by P.C. Dental Hand book series Vol
8 by Stephen L. Silverman and Ames F. Tryon, Series editor Alvin F. Gardner, PSG
publishing company Inc. Littleton Massachuseltts, 1980
Dental Public Health- An Introduction to Community Dentistry. Edition by Geoffrey L.
Slack and Brain Burt, Published by John Wrigth and sons Bristol, 1980
Oral Health Surveys - Basic methods, 4th edition, 1997, published by W.H.O. Geneva
available at the regional office, New Delhi.
Preventive Medicine and Hygiene - By Maxcy and Rosenau, published by Appleton
Century Crofts, 1986.
Preventive Dentistry - by J.O. Forrest published by John Wright and sons Bristoli, 1980
Preventive Dentistry by Murray, 1997
Text Book of Preventive and Social Medicine by Park and Park, 14th Edition.
Community Dentistry by Dr. Soben Peter
Introduction to Bio-statistics by B.K. Mahajan
Research Methodology and Bio-statistics by
Introduction to statistical Method s by Garewal.
PERIODONTOLOGY
OBJECTIVES :
The student shall acquire the skill to perform dental scaling, diagnostic tests of periodontal
diseases; to use the instruments for periodontal therapy and maintenance of the same.
The student shall develop attitude to impart the preventive measures namely, the prevention
of periodontal diseases and prevention of the progress of the disease. The student shall also
develop an attitude to perform the treatment with full aseptic precautions; shall develop an
attitude to prevent iatrogenic diseases; to conserve the tooth to the maximum possible time by
maintaining periodontal health and to refer the patients who require specialist s care
Introduction : Definition of Periodontology, Periodontics, Periodontia, Brief historical
background, Scope of Periodontics
Development of perio-dental tissues, micro structural anatomy and biology of periodontal
tissues in detail Gingiva . Junctional epithelium in detail, Epithelial
Mesenchymal Interaction, Periodontal, ligament Cementum, Alveolar bone.
Defensive mechanisms in the oral cavity : Role of Epithelium, Gingival fluid, Saliva and
other defensive mechanisms in the oral environment
4. Age changes in periodontal structures Age changes in teeth and periodontal structures and 1
and their significance in Geriatric their association with periodontal diseases
dentistry
5. Classification of periodontal diseases Need for classification, scientific basis of 1
classification
Classification of gingival and periodontal disease as
described in world workshop 1989
Gingivitis :
Plaque associated, ANUG, steroid hormone influenced
Medication influenced, Desquamative gingivitis, other
forms of gingivitis as in nutritional deficiency, bacterial
and viral infections etc.
Periodontitis :
Adult periodontitis, Rapidly progressive periodontitis A
& B, Juvenile periodontitis (localized, generalized, and
post juvenile), Prepubertal periodontitis
Refractory periodontits

6 Gingival diseases Localized and generalized gingivitis, papillary, 6

marginal and diffuse gingivitis
Etiology, Pathogenesis, clinical signs, symptoms and
management of
i) Plaque associated gingivitis
ii) Systemically aggravated gingivitis (sex hormones,
drugs and systemic diseases )
iii) ANUG
iv) Desquamative gingivitis-Gingivitis associated with
lichen planus, pemphigoid, pemphigus and other
vesiculobullous lesions
v) Allergic gingivitis
vi) Infective gingivitis-Herpetic, bacterial and candidial
vii) Pericoronitis
viii) Gingival enlargement (classification and differential
diagnosis)
7 Epidemiology of periodontal diseases - Definition of index, indidence, prevalence,
epidemiology, endemic, epidemic and
pandemic
- classification of indices (Irreversible and
reversible )
- Deficiencies of earlier indices used in
Perodontics
 - Detailed understanding of Silness & Loe
Plaque Index, Loe & Silness Gingival Index,
CPITN & CPI
- Prevalence of periodontal diseases in India
and other countries
- Public health significance (all these topics
are covered at length under community
dentistry. Hence, the topics may be
discussed briefly. However, questions may
be asked from the topics for examination.
8 Extension of inflammation from gingiva Mechanism of spread of inflammation from gingival
area to deeper periodontal structures factors that
modify the spread
9. Pocket Definition, signs and symptoms, classification,
pathogenesis, histopathology, root surface changes
and contents of the pocket.
10. Etiology - Dental plaque (Biofilm)
- Definition, New concept of biofilm
- Types composition, bacterial colonization,
growth, maturation and disclosing agents
- Role of dental plaque in periodontal
diseases
- Plaque microorganism in detail and bacteria
associated with periodontal diseases
- Plaque retentive factors
- Materia alba
- Food debris
- Calculus
- Definition
- Types, composition, attachment, theories of
formation
- Role of calculus in disease
Food impaction
- Definition
- Types, Etiology
- Hirschfelds classification
- Signs, symptoms & sequelae of treatment
Trauma from Occlusion
- Definition, Types
- Histopathological changes
- Role in periodontal disease
- Measures of management in brief
Habits
- Their periodontal significance
- Bruxism & parafunctional habits, tongue
thrusting, lip biting, occupational habits.
IATROGENIC FACTORS
Conservative Dentistry
- Restorations
- Contact point, marginal ridge, surface
roughness, overhanging restorations,
interface between restoration and teeth
Prosthodontics
- Interrelationship
- Bridges and other prosthesis pontics (types)
surface contour, relationships of margins to
 the perodontium, Gingival protection theory,
muscle action theory and theory of access
to oral hygiene.
Orthodontics
- Interrelationship, removable appliances &
fixed appliances
- Retention of plaque, bacterial changes
Systemic diseases
- Diabetes, sex hormones, nutrition (Vit.C &
proteins)
- AIDS & periodontium
- Hemorrhagic disease, Leukemia, clotting
factor disorders, PMN disorders
11. Risk factors - Definition, Risk factors for periodontal
diseases 1
12. Host response - Mechanism of initiation and progression of3
periodontal diseases
- Basic concepts about cells, Mast cells,
neutrophils, macrophages, lymphocytes,
immunoglobulin, complement system,
immune mechanisms & cytokines in brief
- Stages in gingivitis - initial, early ,
established and advanced
- Periodontal disease activity, continuous
paradigm, random burst & asynchronous
multiple burst hypothesis
13. Periodontitis - Etiology, histopathology, clinical signs & 6
symptoms, dignosis and treatment of adult
periodontitis
- Periodontal abscess; definition,
classification, pathogenesis, differential
diagnosis and treatment
- Furcation involvement, Glickman s
classification, prognosis and management
- Rapidly progressive periodontitis
- Juvenile periodontitis : Localised and
generalized
- Post juvenile periodontitis
- Periodontitis associated with systemic
diseases
- Refractory periodontitis
14. Diagnosis - Routine procedures, methods of probing,
types of probes (According case history)
- Halitosis: Etiology and treatment. Mention
advanced diagnostic aids and their role in
brief.
15. Prognosis - Definition, types, purpose and factors to be
taken into consideration
16. Treatment plan - Factors to be considered
17. Periodontal Therapy A. General principles of periodontal therapy. Phase I,
II, III, IV therapy
Definition of periodontal regeneration, repair, new
attachment and reattachment
B. Plaque control
i. Mechanical tooth brushes, interdental cleaning aids,
dentifrices
 ii. Chemical ; classification and mechanism of action of
each
& Pocket irrigation
18. Pocket eradication procedures - Scaling & root planning
- indications
- Aims & objectives
- Healing following root planning
- Hand instruments, sonic, ultrasonic & peizo
electric scalers
- curettage & present concepts
- definition
- indications
- Aims & objectives
- procedures & healing response
- Flap surgery
- Definition
- Types of flaps, Design of flaps, papilla
preservation
- Indications & contraindications
- Armamentarium
- Surgical procedure & healing response
19. Osseous Surgery Osseous defects in periodontal disease
- Definition
- Classification
- Surgery : resective, addictive osseous
surgery (osseous grafts with classification
of grafts)
- Healing responses
- Other regenerative procedures ; root
conditioning
- Guided tissue regeneration
20. Mucogingival surgery & periodontal Definition
plastic surgeries Muscogingival problems : etiology, classification of
gingival recession (P.D. Miller Jr. and Sulivan and
atkins)
Indications & objectives
Gingival extension procedures : laternal predicle graft,
frenectomy, frenotomy
Crown lengthening procedures
Periodontal microsurgery in brief
21. Splints - Periodontal splints
- Purpose & Classification
- Principles & splinting
22. Hypersensitivity Causes, Theories & Management
23. Implants Definition, types, scope & biomaterials uses
Periodontal consideration : Such as implant-bone
interface, implant - gingival interface, implant failure,
peri implantitis & management
24. Maintenance phase (SPT) - Aims, objective and principles
- Importance
- Procedures
- Maintenance of implants
25. Pharmaco - therapy - Periodontal dressings
- antibiotics & anti-inflammatory drugs
- Local drug delivery systems
26. Periodontal management of medically Topics concerning periodontal management of
 Compromised patients medically compromised patients
27. Inter-disciplinary care - Pulpo-periodontal involvement
- Routes of spread of infection
- Simons classification
- Management
28. Systemic effects of periodontal - Cardiovascular diseases Low birth weight
diseases in brief babies etc.
29. Infection control protocol Sterilization and various aseptic procedures
30. Ethics

TUTORIALS DURING CLINICAL POSTING ;

Infection control
Periodontal instruments
Chair position and principles of instrumentation
Maintenance of instruments (sharpening)
Ultrasonic, Peizoelectric and sonic scaling - demonstration of technique
Diagnosis of periodontal disease and determination of prognosis
Radiographic interpretation and lab investigations
Motivation of patients - oral hygiene instructions
Students should be able to record a detailed periodontal case history, determine
diagnosis, prognosis and plan treatment. Student should perform scaling, root planning local
drug delivery and SPT. Shall be given demonstration of all periodontal surgical procedures.

DEMONSTRATIONS :
History taking and clinical examination of the patients
Recording different indices
Methods of using various scaling and surgical instruments
Polishing the teeth
Bacterial smear taking
Demonstration to patients about different oral hygiene aids
Surgical procedures - gingivectomy, gingivoplasty and flap operations
Follow up procedures, post operative care and supervision
REQUIREMENTS:
Diagnosis, treatment planning and discussion and total periodontal treatment -
25 cases
Dental scaling, oral hygiene instructions - 50 complete cases / equivalent
Assistance in periodontal surgery - 5 cases
A work record should be maintained by all the students and should be submitted at

the time of examination after due certification from the heal of the department.
Students should have to complete the work prescribed by the concerned department from
time to time and submit a certified record for evaluation.
PRESCRIBED BOOK :
Glickman s Clinical Periodontology - Carranza

REFERENCE BOOKS
Essentials of Periodontology and periodontics - Torquil MacPhee
Contemporary periodontics - Cohen
Periodontal therapy - Goldman
Orbans periodontics - Orban
Oral Health Survey - W.H.O.
Preventive Periodontics - Young and Stiffler
Public Health Dentistry - Slack
Advanced Periodontal Disease - John Prichard
Preventive Dentistry - Forrest
Clinical Periodontology - Jan Lindhe
Periodontics - Baer & Morris.

18. PROSTHODONTICS AND CROWN & BRIDGE

Complete Dentures
Applied Anatomy and Physiology
Introduction
Biomechanics of the edentulous state
Residual ridge resorption
Communicating with patient
Understanding the patients.
Mental Attitude
Instructing the patient
C.Diagnosis and treatment planning for patients
With some teeth remaining
With no teeth remaining
Systemic status
Local factor
The geriatric patients
d) Diagnostic procedures
 Articulators - discussion
Improving the patient s denture foundation and ridge relation - an overview.
Pre-operative examination
Initial hard tissue & soft tissue procedures
Secondary hard and soft tissue procedure
Implant procedure
Congenital deformities
Postoperative procedure.
Principles of Retention, Support and Stability
Impressions - detail
Muscles of facial expression
Biological considerations for maxillary and mandibular impression including anatomy
landmark and their interpretation.
Impression objectives
Impression materials
Impression techniques
Maxillary and mandibular impression procedures.
Preliminary impressions
final Impressions
Laboratory procedures involved with impression making (Beading & Boxing, and
cast preparation)
Record bases and occlusion rims - in detail
Materials & techniques
useful guidelines and ideal parameters
recording and transferring bases and occlusal rims
Biological consideration in jaw relation & jaw movements - craniomandibular relations.
Mandibular movements
Maxillo - mandibular relation including vertical and horizontal jaw relations.
Concept of occlusion - discuss in brief
Relating the patient to the articulator
Face bow types and uses - discuss in brief
Face bow transfer procedure - discuss in brief
Recording maxillo mandibular relation
Vertical relations
Centric relation records
 Eccentric relation records.
Lateral relation records
Tooth selection and arrangement
Anterior teeth
Posterior teeth
Esthetic and functional harmony
Relating inclination of teeth to concept of occlusion - in brief
Neutrocentric concept
Balanced occlusal concept
Trial dentures
Laboratory procedures
Wax contouring
Investing of dentures
Preparing of mold
Preparing & Packing acrylic resin
Processing of dentures
Recovery of dentures
Lab remount procedures
Recovering the complete denture from the cast
Finishing and polishing the complete denture
Plaster cast for clinical denture remount procedure
Denture insertion
Insertion procedures
Clinical errors
Correcting occlusal disharmony
Selective grinding procedures.
Treating problems with associated denture use - discuss in brief (tabulation / flow chart
form)
Treating abused tissues - discuss in brief
Relining and rebasing of dentures - discuss in brief
Immediate complete dentures construction procedure - discuss in brief
The single complete denture - discuss in brief
Overdentures denture - discuss in brief
Dental implants in complete denture - discuss in brief.
Note : It is suggested that the above mentioned topics be dealt with wherever appropriate in
the following order so as to cover -
Definition
Diagnosis (of the particular situation / patient selection / treatment planning)
Types / classification
Materials
Methodology - Lab / Clinical
Advantages & disadvantages
Indication, contrindications
Maintenance phase
Oral Implantology
Ethics

Removable Flexible Dentures

Introduction
Terminologies and scope
Classification
Examination, Diagnosis & Treatment planning and evaluation of diagnostic data
Components of a removable parital
Major connectors,
Minor connectors
Rest and rest seats
Components of a Removable Partial Denture
Direct retainers
Indirect retainers
Tooth replacement
Principles of Removable Partial Denture Design
Survey and design - in brief
Surveyors
Surveying
Designing
Mouth preparation and masters cast
Impression materials and procedures for removable partial dentures
Preliminary jaw relation and esthetic try in for some anterior replacement teeth
Laboratory procedures for framework construction - in brief.
 Fitting the framework - in brief.
Try - in of the partial denture - in brief
Completion of the partial denture - in brief
Inserting the Removable Partial Denture - in brief
Postinsertion observations.
Temporary Acrylic Partial Dentures.
Immediate Removable Partial Denture.
Removable Partial Dentures opposing Complete denture.
Note: It is suggested that the above mentioned topics be dealt with wherever appropriate in
the following order so as to cover -
Definition
Diagnosis (of the particular situation / patient selection / treatment planning)
Types / Classification
Materials
Methodology - Lab / Clinical
Advantages & disadvantages
Indications, contradictions
Maintenance Phase

Fixed Partial Dentures

Topics To Be Covered In Detail
Introduction
Fundamentals of occlusion - in brief.
Articulators - in brief
Treatment planning for single tooth restorations.
Treatment planning for the replacement of missing teeth including selection and choice of
abutment teeth.
Fixed partial denture configurations.
Principles of tooth preparations.
Preparations for full veneer crowns - in detail.
Preparations for partial veneer crowns - in brief
Provisional Restorations
Fluid Control and Soft Tissue Management
Impressions
Working Casts and Dies
 Wax patterns
Pontics and Edentulous Ridges
Esthetic Considerations
Finishing and Cementation

Topics To Be Covered In Brief -

Solder Joints and Other Connectors
All - Ceramic Restorations
Metal - Ceramic Restorations
Preparations of intracoronal restorations.
Preparations for extensively damaged teeth.
Preparations for periodontally weakened teeth
The Functionally Generated Path Technique
Investing and Casting
Resin - Bonded Fixed Partials Denture
Note : It is suggested that the above mentioned topics be dealt with wherever appropriate in
the following order so as to cover -
Definition
Diagnosis (of the particular situation / patient selection / treatment planning)
Types / Classification
Materials
Methodology - Lab / Clinical
Advantages & disadvantages
Indications, contradictions
Maintenance Phase
RECOMMENDED BOOKS :
Syllabus of Complete denture by - Charles M. Heartwell Jr. and Arthur O. Rahn.
Boucher s Prosthodontic treatment for edentulous patients
Essentials of complete denture prosthodontics by - Sheldon Winkler.
Maxillofacial prosthetics by - Willam R. Laney.
McCraken s Removable partial Prosthodontics
Removable partial prosthodontics by - Ernest L. Miller and Joseph E. Grasso.
 AESTHETIC DENTISTRY
Aesthetic Dentistry is gaining more popularity since last decade. It is better that undergraduate
students should understand the philosophy and scientific knowledge of the esthetic dentistry.
Introduction and scope of esthetic dentistry
Anatomy & physiology of smile
Role of the colour in esthetic dentistry
Simple procedures (roundering of central incisors to enhance
esthetics appearance)
Bleaching of teeth
Veneers with various materials
Preventive and interceptive esthetics
Ceramics
Simple gingival contouring to enhance the appearance
Simple clinical procedures for BDS students
Recommended books:
Esthetic guidelines for restorative dentistry; Scharer & others
Esthetics of anterior fixed prosthodontics; Chiche (GJ) & Pinault (Alain)
Esthetic & the treatment of facial form, Vol 28; Mc Namara (JA)

FORENSIC ODONTOLOGY (30 HRS OF INSTRUCTION)

Definition
Forensic is derived from the Latin word forum, which means court if law, Odontology literally
implies the study of teeth. Forensic odontology, therefore, has been defined by the
Federation Dentaire International (FDI) as that branch of dentistry which, in the interest of
justice, deals with the proper handling and examination of dental evidence, and with the
proper evaluation and presentation of dental findings.
Objectives of the undergraduate curriculum
At the end of the programme, the dental graduate should:
Have sound knowledge of the theorectial and practical aspects of forensic odontology.
Have an awareness of ethical obligations and legal responsibilities in routine practice
and forensic casework.
Be competent to recognize forensic cases with dental applications when consulted by
the police, forensic pathologists, lawyers and associated professionals.
Be competent in proper collection of dental evidence related to cases of identification,
ethnic and sex differentiaton, age estimation and bite marks.
 Be able to assist in analysis, evaluation, and presentation of dental facts within the
realm of law.
Curriculum for forensic odontology
Introduction to forensic dentistry
Definition and history
Recent developments and future trends
Overview of forensic medicine and toxicology
Cause of death and postmortem changes
Toxicological manifestations in teeth and oral tissues
Dental identification
Definition
Basis for dental identification
Postmortem procedures
Dental record compilation and interpretation
Comparison of data, and principles of report writing
Identification in disasters and handling incinerated remains
Postmortem changes to oral structures
Maintaining dental records
Basic aspects of good record - keeping
Different types of dental records
o Dental charts
o Dental radiographs
o Study casts
o Denture marking
o Photographs
Dental notations
Relevance of dental records in forensic investigation
Age estimation
Age estimation in children and adolescents
o Advantages of tooth calcification over eruption in estimating age
o Radiographic methods of Schour & Massler, Demirjian et al
Age estimation in adults
o Histological
methods - Gustafsons six variables and Johanson s modification,
Bang & Ramm s dentine translucency
 o Radiographic method of Kvaal et al
Principles of report writing
Sex differentiation
Sexual dimorphism in tooth dimensions (Odontometrics)
Ethnic variations ( racial differences) in tooth morphology
Description of human population groups
Genetic and environmental influences on tooth morphology
Description of metric and non-metric dental features used in ethnic differentiation
Bite mark procedures
Definition and classification
Basis for bite mark investigation
Bite mark appearance
Macroscopic and microscopic ageing of bite marks
Evidence collection from the victim and suspect of bite mark
Analysis and comparison
Principles of report writing
Animal bite investigation
Dental DNA methods
Importance of dental DNA evidence in forensic investigations
Types of DNA and dental DNA isolation procedures
DNA analysis in personal identification
Gene-linked sex dimorphism
Population genetics
Jurisprudence and ethics
Fundamentals of law and the constitution
Medical legislation and statutes (Dental and /medical Council Acts, etc)
Basics of civil law (including torts, contracts and consumer protection act)
Criminal and civil procedure code (including expert witness requirement)
Assessment and quantification of dental injuries in courts of law
Medical negligence and liability
Informed consent and confidentiality
Rights and duties of doctors and patients
Medical and dental ethics (as per Dentists Act)
Theory session and practical exercises
Total hours for the course
 Didactic - 10-12 hours
Practical - 20-25 hours
Detailed didactic sessions for the above components, either in the form of lectures or
as structured student - teacher interactions, is essential. Specialists from multiple
disciplines, particularly from legal and forensic sciences, can be encouraged to
undertake teaching in their area of expertise.
An interactive, navigable and non-linear (INN) model may also be utilized for education.
Practical exercises (real-life casework and / or simulated cases) must complement
didactic sessions to facilitate optimal student understanding of the subject. Mandatory
practical training in dental identification methods, dental profiling (ethnic and sex
differences, radiographic age estimation), and bite mark procedures, is of paramount
importance. In addition, practical exercises / demonstrations in histological age
estimation, comparative dental anatomy, DNA methods, medical autopsy, court visits,
and other topics may be conducted depending on available expertise, equipment and
feasibility.
Approach to teaching forensic odontology
Forensic odontology could be covered in two separate streams. The divisions include a
preclinical stream and a clinical stream.
Preclinical stream
introduction to forensic odontology
Sex differences in odontometrics
Ethnic variations in tooth morphology
Histological age estimation
Dental DNA methods
Bite marks procedures
Overview of forensic medicine and toxicology
It could prove useful to undertake the preclinical stream in II or III year under Oral
Biology / Oral Pathology since these aspects of forensic odontology require grounding
in dental morphology, dental histology and basic sciences,which, students would have
obtained in I and / or II BDS.
Clinical stream
Dental identification
Maintaining dental records
Radiographic age estimation
Medical jurisprudence and ethics
It would be suitable to undertake these topics in the IV or V year as part of Oral Medicine and
Radiology, since students require reasonable clinical exposure and acumen to interpret dental
records, perform dental postmortems and analyse dental radiographs for age estimation.

ORAL IMPLANTOLOGY (30 hrs of instruction)

INTRODUCTION TO ORAL IMPLANTOLOGY
Oral Implantology is now emerged as a new branch in dentistry world wide and it has been
given a separate status in the universities abroad. In India day to day the practice of treating
patients with implants are on rise. In this contest inclusion of this branch into under graduate
curriculum has become very essential. The objective behind this is to impart basic knowledge
of Oral Implantology to undergraduates and enable them to diagnose, plan the treatment and
to carry out the needed pre surgical mouth preparations and treat or refer them to speciality
centres. This teaching programme may be divided and carried out by the Dept. of Oral
Surgery, Prosthodontics and Periodontics.
History of implants, their design & surface characteristics and osseo-integration
Scope of oral & maxillofacial implantology & terminologies
A brief introduction to various implant systems in practice
Bone biology, Morphology, Classification of bone and its relevance to implant treatment
and bone augmentation materials.
Soft tissue considerations in implant dentistry
Diagnosis & treatment planning in implant dentistry
Case history taking / Examination / Medical evaluation / Orofacial evaluation /
Radiographic evaluation / Diagnostic evaluation / Diagnosis and treatment planning /
treatment alternatives / Estimation of treatment costs / patient education and motivation
Pre surgical preparation of patient
Implant installation & armamentarium for the Branemark system as a role model
First stage surgery - Mandible - Maxilla
Healing period & second stage surgery
Management of surgical complications & failures
General considerations in prosthodontic reconstruction & Bio mechanics
Prosthodontic components of the Branemark system as a role model
Impression procedures & Preparation of master cast
Jaw relation records and construction of suprastructure with special emphasis on
occlusion for osseointegrated prosthesis
Management of prosthodontic complications & failures
 17. Recall & maintenance phase.
Criteria for success of osseointegrated implant supported prosthesis
SUGGESTED BOOKS FOR READING
1. Contemporary Implant Dentistry - Carl .E. Misch
Mosby 1993 First Edition.
2. Osseointegration and Occlusal Rehabilitation Hobo S., Ichida. E. and Garcia L. T.
Ouintessence Publishing Company,
1989 First Edition.

BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCES (20 hrs of instruction)

GOAL:
The aim of teaching behavioural sciences to undergraduate student is to impart such
knowledge & skills that may enable him to apply principles of behaviour -
For all round development of his personality
In various Therapeutic situations in dentistry.
The student should be able to develop skills of assessing psychological factors in each
patient, explaining stress, learning simple counseling techniques, and improving patients
compliance behaviour.
OBJECTIVES:
KNOWLEDGE & UNDERSTANDING:
At the end of the course, the student shall be able to:
Comprehend different aspects of normal behaviour like learning, memory,
motivation, personality & intelligence.
Recognise difference between normal and abnormal behaviour.
Classify psychiatric disorders in dentistry.
Recognise clinical manifestations of dental phobia, dental anxiety, facial pain
orofacial manifestations of psychiatric disorders, and behavioural problems in
children. Addictive disorders, psychological disorders in various dental
departments.
Should have understanding of stress in dentistry and knowledge of simple
counseling techniques.
Have some background knowledge of interpersonal, managerial and problem
solving skills which are an integral part of modern dental practice.
Have knowledge of social context of dental care.
 SKILLS
The student shall be able to:
Interview the patient and understand different methods of communication skills in
dentist - patient relationship.
Improve patients compliance behaviour.
Develop better interpersonal, managerial and problem solving skills.
Diagnose and manage minor psychological problems while treating dental patients.

INTEGRATION:
The training in Behavioural sciences shall prepare the students to deliver preventive,
promotive, curative and rehabilitative services to the care of the patients both in family and
community and refer advanced cases to specialized psychiatric hospitals.
Training should be integrated with all the departments of Dentistry, Medicine, Pharmacology,
Physiology and Biochemistry.
PSYCHOLOGY:
1) Definition & Need of Behaioural Science. Determinants of Behaviour. Hrs 1
Scope of Behavioural Science.
Sensory process & perception perceptual process - clinical applications.
Attention - Definition - factors that determine attention. Clinical application.
Memory - Memory process - Types of memory, Forgetting:
Methods to improve memory, Clinical assessment of memory & clinical applications.
Definition - Laws of learning
Type of learning. Classical conditioning, operant conditioning, cognitive learning, Insight
learning, social learning, observational learning, principles of learning - Clinical
application.
Intelligence - Definition: Nature of intelligence stability of intelligence
Determinants of intelligence, clinical application
Thinking - Definition: Types of thinking, delusions, problem solving 8)
Motivation - Definition: Motive, drive, needs classification of motives
Emotions - Definition differentiation from feelings - Role of hypothalamus, Cerebral cortex,
adrenal glands ANS. Theories of emotion, Types of emotions.
Personality. Assessment of personality: Questionaries, personality inventory, rating
scales, Interview projective techniques - Rorshach ink blot test, RAT, CAT
 SOCIOLOGY:
Social class, social groups - family, types of family, types of marriages, communities and
Nations and institutions.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
General psychology - S. K. Mangal
General psychology - Hans Raj, Bhatia
General psychology - Munn
Behavioural Sciences in Medical practice - Manju Mehta
Sciences basic to psychiatry - Basanth Puri & Peter J Tyrer

ETHICS (20 hrs. of instruction)

Introduction:
There is a definite shift now from the traditional patient and doctor relationship and delivery of
dental care. With the advances in science and technology and the increasing needs of the
patient, their families and community, there is a concern for the health of the community as a
whole. There is a shift to greater accountability to the society. Dental specialists like the other
health professionals are confronted with many ethical problems. It is therefore absolutely
necessary for each and every one in the healthcare delivery to prepare themselves to deal
with these problems. To accomplish this and develop human values Council desires that all
the trainees undergo ethical sensitization by lectures or discussion on ethical issues,
discussion of cases with an important ethical component.
Course content:
Introduction to ethics -
what is ethics?
What are values and norms?
How to form a value system in ones personal and professional life?
Hippocratic oath.
Declaration of Helsinki, WHO declaration of Geneva, International code of ethics,
DCI code of ethics.
Ethics of the individual -
The patient as a person
Right to be respected
Truth and confidentiality
Autonomy of decision
Doctor Patient relationship
Profession Ethics -
Code of conduct
Contract and confidentiality
Charging of fees, fee splitting
Prescription of drugs
Over - investigating the patient
Malpractice and
negligence Research Ethics -
Animal and experimental research / humanness
Human experimentation
Human volunteer research - informed consent
Drug trials
Ethical workshop of cases
Gathering all scientific
factors Gathering all value
Identifying areas of value - conflict, setting of
priorities Working our criteria towards decisions
Recommended Reading:
Medical Ethics, Francis C.M., I Ed. 1993, Jaypee Brothers, New Delhi p. 189
Maj Gen (Retd.) P. N. AWASTHI, Secy.

Following name has recommended by Board of Studies & Faculty of Dentistry

1. Oral & Maxillofacial Pathology - 2nd edition, 2004 by Neville, Damm, Allen, Bonequot ,
Publication Elsevier
2. Oral Medicine & Radiology : Oral Radiology - White and Pharogh
3. Essentials of Medical Microbiology & Dental Students - 4th edition Bhatia R. B. &
Ichhpujani R.L.
 SYLLABUS OF PART – I

SUBJECT: CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY AND ENDODONTICS

ANATOMY

1. Gross anatomy of the face:

a. Muscles of the face and neck including muscles of mastication and deglutition, muscles of facial expression
and Facial spaces. EMBRYOLOGY: Development of face, paranasal sinuses and the associated structures and
their anomalies.

b. Functional anatomy of mastication, deglutition and speech

c. Anatomy of Mandible and maxilla:

2. General and histological structure of bones.

3. TMJ anatomy and function

4. Oral Cavity:

4 a. Vestibule and oral cavity proper

4b. Tongue : development, anatomy, innervations, blood supply and histology

4c. Palate –: development, anatomy, innervations, blood supply and histology

5. Anatomy of Nasal Cavity, Nasal septum ,Lateral wall of nasal cavity and Paranasal air sinuses

6. Saliva and Salivary glands :

6a. Anatomic considerations. Salivary glands – structure, function, clinical considerations

6b. Saliva composition and applied aspects.

7. Triangles of the neck with special reference to Carotid, Digastric triangles and midline structures.

8.Arterial and venous drainage of head and neck

9. Classification of cranial nerves and autonomic nervous system of head and neck with special

emphasis on Facial and Trigeminal Nerves

10. General Anatomy : Jugular system : Internal jugular External jugular

11. TEETH
  Detailed anatomy of deciduous and permanent teeth, general consideration in applied anatomy of
permanent dentition, form, function, developmental anomalies.

 Internal anatomy of permanent teeth and its significance

 Enamel – development and composition, physical characteristics, chemical properties, histological

features. Age changes and clinical considerations

 Dentin – development, physical and chemical properties, structure type of dentin, innervations,
age and functional changes.

 Pulp – development, histological structures, innervations, functions, regressive changes, clinical

considerations.

 Cementum – composition, cementogenesis, structure, function, clinical consideration. •

 Periodontal ligament – development, structure, function and clinical consideration

 12. Development and Eruption of teeth.

13.Contacts, contours and Occlusion

14 HISTOLOGY: 1. Study of epithelium of oral cavity and the respiratory tract 2. Connective tissue 3. Muscular
tissue 4. Nervous tissue 5. Blood vessels 6. Cartilage 7. Bone and tooth 72 8. Tongue 9. Salivary
glands 10. Tonsil, thymus, lymph nodes

II. Physiology

General Physiology: Cell , Body Fluid Compartments - Classification - Composition and Cellular
transport , Resting Membrane Potential and action potential

Muscle Nerve Physiology:

 Structure of a neuron and properties of nerve fibres

 Structure of muscle fibres and properties of muscle fibres

 Neuromuscular transmission

 Mechanism of muscle contraction

  Taste and Taste buds and pathways of taste sensation.

Blood:

 Composition, volume, functions, blood groups, RBC and Haemoglobin

 WBC – Structure and functions

 Platelets – functions and applied aspects

 Plasma proteins

 Blood Coagulation with applied aspects

 Blood transfusion, circulation, heart, pulse, blood pressure, shock.

 Lymph and applied aspects

Respiratory System:

 Respiration and respiration control

 Anoxia, hypoxia, asphyxia, artificial respiration .Hypoxia, effects of increased barometric pressure and
decreased barometric pressure

Cardio-Vascular System:

 Cardiac Cycle and pulse.

 Regulation of heart rate/ Stroke volume / cardiac output / blood flow and Electrocardiogram

 Regulation of blood pressure.

 Shock, hypertension, cardiac failure.

Excretory System:

 Renal function tests and their significance.

Gastro Intestinal System

 Composition, functions and regulation of: Saliva and Gastric juice

  Mastication and deglutition

Endocrine System:

 Hormones – classification and mechanism of action.

 General principles of endocrine activity and disorders relating to pituitary, thyroid, parathyroid,
adrenals including pregnancy and lactation.

 Thyroid and Parathyroid hormones

 Pancreatic hormones

 Adrenal hormones

Central Nervous System:

 Ascending tract with special references to pain pathway

 SPECIAL SENSES: Taste, Gustation and Olfaction

Applied Physiology:

 Mastication, deglutition, digestion and assimilation, fluid and electrolyte balance.

 Physiology of saliva – composition, function, clinical significance

 Clinical significance of vitamins, diet and nutrition – balanced diet.

 Physiology of pain, sympathetic and Para sympathetic nervous system, pain pathways, physiology of
pulpal pain, Odontogenic and non Odontogenic pain, pain disorders – typical and atypical.

 Biochemistry:

 Osmotic pressure, Electrolyte dissociation, Oxidation and Reduction.

 Carbohydrates – Disaccharides specifically maltose, lactose, sucrose - Digestion of starch/absorption

of glucose - Metabolism of glucose, specifically glycolysis, TCA cycle, gluconeogenesis - Blood
sugar regulation - Glycogen storage regulation - Glycogen storage diseases - Galactosemia and
fructosemia
 Lipids - Fatty acids- Essential/non essential - Metabolism of fatty acids- oxidation, ketone body
formation, utilization ketosis - Outline of cholesterol metabolism- synthesis and products formed from
cholesterol
  Protein - Amino acids- essential/non essential, complete/ incomplete proteins -
Transamination/ Deamination
 Vitamins and their metabolic role- specifically vitamin A, Vitamin C, Vitamin D, Thiamin, Riboflavin,
Niacin, Pyridoxine

Pathology:
1. Inflammation and Repair

General Principles of Inflammation and Repair

 Repair and regeneration, necrosis and gangrene

 Role of complement system in acute inflammation

 Role of arachidonic acid and its metabolites in acute inflammation

 Growth factors in acute inflammation

 Role of molecular events in cell growth and intercellular signaling cell surface receptors

 Role of NSAIDS in inflammation

 Cellular changes in radiation injury and its manifestations

2. Hemostasis:

 Role of Endothelium in thrombo-genesis

 Arterial and venous thrombi , Disseminated Intravascular Coagulation

 Shock: •Pathogenesis of hemorrhagic, neurogenic, septic, cardiogenic shock, circulatory

disturbances, ischemic hyperemia, venous congestion, oedema, infarction.

3.Wound Healing:

4.Hypersensitivity:

• Anaphylaxis • Type II Hypersensitivity • Type III Hypersensitivity

• Cell mediated Reaction and its clinical importance • Systemic Lupus Erythmatosis

5.Neoplasia:

 Carcinogenesis & Carcinogens – Chemical, Viral and Microbial

 Grading and Staging of Cancer,

 Characteristics of benign and malignant tumors

6. Aids Management of Immune deficiency patients requiring surgical procedures

7. Ghons complex, post primary pulmonary tuberculosis – pathology and pathogenesis
8. Circulatory disturbances – ischemia, hyperemia, edema, thrombosis, embolism, infarction,
allergy and hypersensitivity reaction.

9. Developmental disturbances of Teeth,

10. Dental Caries, Regressive changes of teeth, pulp, periapical pathology, pulp reaction to dental caries and dental
procedures.
11. Bacterial, viral, mycotic infections of the oral cavity.
12. Oral manifestations of Systemic diseases.

Microbiology:
 General Bacteriology- Identification of bacteria, Culture media and culturing techniques

 Oral Microbial flora in health and disease

 Pathways of pulpal infection, oral flora and micro organisms associated with endodontic diseases,
pathogenesis, host defence, bacterial virulence factors, healing, theory of focal infections,

 Microbes in relevance to dentistry – streptococci, staphylococci, lactobacilli, cornye bacterium,

actinomycetes, clostridium, neisseria, vibrio, bacteroids, fusobacteria, spirochetes, mycobacterium,
virus and fungi.

 Cross infection, infection control, infection control procedure, sterilization and disinfection.

 Immunology – antigen antibody reaction, allergy, hypersensitivity and anaphylaxis, auto immunity,
grafts, viral hepatitis, HIV infections and aids.

 Identification and isolation of microorganisms from infected root canals.

 Virology: Herpes, Hepatitis and HIV viruses

 Mycology: Candidiasis

Pharmacology:

1. Definition of terminologies used

2. Dosage and routes of administration of drugs

3. Action and fate of drugs in the body

4. Drugs acting on the CNS

5. Drug reactions and Interactions

6. General and local anesthetics:

 Local anesthesia – Ideal properties, agents and chemistry, pharmacological actions, fate and
metabolism of anesthetic, techniques and complications.

 General anesthesia – pre medications, neuro muscular blocking agents, induction agents, inhalation
anesthesia, and agents used, assessment of anesthetic problems in medically compromised patients.

 Anesthetic emergencies

7. Antihistamines, corticosteroids,

8. hypnotics, antiepileptics, and & tranquilizers

9. Chemotherapeutics and antibiotics

10. Analgesics , anti-inflammatory and antipyretics drugs.

11. Antiseptics, sialogogues, and anti – sialogogues

12. Haematinics

13. Anti – diabetic therapy

14. Vitamins – A B Complex, C, D, E, K

14. Steroids

15. Hemostasis, and haemostatic agents, anticoagulants

16. Management of medically compromised patients including medical emergencies in the dental chair

17. Drug therapy of Emergencies; Seizures, Anaphylaxis, Shock and Diabetic ketoacidosis

Research Methodology and Biostatistics:

 Essential features of a protocol for research in humans

 Experimental and non-experimental study designs

 Ethical considerations of research

Biostatistics:

 Basic concepts, Sampling, Health information systems – collection, compilation, presentation of

data.

 Elementary statistical methods – presentation of statistical data, Statistical averages – measures of

central tendency, measures of dispersion, Normal distribution.

 Tests of significance – parametric and non – parametric tests (Fisher extract test, Sign test, Median test,
Mann Whitney test, Krusical Wallis one way analysis, Friedmann two way analysis, Regression analysis),
Correlation and regression

Applied Dental Materials:

 Physical and mechanical properties of dental materials.

 Impression materials

 Restorative materials,

 Composite resins and recent advances in composite resins,

 Principles of adhesion, bonding agents and recent developments

 Tarnish and corrosion,

 Dental amalgam,

 Dental Casting alloys,

 Inlay wax, Die materials and Investment materials

 Casting procedures and casting defects,

 Dental cements for restoration and pulp protection (luting, liners, bases) cavity varnishes.

 Dental ceramics-recent advances,

 Finishing and polishing materials.

Biocompatibility of Dental Materials and Methods of testing biocompatibility of materials used.

 Soldering and Welding.

 Dental cements for restoration and pulp protection (luting, liners, bases) cavity varnishes.
 Dental ceramics-recent advances,

 Finishing and polishing materials.

 Biocompatibility of Dental Materials and Methods of testing biocompatibility of materials used.

 Soldering and Welding

 CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY AND ENDODONTICS
Paper-I: Conservative Dentistry

1. Introduction to Operative Dentistry

2. Examination, diagnosis and treatment plan
3. Occlusion as related to conservative dentistry, contact, contour, its significance. Separation of
teeth, matrices, used in conservative dentistry.
4. Dental caries- epidemiology, recent concept of etiological factors, pathophysiology,
histopathology, diagnosis, caries activity tests, and Caries Vaccine, prevention of dental
caries and management – recent methods.
5. Biomaterials-Review of material Science and BioMechanics
6. Fundamental concepts of Enamel and Dentin adhesion
7. Fundamentals in Tooth preparation
8. Hand and rotary cutting instruments, development of rotary equipment, speed ranges,
hazards.
9. Dental burs and other modalities of tooth reparation- recent developments (air brasions,
lasers etc.)
10. Infection control procedures in conservative dentistry, isolation equipments etc.
11. Direct concepts in tooth preparation and Restorations with amalgam - restorative techniques,
failures and management.
12. Direct concepts in tooth preparation and Restorations with composite, GIC - restorative
techniques, failures and management
13. Biologic response of pulp to various restorative materials and operative procedures.
14. Direct and indirect composite restorations.
15. Indirect tooth colored restorations- ceramic, inlays and onlays, veneers, crowns, recent
advances in fabrication
16. Gingival tissue management.
17. Impression procedures used for indirect restorations.
18. Cast metal restorations, indications, contraindications, tooth preparation for class II inlay, onlay,
full crown restorations. Restorative techniques, direct and indirect methods of fabrication including
materials used for fabrication like inlay wax, investment materials and casting.
19. Direct gold restorations.
20. Restoration of Badly broken tooth.
21. Recent advances in restorative materials.
22. Esthetics including smile design
23. Management of non-carious lesions.
24. Management of discolored tooth
25. Minimal intervention dentistry.
26. Hypersensitivity-theories, causes and management.
27. Lasers in Conservative Dentistry.

F:\Uploading_2308021\02- Conservetive Dentistry Part II syllabus.docx 1

 28. CAD-CAM in restorative dentistry.
29. Digital imaging and its applications in restorative dentistry.
30. Clinical Photography.
31. 3D Printing in Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics

Paper-II: Endodontics

1. Anatomy and Morphology of tooth and their root canal systems

2. Structure and function of Pulp Dentin Complex
3. Microbial and Non Microbial etiology of Endodontic Diseases
4. Rationale of endodontics.

5. Dental innervations and pain of pulpal origin

6. Pulp and periapical pathology.

7. Pathobiology of periapex.

8. Pulp and periapical pathology.

9. Pathobiology of periapex.
10. Diagnostic procedures – Orofacial dental pain emergencies: endodontic diagnosis and
management, recent advances used for diagnosis.
11. Imaging devices and techniques: Analog Radiology, Digital Radiology, MRI and
Ultrasound, CBCT in endodontic practice.
12. Imaging Interpretation
13. Case selection and treatment planning.
14. Endodontic microbiology.
15. Infection control procedures used in Endodontics (aseptic techniques such as rubber
dam, sterilization of instruments etc.)
16. Preparation for treatment
17. Management of pain , fear and anxiety in Endodontic patients
18. Vital Pulp therapies
19. Access cavity preparation – objectives and principles
20. Endodontic instruments and instrumentation – recent developments, detailed
description of hand, rotary, sonic, ultra sonic etc.
21. Working length determination of root canal system with recent developments.
22. cleaning and shaping of root canal system and recent developments in techniques of
canal preparation.
23. Root canal irrigants and latest developments
24. Intra canal medicaments and recent advancements
25. Obturation of root canal system - materials, techniques and recent advances.

F:\Uploading_2308021\02- Conservetive Dentistry Part II syllabus.docx 2

 26. Endodontic therapy in teeth with anatomical variations
27. Endodontic emergencies and management
28. Traumatic injuries and management – endodontic treatment for young permanent
teeth.
29. Endoperio interrelationship and management.
30. Multidisciplinary approach to endodontic situations.
31. Procedural errors in endodontics and their management.
32. Endodontic failures and retreatment.
33. Management of medically complex patients
34. Pharmacology in Endodontics including Drug interactions and laboratory tests
35. Resorptions and its management.
36. Management of teeth of Immature apex
37. Rhinosinusitis and Endodontic disease
38. Non Odontogenic toothache and chronic head and neck pain
39. Endodontic and Microsurgeries, recent developments in technique and devices and
wound healing
40. Magnification in endodontics(Dental Loupes and Microscopes) .
41. Single visit endodontics, current concepts and controversies.
42. Outcomes and achieving success in long term endodontic therapy
43. Contemporary restoration of Endodontically treated teeth
44. Lasers in Endodontics.
45. Endodontic therapy in Paediatric
46. Endodontic therapy in Geriatric patients
47. Interrelationships of Endodontics and Orthodontics in treatment planning
48. Tooth discolourations and its Management
49. Regenerative Endodontics
50. Recent Advancements in endodontics- Minimally Invasive Endodontics, Guided
Endodontics etc..

F:\Uploading_2308021\02- Conservetive Dentistry Part II syllabus.docx 3

 Scheme of Examination
Practical / Clinical Examination: 200 Marks
The duration of Clinical and Viva Voce examination will be 2 days for a batch of four students. If the
number of candidates exceeds 4, the programme can be extended to 3rd day.

Day 1
Clinical Exercise I – Random case discussion – (2) - 10+10 Marks
(Diagnosis, Treatment, Planning & Discussion)
Cast core preparation
(i) Tooth Preparation - 20 marks
(ii) Direct Wax Pattern - 10 marks
(iii) Casting - 10 marks
(iv) Cementation - 05 marks
(v) Retraction & Elastomeric Impression - 05 marks

Clinical Exercise II - 30 Marks

Inlay Exercise) 20 marks
(i) Tooth preparation for Class II Inlay
(Gold or Esthetic)
(ii) Fabrication of Indirect Pattern -10 marks

Day 2
Clinical Exercise III - 100 Marks

(Molar Endodontics)
(i) Local Anaesthesia and Rubber - 20 marks
Dam application

(ii) Access Cavity - 20 marks

(iii) Working length determination - 20 marks

(iv) Canal Preparation - 20 marks

(v) Master cone selection - 20 marks

C. Viva Voce: 100 Marks

i. Viva-Voce examination: 80 marks

All examiners will conduct viva-voce conjointly on candidate’s comprehension, analytical approach,
expression, interpretation of data and communication skills. It includes all components of course
contents. It includes presentation and discussion on dissertation also.

ii. Pedagogy Exercise: 20 marks

A topic be given to each candidate in the beginning of clinical examination. He/she is asked to make a
presentation on the topic for 8-10 minutes

F:\Uploading_2308021\02- Conservetive Dentistry Part II syllabus.docx 4

F:\Uploading_2308021\02- Conservetive Dentistry Part II syllabus.docx 5
 SYLLABUS OF PART – I

SUBJECT - ORAL AND MAXILLOFACIAL SURGERY

Applied Basic Sciences: Applied Anatomy, Physiology, Biochemistry, General and oral Pathology and
Microbiology and Pharmacology

Applied Anatomy:

 Surgical anatomy of the scalp, temple and face

 Anatomy of the triangles of neck and deep structures of the neck
 Cranial and facial bones and its surrounding soft tissues with its applied aspects in maxillofacial
injuries.
 Muscles of head and neck
 Arterial supply, venous drainage and lymphatics of head and neck
 Congenital abnormalities of head and neck
 Surgical anatomy of the cranial nerves
 Anatomy of the tongue and it’s applied aspects
 Surgical anatomy of the temporal and infra-temporal regions
 Anatomy and its applied aspects of salivary glands, pharynx, thyroid and parathyroid gland,
larynx, trachea oesophagus
 Tooth eruption, morphology, and occlusion
 Surgical anatomy of the nose.
 The structure and function of the brain including surgical anatomy of intra cranial venous sinuses.
 Autonomous nervous system of head and neck
 Functional anatomy of mastication, deglutition, speech, respiration and circulation
 Development of face, Paranasal sinuses and associated structures and their anomalies
 TMJ: surgical anatomy and function

Physiology:

Nervous System

 Physiology of nerve conduction, pain pathway, sympathetic and parasympathetic nervous system,
hypothalamus and mechanism of controlling body temperature
Blood
 Composition
 Hemostasis, various blood dyscrasia and management of patients with the same
 Hemorrhage and its control
 Capillary and lymphatic circulation
 Blood grouping, transfusing procedures.

Digestive System
 Saliva – composition and functions of saliva
 Mastication deglutition, digestion, assimilation
 Urine formation, normal and abnormal constituents

Respiration
 Control of ventilation, anoxia, asphyxia, artificial respiration
 Hypoxia – types and management

Cardio Vascular System

 Cardiac cycle
 Shock
 Heart sounds
 Blood pressure
 Hypertension:

Endocrinology
 General endocrinal activity and disorder relating to thyroid gland,
 Parathyroid gland, adrenal gland, pituitary gland, pancreas and gonads:
 Metabolism of calcium

Nutrition
 General principles of a balanced diet, effect of dietary deficiency, protein energy malnutrition,
Kwashiorkor, Marasmus.
 Fluid and Electrolytic balance in maintaining hemostasis and significance in minor and major
surgical procedures.

Biochemistry:

General principles governing the various biological activities of the body, such as osmotic pressure,
electrolytes, dissociation, oxidation, reduction etc
General composition, of the body
Intermediary metabolism
Carbohydrates, proteins
Carbohydrates, proteins, lipids, and their metabolism nucleoproteins, nucleic, acid and nucleotides and
their metabolism
Enzymes, vitamins and minerals
Hormones
Body and other fluids
Metabolism of inorganic elements
Detoxification in the body
Antimetabolites

Pathology:

Inflammation
 Repair and regeneration, necrosis and gangrene
 Role of component system in acute inflammation,
 Role of arachidonic acid its metabolites in acute inflammation,
 Growth factors in acute inflammation
 Role of molecular events in cell growth and intercellular signaling cell surface receptors
 Role of NSAIDs in radiation injury and its manifestation:
 Cellular changes in radiation injury and its manifestation:

Hemostasis

 Role of endothelium in thrombogenesis,

 Arterial and venous thrombi,
 Disseminated Intravascular coagulation

Shock:

 Pathogenesis of hemorrhagic, neurogenic, septic, cardiogenic shock

 Circulatory disturbances, ischemia hyperemia , venous congestion, edema, infarction

Chromosomal Abnormalities:

 Marfans Syndrome, Ehler’s Danlos Syndrome, Fragile X-Syndrome

Hypersensitivity:

 Anaphylaxis, type 2 hypersensitivity, type 3 hyper sensitivity and cell mediated reaction and its
clinical importance, systemic lupus erythematosus.
  Infection and infective granulomas

Neoplasia:

 Classification of tumors.
 Carcinogenesis and carcinogen – chemical, viral and microbial
 Grading and staging of cancers, tumor Angiogenesis, Paraneoplastic syndrome, spread of tumors
 Characteristics of benign and malignant tumors

Others:

 Sex linked agammaglobulinemia.

 AIDS
 Management of immun deficiency patients, requiring surgical procedures
 De George Syndrome
 Ghons complex, post primary pulmonary tuberculosis – pathology and pathogenesis.

Oral Pathology:

 Developmental disturbances of oral and Para oral structures

 Regressive changes of teeth
 Bacterial, viral and mycotic infection of oral cavity
 Dental caries, diseases of pulp and periapical tissues
 Physical and chemical injuries of the oral cavity
 Oral manifestations of metabolic and endocrinal disturbances
 Diseases of jawbones and TMJ
 Diseases of blood forming organs in relation to oral cavity
 Cysts of the oral cavity
 Salivary gland diseases
 Role of laboratory investigations in oral surgery

Microbiology:

 Immunity
 Knowledge of organisms commonly associated with disease of oral cavity.
 Morphology cultural characteristics of strepto, staphylo, pneumo, gono, meningo, clostridium
group of organism, spirochetes, organisms of TB, leprosy, diphtheria, actinomycosis and
monsiliasis
 Hepatitis B and its prophylaxis
 Culture and sensitivity test
  Laboratory determinations
 Blood groups, blood matching, RBC and WBC count
 Bleeding and clotting time etc, smears and cultures,
 Urine analysis and cultures.

Applied Pharmacology and Therapeutics:

 Definition of terminologies used

 Dosage and made of administration of drugs.
 Action and fate of drugs in the body
 Drug addiction, tolerance and hypersensitivity reactions.
 Drugs acting on the CNS
 General and local anesthetics, hypnotics, analeptics, and tranquilizers.
 Chemo therapeutics and antibiotic drugs.
 Analgesics and antipyretics
 Antitubercular and antisyphilitic drugs.
 Antiseptics, Sialogogues and antisialogogues
 Haematinics
 Antidiabetics
 Vitamins A,B-complex C,D,E,K
 ORAL & MAXILLOFACIAL SURGERY

OBJECTIVES:

The training program in Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery is structured to achieve

the following five objectives-

 Knowledge
 Skills
 Attitude
 Communicative skills and ability
 Research

Knowledge:

 To have acquired adequate knowledge and understanding of the etiology,

pathophysiology and diagnosis, treatment planning of various common oral
and Maxillofacial surgical problems both minor and major in nature
 To have understood the general surgical principles like pre and post surgical
management, particularly evaluation, post surgical care, fluid and electrolyte
management, blood transfusion and post surgical pain management.
 Understanding of basic sciences relevant to practice of oral and
maxillofacial surgery
 Able to identify social, cultural, economic, genetic and environmental factors
and their relevance to disease process management in the oral and
Maxillofacial region.
 Essential knowledge of personal hygiene and infection control, prevention of
cross infection and safe disposal of hospital waste keeping in view the high
prevalence of hepatitis and HIV.

Skills:

 To obtain proper clinical history, methodical examination of the patient,

perform essential diagnostic procedures and order relevant laboratory tests
and interpret them and to arrive at a reasonable diagnosis about the surgical
condition.
 To perform with competence minor oral surgical procedures and common
maxillofacial surgery. To treat both surgically and medically the problems of
the oral and Maxillofacial and the related area.
 Capable of providing care for maxillofacial surgery patients.

Attitude:

 Develop attitude to adopt ethical principles in all aspect of surgical practice,

professional honesty and integrity are to be fostered. Surgical care is to be
delivered irrespective of the social status, caste, creed or religion of the
patient.
 Willing to share the knowledge and clinical experience with professional
colleagues.
 Willing to adopt new techniques of surgical management developed from
time to time based on scientific research which are in the best interest of the
patient
 Respect patient right and privileges, including patients right to information
and right to seek a second opinion.
 Develop attitude to seek opinion from an allied medical and dental specialists
as and when required.

Communication Skills:
 Develop adequate communication skills particularly with the patients giving
them the various options available to manage a particular surgical problem
and obtain a true informed consent from them for the most appropriate
treatment available at that point of time
 Develop the ability to communicate with professional colleagues.
 Develop ability to teach undergraduates.
COURSE CONTENT:

The speciality of Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery deals with the diagnosis and
management of the diseases of stomatognathic system, jaw bones, cranio-
maxillofacial region, salivary glands and temporomandibular joints etc. Within
this framework it also supports many vital organs like eye, oropharynx,
nasopharynx and major blood vessels and nerves. The traumatic injuries of
maxillofacial skeleton are independently managed by Oral & Maxillofacial
Surgeons. Whenever there are orbital injuries the ophthalmologists are trained
only to tackle injuries of the eye ball (globe) but if there are associated injuries of
the orbital skeleton, the Maxillofacial Surgeon is involved in its re-construction.
Similarly, nasal bone fracture may be managed by ENT surgeons. Most of the
time nasal bone fractures are associated with fractures of the maxilla, mandible
and zygomatic bones which are being managed by Oral & Maxillofacial
Surgeons. The maxillofacial facial injuries at times are associated with head
injuries also. The Oral & maxillofacial Surgeon is involved in the management of
cleft lip & cleft palate, orthognathic surgery, micro vascular surgery,
reconstructive and oncological surgical procedures of maxillofacial region. The
speciality of Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery is a multi disciplinary speciality and
needs close working in co-ordination with Neurosurgeons, Oncosurgeons,
Opthalmologists, ENT Surgeons and Plastic Surgeons. The Oral & Maxillofacial
Surgeons, Ophthalmologist, ENT Surgeons, Plastic Surgeons, Neuro-Surgeons
and Oncologists complement each other by performing Surgical Procedures with
their respective expertise and knowledge thereby benefiting the patients and
students of the respective specialities.

The program outline addresses both the knowledge needed in Oral and
Maxillofacial Surgery and allied medical specialties in its scope. A minimum of
three years of formal training through a graded system of education as specified
will equip the trainee with skill and knowledge at its completion to be able to
practice basic oral and Maxillofacial surgery competently and have the ability to
intelligently pursue further apprenticeship towards advanced Maxillofacial
surgery.

The topics are considered as under:-

A) Applied Basic sciences
B) Oral and Maxillofacial surgery
C) Allied specialties

A) Applied Basic Sciences:

Applied Anatomy, Physiology, Biochemistry, General and Oral
Pathology and Microbiology, Pharmacology and Knowledge in
Basic Statistics.

Applied Anatomy:
1. Surgical anatomy of the scalp, temple and face
2. Anatomy of the triangles of neck and deep structures of the neck
3. Cranial and facial bones and its surrounding soft tissues with its
applied aspects in maxillofacial injuries.
4. Muscles of head and neck; chest , lower and upper extremities (in
consideration to grafts/flaps)
5. Arterial supply, venous drainage and lymphatics of head and neck
6. Congenital abnormalities of the head and neck
7. Surgical anatomy of the cranial nerves
8. Anatomy of the tongue and its applied aspects
9. Surgical anatomy of the temporal and infratemporal regions
10. Anatomy and its applied aspects of salivary glands, pharynx, thyroid
and parathyroid gland, larynx, trachea, esophagus
11. Tooth eruption, morphology, and occlusion.
12. Surgical anatomy of the nose.
13. The structure and function of the brain including surgical anatomy
of intra cranial venous sinuses.
14. Autonomous nervous system of head and neck
15. Functional anatomy of mastication, deglutition, speech, respiration and
circulation
16. Development of face, paranasal sinuses and associated
structures and their anomalies
17. TMJ: surgical anatomy and function

Physiology:

1. Nervous system
 Physiology of nerve conduction, pain pathway, sympathetic and
parasympathetic nervous system, hypothalamus and mechanism of
controlling body temperature
2. Blood
 Composition
 Haemostasis, various blood dyscrasias and management of
patients with the same
 Hemorrhage and its control
 Capillary and lymphatic circulation.
 Blood grouping, transfusing procedures.
3. Digestive system
 Saliva - composition and functions of saliva
 Mastication, deglutition, digestion, assimilation
 Urine formation, normal and abnormal constituents
4. Respiration
 Control of ventilation, anoxia, asphyxia, artificial respiration
 Hypoxia – types and management
5. CardioVascular System
 Cardiac cycle,
 Shock
 Heart sounds,
 Blood pressure,
 Hypertension:
6. Endocrinology
 General endocrinal activity and disorder relating to thyroid gland,
 Parathyroid gland, adrenal gland, pituitary gland, pancreas and
gonads:
  Metabolism of calcium

7. Nutrition
 General principles of a balanced diet, effect of dietary deficiency,
protein energy malnutrition, Kwashiorkor, Marasmus.
 Fluid and Electrolytic balance in maintaining haemostasis and
significance in minor and major surgical procedures.
Biochemistry:

 General principles governing the various biological activities of the

body, such as osmotic pressure, electrolytes, dissociation, oxidation,
reduction etc.
 General composition of the body
 Intermediary metabolism
 Carbohydrates, proteins, lipids, and their metabolism
 Nucleoproteins, nucleic acid and nucleotides and their metabolism
 Enzymes, vitamins and minerals
 Hormones
 Body and other fluids.
 Metabolism of inorganic elements.
 Detoxification in the body.
 Antimetabolites.

Pathology:

1. Inflammation –
 Repair and regeneration, necrosis and gangrene
 Role of component system in acute inflammation,
 Role of arachidonic acid and its metabolites in acute inflammation,
 Growth factors in acute inflammation
 Role of molecular events in cell growth and intercellular
signaling cell surface receptors
 Role of NSAIDs in inflammation,
 Cellular changes in radiation injury and its manifestation:
2. Haemostasis
 Role of endothelium in thrombogenesis,
 Arterial and venous thrombi,
 Disseminated Intravascular coagulation
3. Shock:
 Pathogenesis of hemorrhagic, neurogenic, septic, cardiogenic
shock
 Circulatory disturbances, ischemia, hyperemia, venous
congestion, edema, infarction
4. Chromosomal abnormalities:
 Marfans Syndrome, Ehler’s Danlos Syndrome, Fragile X-
Syndrome
5. Hypersensitivity:
 Anaphylaxis, type 2 hypersensitivity, type 3 hyper sensitivity and cell
mediated reaction and its clinical importance, systemic lupus
erythematosus.
  Infection and infective granulomas.
6. Neoplasia:
 Classification of tumors.
 Carcinogenesis and carcinogens- chemical, viral and microbial
 Grading and staging of cancers, tumor Angiogenesis,
Paraneoplastic syndrome, spread of tumors
 Characteristics of benign and malignant tumors
7. Others:
 Sex linked agammaglobulinemia.
 AIDS
 Management of immuno deficiency patients requiring surgical
procedures
 De George Syndrome
 Ghons complex, post primary pulmonary tuberculosis –
pathology and pathogenesis.

Oral Pathology:

 Developmental disturbances of oral and Para oral structures

 Regressive changes of teeth.
 Bacterial, viral and mycotic infections of oral cavity
 Dental caries,, diseases of pulp and periapical tissues
 Physical and chemical injuries of the oral cavity
 Oral manifestations of metabolic and endocrinal disturbances
 Diseases of jawbones and TMJ
 Diseases of blood and blood forming organs in relation to oral
cavity
 Cysts of the oral cavity
 Salivary gland diseases
 Role of laboratory investigations in oral surgery

Microbiology:

 Immunity
 Knowledge of organisms commonly associated with diseases of
oral cavity.
 Morphology cultural characteristics of strepto, staphylo, pneumo,
gono, meningo, clostridium group of organisms, spirochetes,
organisms of TB, leprosy, diphtheria, actinomycosis and moniliasis
 Hepatitis B and its prophylaxis
 Culture and sensitivity test
 Laboratory determinations
 Blood groups, blood matching, RBC and WBC count
 Bleeding and clotting time etc, smears and cultures,
 Urine analysis and cultures.

Applied Pharmacology and Therapeutics:

1. Definition of terminologies used

2. Dosage and mode of administration of drugs.
3. Action and fate of drugs in the body
4. Drug addiction, tolerance and hypersensitivity reactions.
5. Drugs acting on the CNS
6. General and local anesthetics, hypnotics, analeptics, and
tranquilizers.
 7. Chemo therapeutics and antibiotics
8. Analgesics and antipyretics
9. Antitubercular and antisyphilitic drugs.
10. Antiseptics, sialogogues and antisialogogues
11. Haematinics
12. Antidiabetics
13. Vitamins A, B-complex, C, D, E, K

B) Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery:

 Evolution of Maxillofacial surgery.

 Diagnosis, history taking, clinical examination, investigations.
 Informed consent/medico-legal issues.
 Concept of essential drugs and rational use of drugs.
 Communication skills with patients- understanding, clarity in
communication, compassionate explanations and giving emotional
support at the time of suffering and bereavement
 Principles of surgical audit – understanding the audit of process and
outcome. Methods adopted for the same. Basic statistics.
 Principles of evidence based surgery- understanding journal based
literature study; the value of textbook, reference book articles, value
of review articles; original articles and their critical assessment,
understanding the value of retrospective, prospective, randomized
control and blinded studies, understanding the principles and the
meaning of various Bio-statistical tests applied in these studies.
 Principles of surgery- developing a surgical diagnosis, basic
necessities for surgery, aseptic technique, incisions, flap designs,
tissue handling, hemostasis, dead space management,
decontamination and debridement, suturing, edema control, patient
general health and nutrition.
 Medical emergencies – Prevention and management of altered
consciousness, hyper sensitivity reaction, chest discomfort,
respiratory difficulty.
 Pre operative workup – Concept of fitness for surgery; basic medical
work up; work up in special situation like diabetes, renal failure,
cardiac and respiratory illness; risk stratification
 Surgical sutures, drains
 Post operative care- concept of recovery room care, Airway
management, Assessment of Wakefulness, management of cardio
vascular instability in this period, Criteria for shifting to the ward, pain
management
 Wound management- Wound healing, factors influencing healing,
basic surgical techniques, Properties of suture materials, appropriate
use of sutures.
 Surgical Infections – Asepsis and antisepsis, Microbiological
principles, Rational use of antibiotics, special infections like
Synergistic Gangrene and Diabetic foot infection, Hepatitis and HIV
infection and cross infection.
 Airway obstruction/management – Anatomy of the airway, principles
of keeping the airway patent, mouth to mouth resuscitation,
Oropharyngeal airway, endotracheal intubation, Cricothyroidectomy,
Tracheostomy.
 Anesthesia – stages of Anesthesia, pharmacology of inhalation,
intravenous and regional anesthetics, muscle relaxants.
 Facial pain; Facial palsy and nerve injuries.
 Pain control – acute and chronic pain, cancer and non-cancer pain,
 patient controlled analgesia
 General patient management – competence in physical assessment
of patients of surgery, competence in evaluation of patients
presenting with acute injury, particularly to maxillofacial region.
Competence in the evaluation of management of patients for
Anesthesia
 Clinical oral surgery – all aspects of dento alveolar surgery
 Pre-prosthetic surgery – A wide range of surgical reconstructive
procedures involving their hard and soft tissues of the edentulous
jaws.
 Temporomandibular joint disorders – TMJ disorders and their
sequelae need expert evaluation, assessment and management. It is
preferable to be familiar with diagnostic and therapeutic arthroscopic
surgery procedures.
 Tissue grafting – Understanding of the biological mechanisms
involved in autogenous and heterogeneous tissue grafting.
 Reconstructive oral and maxillofacial surgery – hard tissue and soft
tissue reconstruction.
 Cyst and tumors of head and neck region and their management –
including principles of tumor surgery, giant cell lesion of jaw bones,
fibro osseous lesions of jaw.
 Neurological disorders of maxillofacial region-diagnosis and
management of Trigeminal Neuralgia, MPDS, Bells palsy, Frey’s
Syndrome, Nerve injuries
 Maxillofacial trauma – basic principles of treatment, primary care,
diagnosis and management of hard and soft tissue injuries,
Comprehensive management including polytrauma patients
 Assessment of trauma-multiple injuries patient, closed abdominal and
chest injuries, penetrating injuries, pelvic fractures, urological injuries,
vascular injuries.
 Orthognathic surgery – The trainee must be familiar with the
assessment and correcting of jaw deformities
 Laser surgery – The application of laser technology in the surgical
treatment of lesions amenable to such therapy
 Distraction osteogenesis in maxillofacial region.
 Cryosurgeries – Principles, the application of cryosurgery in the
surgical management of lesions amenable to such surgeries.
 Cleft lip and palate surgery- detailed knowledge of the development
of the face, head and neck, diagnosis and treatment planning,
Current concepts in the management of cleft lip and palate deformity,
knowledge of nasal endoscopy and other diagnostic techniques in the
evaluation of speech and hearing, concept of multi disciplinary team
management.
 Aesthetic facial surgery – detailed knowledge of structures of face &
neck including skin and underlying soft tissues, diagnosis and
treatment planning of deformities and conditions affecting facial skin,
underlying facial muscles, bone, eyelids, external ear etc., surgical
management of post acne scaring, face lift, blepharoplasty, otoplasty,
facial bone recountouring etc.
 Craniofacial surgery – basic knowledge of developmental anomalies
of face, head and neck, basics concept in the diagnosis and planning
of various head and neck anomalies including facial cleft,
craniosynostosis, syndromes, etc., Current concepts in the
management of craniofacial anomalies.
 Head and neck oncology – understanding of the principles of
management of head and neck oncology including various pre
 cancerous lesions, Experience in the surgical techniques of
reconstruction following ablative surgery.
 Micro vascular surgery.
 Implantology – principles, surgical procedures for insertion of various
types of implants.
 Maxillofacial radiology/ radio diagnosis
 Other diagnostic methods and imaging techniques

C) Allied Specialties:
 General medicine: General assessment of the patient including
children with special emphasis on cardiovascular diseases,
endocrinal, metabolic respiratory and renal diseases, Blood
dyscrasias
 General surgery: Principles of general surgery, exposure to common
general surgical procedures.
 Neuro – surgery: Evaluation of a patient with head injury, knowledge
& exposure of various Neuro – surgical procedures
 ENT/Ophthalmology: Examination of ear, nose, throat, exposure to
ENT surgical procedures, ophthalmic examination and evaluation,
exposure to ophthalmic surgical procedures.
 Orthopedic: basic principles of orthopedic surgery, bone diseases
and trauma as relevant to Maxillofacial surgery, interpretation of
radiographs, CT, MRI and ultrasound
 Anesthesiology: Evaluation of patients for GA technique, general
anesthetic drugs use and complications, management of
emergencies, various IV sedation techniques.
 Plastic Surgery- Basic Principles

TEACHING / LEARNING ACTIVITIES:

The post graduate is expected to complete the following at the end of :

I Year

Study ofapplied basic sciences including practicals (wherever necessary),

basic computer sciences, exodontia, seminars on basic topics, selection of
dissertation topic, library assignment topic, attending O.T, ward rounds,
Medical Record keeping, Pre-clinical exercises, preparation of synopsis and
its submission within the six months after admission to the university as per
calendar of events.

Rotation and postings in other departments:

General medicine - 1 month

General surgery - 1 month
Ophthalmology - 15 days
Neuro Surgery - 15 days
ENT - 15 days
Orthopedic - 15 days
Plastic Surgery - 15 days
Casualty - 15 days
Anesthesia (ICU) - 15 days
Radiology (CT, MRI, USG) - 15 days

II Year
 Minor oral surgery and higher surgical training
 Submission of library assignment
 Oncologyposting – 1 month

III Year

 Maxillofacial surgery
 Submission of dissertation to the university, six months before the final
examination.

It is desirable to enter general surgical skills and operative procedures that

are observed, assisted or performed in the log book in the format as given
below:-

Sl.No Procedure Category Number

1 Injection I.M. and I.V. PI 50, 20
2 Minor suturing and removal PI N,A
of sutures
3 Incision & drainage of an PI 10
abscess
4 Surgical extraction PI 15
5 Impacted teeth PI, A 30,20

6 Pre prosthetic surgery-

corrective procedures PI 10
ridge extension A 3
ridge reconstruction A 3
7 OAF closure PI, A 3,2
8 Cyst enuleation PI,A 5,5
9 Mandibular fractures PI,A 10,10
10 Peri-apical surgery PI,A 5
11 Infection management PI,A 3,3
12 Biopsy procedures PI, A 10, 3
13 Removal of salivary calculi A 3
14 Benign tumors A 3,3
15 mid face fractures PI,A 3,5
16 Implants PI,A 5,5
17 Tracheotomy A 2
18 Skin grafts PI,A 2,2
19 Orthognathic surgery A,O 3,5
20 Harvesting bone & cartilage A,O 3,5
grafts A,O 3,3
Iliac crest A,O 2,2
Rib A,O 2,2
Calvarial
Fibula
21 T.M. Joint surgery A 3
22 Jaw resections A,O 3,5
23 Onco surgery A,O 3,3
24 Micro vascular anastomosis A,O 2,2
25 Cleft lip & palate A,O 3,5
26 Distraction osteogenesis A,O 2,3
27 Rhinoplasty A,O 2,3
28 Access osteotomies and A,O 1,3
base of skull surgeries
 29 Emergency Management for PI,O 5,5
OMFS Patients in Casualty /
Accident & Emergency

PI:- Performed
Independently
A:- Assisted
O:- Observed

Monitoring Learning Progress:

It is essential to monitor the learning progress to each candidate through

continuous appraisal and regular assessment. It not only helps teachers to
evaluate students, but also students to evaluate themselves. The monitoring
to be done by the staff of the department based on participation of students
in various teaching / learning activities. It may be structured and assessment
be done using checklists that assess various aspects. Checklists are given in
Section IV.

Paper wise distribution of syllabus:

PART- I :

Applied Basic Sciences

PART-II:

Paper– I:Minor Oral Surgery and

Maxillofacial Trauma Minor Oral

Surgery:

 Principles of Surgery: Developing A Surgical Diagnosis, Basic

Necessities For Surgery, Aseptic Technique, Incisions, Flap Design
Tissue Handling, Haemostasis, Dead Space Management,
Decontamination And Debridement, Suturing, Oedema Control,
Patient General Health And Nutrition.
 Medical Emergencies: Prevention and management of altered cons-
ciousness (syncope, orthostatic hypotension, seizures, diabetes
mellitus, adrenal insufficiency), hypersensitivity reactions, chest
discomfort, and respiratory difficulty.
 Examination and Diagnosis: Clinical history, physical and
radiographic, clinical and laboratory diagnosis, oral manifestations of
systemic diseases, implications of systemic diseases in surgical
patients.
 Haemorrhage and Shock: Applied physiology, clinical abnormalities
of coagulation, extra vascular hemorrhage, and hemorrhagic lesions,
management of secondary hemorrhage, shock.
 Exodontia: Principles of extraction, indications and contraindications,
types of extraction, complications and their management, principles
of elevators and elevators used in oral surgery.
 Impaction: Surgical anatomy, classification, indications and
contraindications, diagnosis, procedures, complications and their
management.
 Surgical aids to eruption of teeth: Surgical exposure of unerupted
teeth, surgical repositioning of partially erupted teeth.
 Transplantation of the teeth
 Surgical Endodontics: Indications and contraindications, diagnosis,
procedures of periradicular surgery,Resection of the roots in
periapical procedures,Retrograde fillings
 Preprosthetic Surgery: Requirements, types (alvoloplasty,
tuberosity reduction, mylohyoid ridge reduction, genial reduction,
removal of exostosis, vestibuloplasty)Advanced preprosthetic surgical
procedures,
 Procedures to Improve Alveolar Soft Tissues: Hypermobile
tissues- operative / sclerosing method, epulis fissuratum, frenectomy
and frenotomy
 Infectionsof Head and Neck: Odontogenic and non Odontogenic
infections, factors affecting spread of infection, diagnosis and
differential diagnosis, management of facial space infections, Ludwig
angina, cavernous sinus thrombosis.
 Chronic infections of the jaws: Osteomyelitis (types, etiology,
pathogenesis, management) osteoradionecrosis,Medication related
osteonecrosis of jaws,Fungal infections involving jaws
 Maxillary Sinus: Maxillary sinusitis – types, pathology, treatment,
closure of Oro
– antral fistula, Caldwell- luc operation
 Cysts of the Orofacial Region: Classification, diagnosis,
management of OKC, dentigerous, radicular, non Odontogenic,
ranula
 Neurological disorders of the Maxillofacial Region: Diagnosis and
management of trigeminal neuralgia, MPDS, bell’s palsy, Frey’s
syndrome, nerve injuries.Classification of nerve injuries,Management
protocall in nerve injury,Physiology of nerve regeneration
 Implantology: Definition, classification, indications and
contraindications, advantages and disadvantages, surgical
procedure. Principles of Basic Implantology, Maxillary sinus lift
procedures, Concept of tilted implants Zygomatic implants, Cad cam
planning in oral Implantology, Bone augmentation procedures
Maxillofacial implants for rehabilitation of facial deformities and
defects

 Anesthesia
Local Anesthesia:
Classification of local anesthetic drugs, mode of action, indications
and contra indications, advantages and disadvantages, techniques,
complications and their management Advances in local anaesthesia
Computer assisted drug delivery system
Preoperative evaluation and investigations in maxillofacial surgery
Medical emergencies in maxillofacial surgical practice.
General Anesthesia:
Classification, stages of GA, mechanism of action, indications, and
contra indications, advantages and disadvantages, post anesthetic
complications and emergencies, anesthetic for dental procedures in
children, pre medication, conscious sedation, legal aspects for GA
Perioperative and posteoperative monitoring for maxillofacial surgery
patient
Operating room protocalls
Drugs for General anaesthesia

Maxillofacial Trauma:
  Surgical Anatomy of Head and Neck.
 Etiology of Injury.
 Basic Principles of Treatment
 Primary Care: resuscitation, establishment of airway,
management of hemorrhage, management of head
injuries and admission to hospital.
 Diagnosis: clinical, radiological
 Soft Tissue Injury of Face and Scalp: classification and
management of soft tissue wounds, injuries to structure requiring
special treatment.
 Dento Alveolar Fractures: examination and diagnosis,
classification, treatment, prevention.
 Mandibular Fractures: classification, examination and
diagnosis, general principles of treatment, complications
and their management
 Fracture of Zygomatic Complex: classification, examination
and diagnosis, general principles of treatment, complications
and their management.
 Orbital Fractures: blow out fractures
 Nasal Fractures
 Fractures of Middle Third of the Facial Skeleton: emergency
care, fracture of maxilla, and treatment of le fort I, II, III,
fractures of Naso orbito- ethmoidal region.
 Ophthalmic Injuries: minor injuries, non-perforating injuries,
perforating injuries, retro bulbar hemorrhage, and traumatic optic
neuropathy.
 Traumatic Injuries To Frontal Sinus: diagnosis, classification,
treatment
 Maxillofacial Injuries in Geriatric and Pediatric Patients.
 Gun Shot Wounds and War Injuries
 Osseointegration in Maxillofacial Reconstruction
 Metabolic Response to Trauma: neuro endocrine responses,
inflammatory mediators, clinical implications
 Healing of Traumatic Injuries: soft tissues, bone, cartilage,
response of peripheral nerve to injury
 Nutritional consideration following Trauma.
 Tracheostomy indications and contraindications, procedure,
complications and their management
 Residual deformities of maxillofacial region.

Paper – II : Maxillofacial Surgery

a) Salivary gland
 Sialography
 Salivary fistula and management
 Diseases of salivary gland – developmental disturbances, cysts,
inflammation and sialolithiasis
 Mucocele and Ranula
 Tumors of salivary gland and their management
 Staging and Imaging of salivary gland tumors
 Parotidectomy
b) Temporomandibular Joint
 Etiology, history signs, symptoms, examination
and diagnosis of temporomandibular joint
 disorders
 Various anomalies of condyle
 Hemifacial microsomia and condylar elongation
 Ankylosis and management of the same with different
treatment modalities
 MPDS and management
 Condylectomy – different procedures
 Various approaches to TMJ
 Recurrent dislocations – Etiology and Management
 Role of Arthrocentosis & Arthroscopy in TMD

c) Oncology
 Biopsy Types of biopsy Immunohistochemistry,Sentinal Node
and its significance
 Management of pre-malignant tumors of head and neck region
 Benign and Malignant tumors of Head and Neck region
 Staging of oral cancer and tumor markers
 Management of oral cancer
 Radical Neck dissection
 Modes of spread of tumors
 Diagnosis and management of tumors of nasal, paranasal,
neck, tongue, cheek, maxilla and mandible
 Radiation therapy in maxillofacial regions
 Chemotherapy for squamous cell carcinoma
 Sarcomas of head neck face region
 Lateral neck swellings
 Hard & Soft tissue flaps in reconstruction
 Recent diagnostic aids in oral malignancy
 Rehabilitation & Quality of life of pts with oral oncology
 Access surgeries & Osteotomies for maxillofacial region

d) Orthognathic surgery
 Diagnosis and treatment planning
 Cephalometric analysis
 Model surgery and preparation of splints
 Maxillary and mandibular repositioning procedures
 Segmental osteotomies
 Management of apertognathia
 Genioplasty
 Distraction osteogenesis
 Surgery first approach in orthognathic surgery
 Management of patients with facial asymmetry
 Protocol of Management of Obstructive Sleep apnea

e) Cysts and tumors of oro facial region

 Odontogenic and non-Odontogenic tumors and their
management
 Giant Cell lesions of jawbone
 Fibro osseous lesions of jawbone
 Cysts of jaw
 Reactive lesions of the maxillofacial region
 Vascular anomalies of maxillofacial region ,Digital subtraction
 angiography
 Embolization for maxillofacial pathology
 Recent advance in the management of the jaw pathology
f) Laser surgery
 Principles of laser, Types of lasers, Advantages &
Disadvantages
 The application of laser technology in surgical treatment of
lesions

g) Cryosurgery & Piezosurgery

 Principles, applications of cryosurgery in surgical management
 Principles ,application of piezosurgery in maxillofacial region

h) Cleft lip and palate surgery

 Detailed knowledge of the development of the face, head and
neck
 Diagnosis and treatment planning
 Current concepts in the management of cleft lip and palate
deformity
 Knowledge of Nasoendoscopy and other diagnostic
techniques in the evaluation of speech and hearing
 Concept of multidisciplinary team management
 Cleft hypoplastic maxilla
 Cleft rhinoplasty
 Role of speech therapy
 Alveolar bone grafting
 Rare Facial clefts

i) Aesthetic facial surgery

 Detailed knowledge of the structures of the face and neck
including skin and underlying soft tissue
 Diagnosis and treatment planning of deformities and conditions
affecting facial skin
 Underlying facial muscles, bone, Eyelids, external ear
 Surgical management of post acne scarring, facelift,
blepharoplasty, otoplasty, facial bone recontouring, etc
 Non surgical modalities of facial rejunevation
 Role of fillers in facial aesthetics
 Ear Reconstruction
 Surgery for follicle of hair
 Aesthetic rhinoplasty

j) Advances in Maxillofacial
Tissue engineering in maxillofacial surgery
Stem cell research and regeneration
Computer assisted maxillofacial surgery
Robotics in maxillofacial region
Recent advances in imaging in maxillofacial region

K) Craniofacial surgery
  Basic knowledge of developmental anomalies of the face, head
and neck
 Basic concepts in the diagnosis and planning of various
head and neck anomalies including facial clefts,
craniosynostosis, syndromes, etc.
 Current concept in the management of Craniofacial anomalies
 Modern management of Craniosynostosis
 Syndromes & Sequence of craniofacial region


Paper – III : Essays (descriptive and analyzing type questions)

 Scheme of Examination
A. Theory
Part – I Basic sciences paper 100 Marks
Part – II Paper –I Paper-II & paper-III 300 Marks
(100 Marks for each paper)
Written examination shall consist of Basic Sciences Paper (Part-I) of three hours duration and
should be conducted at the end of First year of MDS course. Part-II Examination will be
conducted at the end of Third year of MDS course. Part-II Examination will consist of Paper-I,
Paper-II & Paper-III, each of three hours duration. Paper-I & Paper-II shall consist of two long
answer questions carrying 25 marks each and five questions carrying 10 marks each. Paper-III
will be on Essays. In Paper-III three Questions will be given and student has to answer any two
questions. Each question carries 50 marks. Questions on recent advances may be asked in
any or all the papers. Distribution of topics for each paper will be as follows: *

PART-I : Applied Basic Sciences: Applied Anatomy, Physiology, & Biochemistry, Pathology,
Microbiology, Pharmacology, Research Methodology and Biostatistics.
PART- II

Paper – I : Minor Oral Surgery and Maxillofacial Trauma

Paper – II : Maxillofacial Surgery
Paper – III : Essays (descriptive and analyzing type questions)

*The topics assigned to the different papers are generally evaluated under those sections.
However a strict division of the subject may not be possible and some overlapping of topics is
inevitable. Students should be prepared to answer overlapping topics.

A. Practical / Clinical Examination - 200

Marks

1. Minor Oral Surgery - 100

Marks

Each candidate is required to perform the minor oral surgical procedures under local
anaesthesia. The minor surgical cases may include removal of impacted lower third
molar, cyst enucleation, any similar procedure where students can exhibit their professional
skills in raising the flap, removing the bone and suturing the wound.
Break up the marks is desirable as per the decision of all four examiners for equal opportunity
in every steps to score the marks to the candidates

2.Case presentation and discussion: 100

Marks
(a) One long case - 60 Marks
(b) Two short cases - 40 Marks
(20 marks each)

B. Viva Voce - 100

Marks
i. Viva-Voce examination: 80
Marks

All examiners will conduct viva-voce conjointly on candidate’s comprehension, analytical

approach, expression, interpretation of data and communication skills. It includes all
components of course contents. It includes presentation and discussion on dissertation also.
Minimum time of viva for each candidate should not be less than 45 to 60 minutes.

ii. Pedagogy: 20 Marks

A topic be given to each candidate in the beginning of clinical examination. He/she is asked to
make a presentation on the topic for 8-10 minutes. Topic of pedagogy should be other than the
dissertation topic of candidate.
 SYLLABUS OF PART – I

SUBJECT: ORAL MEDICINE AND RADIOLOGY

Applied Anatomy

1. Gross Anatomy of the face

o Muscles of Mastication
o Facial nerve/artery/vein
o Parotid Gland and its relations
o Tongue
o TMJ and Infra Temporal fossa
o Vestibule and oral cavity
o Palate- Soft and hard

2. Neck Region
o Facial Spaces
o Lymphatic system

3. Cranial Nerve- V, VII, IX, XI, XII

4. Nasal Cavity
o Nasal Septum
o Lateral Wall
o Paranasal sinuses

5. Jaw Bones (Maxilla and Mandible)

o Development
o Anatomy
o Ossification
o Age Changes

6. Embryology
a. Development of;
 face
 tongue
 Palate
 Salivary glands
  Maxillary Sinus
b. Congenital anomalies

7. Tooth
o Development
o Anatomy
o Age changes

8. Histology
o Epithelium of Oral cavity and respiratory tract
o Connective tissue
o Muscular tissue
o Nervous tissue
o Blood vessels
o Cartilage
o Bone
o Tooth
o Tongue
o Salivary Gland
o Tonsil
o Lymph nodes
Physiology and Biochemistry
A. Physiology
1. General Physiology
o Cell
o Cellular transport

2. Muscle nerve Physiology

o Structure of neuron and properties of nerve fibres
o Structure of muscle fibres and properties of muscle fibres
o Neuromuscular transmission
o Mechanism of muscle contraction

3. Blood
o RBC and HB
o WBC- structure and functions
o Platelets- functions and applied aspects
o Plasma proteins
o Blood coagulation with applied aspects
 o Blood Groups
o Lymph and applied aspects

4. Respiratory System
o Respiratory rate
o Hypoxia; effects of increased and decreased barometric pressure

5. Cardio-Vascular System
o Regulation of blood pressure
o Shock, hypertension, cardiac failure

6. Excretory System
o Renal Function tests

7. Gastro-Intestinal Tract
a. Composition, function and regulation of;
 Saliva
 Gastric juice
b. Mastication and deglutition

8. Endocrine System
a. Hormones- classification and mechanism of action and applied aspects

9. Central Nervous System

a. Ascending tracts with special reference to pain pathway

10. Special Senses

a. Gustation and Olfaction

B. Biochemistry

 Metabolism of;
a. Carbohydrates
b. Lipids
c. Proteins
d. Minerals
 Energy Metabolism
a. Basic Metabolic Rate
  Vitamins

a. Classification, source, metabolism and deficiencies

Pathology

 Inflammation (Acute/Chronic)
 Repair and regeneration, necrosis and gangrene
 Role of complement system in inflammation
 Role of arachidonic acid and its metabolites in inflammation
 Role of NASAIDS in inflammation
 Cellular changes in radiation injury and its manifestations

 Homeostasis
 Role of endothelium in thrombo-genesis
 Arterial and venous thrombi
 Disseminated intra vascular coagulation
 AV malformation

 Shock
a. Pathogenies and clinical presentation of;
 Hemorrhagic shock
 Neurogenic shock
 Septic shock
 Cardiogenic shock
 Circulatory shock
b. Edema
c. Infarction

 Hypersensitivity
a. Anaphylaxis
b. Type II Hypersensitivity
c. Type III Hypersensitivity
d. Cell mediated reaction and its clinical importance (e.g. SLE/Infection/Infective
granulomas)

 Neoplasia
a. Classification of tumours
b. Carcinogenesis and carcinogens; Chemical, Viral, Microbial
 c. Grading and staging of cancers
d. Spread of tumours
e. Characteristics of benign and malignant tumours

Applied Immunology
o Antigen
o Antibody
o Heptane’s
o Complement
o Types of reaction
o Cellular Vs humoral
o Complication
o Management of Immune deficiency patients

Applied Common Investigations

 CBC
 Coagulation Profile
 Biochemical
 KFT
 LFT

Microbiology
Oral Microbial Flora
 Commensal flora
 Conditions causing alterations in flora

Sterilization and Asepsis

▪ Aseptic care

▪ Physical and chemical methods of sterilization

▪ Antiseptics
▪ Handling of sterile material

Pharmacology
1. Definition and terminology
2. Mechanism, action and dosage of;
 Antibiotics
  Analgesics
 Steroids
 Anti-histaminic
 Anti-coagulants
 Sedatives and tranquilizers
 Hematinics
 Desensitizers
 Sialagogues and anti-sialagogues
3. Drug tolerance, interaction and hypersensitivity reaction

Research Methodology and Biostatistics

Research Methodology
1. Introduction and purpose of research
2. Types of research
a. Selection of subject
3. Scientific methods (Standardization)
4. Ideal requirements
5. Preparing the protocol
6. Sampling
a. Sampling methods
b. Sample size
7. Data
a. Type of data
b. Collection of data
c. Presentation of data
8. Documentation and Writing the report
9. Good clinical practices and ethics

Biostatistics
 Introduction
 Applications
 Statistical averages
 Measures of Dispersion
 Distribution/Normal curve
 Tests of Significance
 Correlation and Interpretation
 ORAL MEDICINE & RADIOLOGY

Introduction:

The subject of Oral Medicine and Radiology is unique in that it combines Oral Medicine and Radiology
and sits at the interface between dentistry and medicine.
Oral Medicine deals in a specialist clinical area of care for treating head and neck medical diseases.
Oral Medicine involves diagnosis and nonsurgical management of diseases of the orofacial complex
and systemic and behavioral disorders that impact oral health. It includes and helps develop the skill for
of pre-oncology evaluation and preparation of the affected patient besides early detection and
treatment of potentially malignant disorders and anti-tobacco counselling
Oral and Maxillofacial Radiology deals with the acquisition and interpretation of radiographic imaging
studies performed for diagnosis of treatment guidance for conditions affecting the maxillofacial region. It
includes a thorough knowledge on techniques and interpretation for conventional as well as advanced
maxillofacial imaging like Cone Beam Computed Tomography.
Forensic Odontology and Maxillofacial Radiology is adequately covered in the syllabus making the
student competent for person identification, age estimation and other forensic requirements.

MDS-Part II

COURSE CONTENTS:

A. Oral and Maxillofacial Radiology:

Study includes Seminars/lectures/Demonstrations
The educational programme provides;
- Experience of the diagnostic imaging investigations required to become technically competent
in practical clinical work and to master the underlying the theoretical principles.
- The opportunity to develop relevant skills in OPG, CBCT, CT, MRI, Ultrasound and Nuclear
Medicine relevant to Dental and Maxillofacial Radiology and to provide specialist opinion
- Experience of practice of clinical governance and audit (specialist and multidisciplinary)
through evidence based medicine, which is the basis of radiology practice.

1. History of radiology, structure of x – ray tube, production of x – ray, property of x

– rays.
- Brief History of Radiology, Dental Radiography and its PioneersNature, structure and
properties of matter, radioactivity, magnetism, ionizing radiation, radiofrequency
radiation and ultrasound and how they interact with matter.
- Construction, function and operation of Medical and Dental Imaging equipment.
- Operating factors of imaging equipment, effects on indices of image quality and their
inter-relationships.
- Principles of Quality Assurance and Audit in Medical and Dental Imaging
- Image Artifacts in Medical and Dental Imaging

F:\Uploading_2308021\07 Oral Medicine and Radiology Part II Syllabus.docx 1

 2. Biological effects of radiation
- Hazards and risks to patients, staff and public from Medical Imaging
3. Radiation protection and ICRP guidelines
4. Accessories and Films and recording media,
5. Processing of image in radiology- conventional and digital
6. Design of x –ray department, dark room and use of automatic processing
units
- AERB legislation and guidelines for Medical and Dental Imaging including room
layout, and various licensing procedures.
7. Faults of dental radiographs and concept of Ideal Radiograph
8. Quality assurance and audit in dental radiology
9. Intra- Oral Imaging Techniques
10. Projection Geometry & Localization by radiographic techniques
11. Extra – oral-imaging techniques
12. OPG and other radiologic techniques
13. Advanced imaging techniques like CBCT, CT Scan, MRI, Ultrasound,
Fluoroscopy.
14. Radiographic consideration of
- Dental Caries
- Periapical Lesions, Infections and Inflammatory Lesions affecting the Jaws
- Periodontal diseases
- Dental Anomalies
- Systemic Diseases affecting the Jaws
- TMJ Disorders
- Disorders of Maxillary Sinus
- Trauma and Fractures involving the dental structures and maxillofacial region
- Aberrant calcifications in the Maxillofacial region
- Disease of the bone Manifested in the Jaws
• Fibrosseous Lesions
• Other Bony Lesions
• Cysts, Benign Tumors and Malignant Lesions affecting the Jaws
15. Basic Anatomy of sectional imaging with case interpretations of CT/ CBCT/
MRI
- Applied radiographic anatomy of maxillofacial skeleton including;
 TMJ
 Paranasal Sinuses
 Skull base
 Cranial Nerves (V, VII, IX, X and XII)
 Temporal Bone
 Salivary Glands

F:\Uploading_2308021\07 Oral Medicine and Radiology Part II Syllabus.docx 2

  Thyroid Gland
 Cervical Lymph Nodes
 Soft Tissue Spaces
16. Radio nucleotide techniques
17. Contrast radiography in salivary gland, TMJ, and other radiolucent
Pathologies
18. Radiograph differential diagnosis of radiolucent, radio opaque and
mixed
Lesions.
19. Art of radiographic report, writing and descriptors preferred in reports
- Typical and Atypical presentations of commonly occurring dento-alveolar
lesions
- Principles of differential diagnosis of maxillofacial bone lesions and soft
tissue conditions
- Tumour staging
- Typical and atypical presentations of maxillofacial lesions, differential
diagnosis and differentiate uncommon conditions mimicking common
diagnosis
- Co-relate with clinical presentations and diagnosis (Case Interpretation)
- Effect and importance of radiographic diagnosis on the management and
treatment selection
- Current literature and guidelines on dento-alveolar investigations.
20. Digital radiology and its various types of advantages
21. Application of Maxillofacial Radiology in Implant Planning
- Pre and Post Implant Placement
- Radiographic evaluation of Implant site
- Use and applications of various Implant planning software
22. Forensic Maxillofacial Radiology

B. Oral Medicine, therapeutics and laboratory investigations:

Study includes seminars / lectures / discussion
The educational programme provides that;
- The student will be able to Elicit, identify, record and interpret an accurate
history from patient of any age within the scope of Oral Medicine
- Perform appropriate Clinical examination
- Select and prescribe appropriate and relevant investigations- laboratory
and imaging
- Appropriately interpret and apply in subsequent care for patient
- Competent in pre- radiation preparation and evaluation of patients

F:\Uploading_2308021\07 Oral Medicine and Radiology Part II Syllabus.docx 3

 1. Methods of clinical diagnosis of oral and systemic diseases as
applicable to
oral tissues including modern diagnostic techniques
2. Laboratory investigations including special investigations of oral and
oro- facial diseases
3. Teeth in local and systemic diseases, congenital, and hereditary
disorders
4. Oral manifestations of systemic diseases
5. Oro – facial pain (odontogenic and non-odontogenic)
• Manifestations and pathophysiology
• Imaging studies and other investigations
• Therapeutic Options- (drugs, psychological therapies, Contemporary
and Alternative Medicines (CAM), operative interventions)
- Neurological Dysfunction (altered cranial nerve function related or
unrelated to other neurological abnormalities)
• Localized Cranial Nerve Disease
• Iatrogenic Cranial Nerve Disease
• Diseases with extra-oral manifestations that present with cranial nerve
disorders
- Imaging studies and other investigations to study altered cranial nerve
function
6. Psychosomatic aspects of oral diseases
7. Management of medically compromised patients including medical
emergencies in the dental chair
- Medically compromised patients; (acutely unwell adult and
pediatric patients including simple faint, post-operative bleeding,
hyperventilation, angina, myocardial infarction, acute asthma, anaphylaxis,
diabetic emergencies, seizures, adrenal insufficiency etc.)
- Physiology and/or Pathology related to medical emergencies
- Pharmacology and adverse effect of drugs used in the
management of medical emergencies
- Handling of medical emergencies- drugs and equipment
8. Oral Soft Tissue Infections:
- Normal Oral Flora
- Diagnosis and Management with Medical Treatment and Monitoring of
patients with Viral, Bacterial, Fungal and other Infections of the oral soft
tissues. (Ulcerative and Vesiculobullous Lesions affecting the Oral Cavity).
- Diagnosis and management of primary or reactivated infections of the oral
soft tissues
- Diagnosis and management of infections in immunocompromised patients.

F:\Uploading_2308021\07 Oral Medicine and Radiology Part II Syllabus.docx 4

 9. Congenital and Hereditary disorders involving tissues of oro facial
region
10. Systemic diseases due to oral foci of infection
11. Hematological, Dermatological, Metabolic, Nutritional, & Endocrinal
conditions with oral manifestations
12. Neuromuscular diseases affecting oro –facial region
13. Salivary gland disorders
- Structure and function of Healthy Salivary Glands and Saliva
- Importance of Saliva as a diagnostic tool
- Diagnosis and Management of disorders of Major and Minor Salivary
Glands;
• Localized Salivary Gland Disorders
• Iatrogenic Salivary Gland Disorders
• Diseases with extra-oral manifestations that present with salivary gland
disorders
- Diagnostic criteria for dry mouth
- Imaging modalities and laboratory investigations for salivary gland diseases
- Therapeutic and operative interventions
14. Tongue in oral and systemic diseases
15. TMJ dysfunction and diseases
16. Concept of immunity as related to oro – facial lesions, including AIDS
17. Cysts, Neoplasms, Odontomes, and fibro – osseous lesions
18. Oral changes in Osteo – dystrophies and chondro – dystrophies
19. Potentially Malignant Disorders and Malignant lesions of oro facial
region
- Diagnosis, Investigations, Biopsy and Medical Treatment of Potentially
Malignant Disorders
- Diagnosis, grading, biopsy, treatment planning and pre and post -
radiation prophylaxis and care.
- Therapeutic Radiation
20. Allergy and other miscellaneous conditions
21. Pigmented Lesions of the Oral Cavity
22. Normal Breath Analysis, Breath as Diagnostic Tool and Halitosis
23. Therapeutics in oral medicine –clinical pharmacology
- Definitive management of localized benign disease and/or establish
diagnosis including suspected oral soft tissue malignancy
- Principles of safe, effective, quality-assured evidence based patient care
- Choice of therapy and drugs;
i. Mode of action
ii. Mode of delivery- (topical, intralesional, systemic)

F:\Uploading_2308021\07 Oral Medicine and Radiology Part II Syllabus.docx 5

 iii. Indications and contraindications
iv. Adverse effects
v. Drug interactions
vi. Monitoring during therapy
- Hypersensitivity reactions
- Operative Interventions
i. Different operative techniques - (laser and cryotherapy)
ii Biopsy techniques-
ii. Key features of local/short acting/general anesthesia
24. Forensic Odontology
25. Computers in oral diagnosis and imaging
26. Evidence based oral care in treatment planning
27. Molecular Biology

Essential Knowledge:

Basic medical subjects, Oral Medicine, Clinical Dentistry, Management of Medical

Emergencies, Oral Radiology techniques and Interpretation, Diagnosis of Oro – acial
disorders

F:\Uploading_2308021\07 Oral Medicine and Radiology Part II Syllabus.docx 6

 Scheme of Examination
A.Theory
Part – I Basic sciences paper 100 Marks
Part – II Paper –I Paper-II, aper-III 300 Marks
(100 Marks for each paper)
Written examination shall consist of Basic Sciences Paper (Part-I) of three hours duration and should be
conducted at the end of First year of MDS course. Part-II Examination will be conducted at the end of
Third year of MDS course. Part-II Examination will consist of Paper-I, Paper-II & Paper-III, each of three
hours duration. Paper-I & Paper-II shall consist of two long answer questions carrying 25 marks each
and five questions carrying 10 marks each. Paper- III will be on Essays. In Paper-III three Questions will
be given and student has to answer any two questions. Each question carries 50 marks. Questions on
recent advances may be asked in any or all the papers. Distribution of topics for each paper will be as
follows: *
PART-I : Applied Basic Sciences: Applied Basic Sciences :Applied Anatomy, Physiology, & Biochemistry,
Pathology, Microbiology, Pharmacology, Research Methodology and Biostatistics
PART-II :
Paper-I : Oral and Maxillofacial Radiology
Paper-II : Oral Medicine, therapeutics and laboratory investigations
Paper-III : Essays (descriptive and analyzing type questions)
*The topics assigned to the different papers are generally evaluated under those sections. However a
strict division of the subject may not be possible and some overlapping of topics is inevitable. Students
should be prepared to answer overlapping topics.
B Practical / Clinical Examination : 200 Marks
1st Day Clinical
Clinical Case Presentation
2 Spotters 2 x 10 = 20 Marks
2 Short Cases 2 x 15 = 30 Marks
1 Long Case 1 x 50 = 50 Marks
Total = 100 Marks

Radiology Exercise
I. A) One Intra Oral Radiograph : 10 Marks
B) One Occlusal Radiograph :30 Marks
II. A) Two Extra Oral Radiograph :2 x 30 = 60 Marks Including technique and interpretation

2nd Day Viva Voce 100 Marks

i. Viva-Voce examination : 80 marks

All examiners will conduct viva-voce conjointly on candidate’s comprehension, analytical approach,
expression, interpretation of data and communication skills. It includes all components of course
contents. It includes presentation and discussion on dissertation also.

ii. Pedagogy Exercise : 20 marks

A topic be given to each candidate in the beginning of clinical examination. He/she is asked to make a
presentation on the topic for 8-10 minutes.

(1) Schedule of Examinations:-

University shall conduct MDS Examinations PART-I at the end of 1st Year and PART-II examination at

F:\Uploading_2308021\07 Oral Medicine and Radiology Part II Syllabus.docx 7

 the end of Third year of MDS course as per the time schedule as prescribed by the University from time
to time. The University shall not conduct more than two examinations in a year.

A) Scheme for Theory Examinations:-

PART – I
One paper shall be of 100 marks and duration of each paper shall be 03 hours. Pattern of question
paper shall be as given below.
Sr. No Nature of Question Division of Total
Marks Marks

1 Write Answer of the 10 x 10 100

following questions
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i)
(j)

Total 100

PART – II

Three papers shall be of 100 marks and duration of each paper shall be 03 hours. Pattern
of question paper shall be as given below.

Paper I & II

Sr. No Nature of Question Division of Total

Marks Marks

1 Write Long essay questions 02 x 25 50

(a) (b)
2 Write Short essay (a) (b) (c) 05 x 10 50
(d) (e)
Total 100

Paper III

Sr. No Nature of Question Division of Total

Marks Marks
1 Essay (any two out the 02 x 50 100
three) (a) (b) (c)
Total 100

B) Scheme for Practical Examinations:-

Clinical/Practical examination is designed to test the clinical skill, performance and competence of the

F:\Uploading_2308021\07 Oral Medicine and Radiology Part II Syllabus.docx 8

 candidate in skills such as communication, clinical examination, medical/dental procedures or
prescription, exercise prescription, latest techniques, evaluation and interpretation of results so as to
undertake independent work as a specialist. The practical/clinical examination in all the specialties shall
be conducted for six candidates in two days.
Distribution of Marks at University Examinations:-
DISTRIBUTION OF PRACTICAL MARKS

Sr. No. Head of Examination Total Marks

1 Practical and Clinical Examination 200

Viva Voce
2 A. Viva Voce Examination 80 marks
B. Pedagogy Exercise 20 Marks 100
Total 300
I) Viva Voce Examination:-
All examiners will conduct viva-voce jointly on candidate’s comprehension, analytical approach,
expression, interpretation of data and communication skills. It includes all components of course
contents. It includes presentation and discussion on dissertation also

II) Pedagogy Exercise:-

A topic be given to each candidate in the beginning of clinical examination. He/she be asked to make a
presentation on the topic for 8-10 minutes.

F:\Uploading_2308021\07 Oral Medicine and Radiology Part II Syllabus.docx 9

ORAL PATHOLOGY AND MICROBIOLOGY

Oral Pathology deals with the nature of oral diseases, their causes, processes and effects. I t
relates the clinical manifestation of oral diseases to physiologic and anatomic changes associated
with these diseases. It deals with commonly occurring pre malignancies and malignancies and
serves commonly with the scientifically based information. It also deals with application of
dental science to the administration of law and the furtherance of justice.

Objectives:

• To train a graduate dental surgeon so as to ensure higher competence in both general and
special pathology dealing with the nature of oral diseases, their causes, processes and
effects.
• An oral pathologist is expected to perform routine histopathological evaluation of
specimen relating to oral and peri oral tissues, to carry out routine diagnostic procedures
including hematological, cytological, microbiological, immunological and ultra structural
investigations.
• He/she is expected to have an understanding of current research methodology, collection
and interpretation of data, ability to carry out research projects on clinical and or
epidemiological aspects, a working knowledge on current database, automate data
retrieval systems, referencing and skill in writing scientific papers.
• He/she is expected to present scientific data pertaining to the field , in conferences both
as poster and verbal presentations and to take part in group discussions etc.
• He / she is expected to deal with the correct professional handling , examination,
interpretation and presentation of dental an oral evidences which may came before the
legal authorities.
• Since oral cancer continues to occupy a central stage of oral pathology, he/she should be
capable of clinically correlating oral pre cancer with emphasis on early diagnosis using
scientifically based information.

Broad outline of theoretical, clinical and practical courses:

1. Study of principles of routine and special techniques used for histopathology

including principles of histochemistry, immnunohistochemistry, applied and
theoretical biochemical basis of histochemistry as related to oral pathology.

2. Advanced histological an histopathological study of dental and oral tissues

including embryonic considerations, clinical considerations, biology, histology,
pathology, prognosis and management of oral oncology. concepts of oral
pre malignancies.

3. Study of special and applied pathology of oral tissues as well as relation of local
pathologic and clinical findings to systemic conditions.

-1-
 4. Oral microbiology and their relationship to various branches of dentistry.

5. Oral microbiology affecting hard and soft tissues, Study of clinical changes and
their significance to dental and oral diseases as related to oral pathology

6. Forensic odontology.

7. Inter institutional posting such as cancer hospital, dermatology

clinics, regional HIV detection centres, sophisticated instrumentation centres for
electron microscopy and other techniques.

8. Intra institutional posting in Oral Medicine and Radiology, Oralsurgery and

Periodontology..

9. Maintenance of records of all post graduate activities.

10. Library dissertation.

11. University dissertation/Thesis.

GENERAL INFORMATION:

• The duration of the post graduate degree course in oral pathology and microbiology will
be of three years.
• It will consist of three modules of one year each.
• The library dissertation should be completed by the end of tenth month and evaluation to
be done at the end of first year.
• The university dissertation should start in second year and should be completed and
submitted to the university six months before the final university examination.
• There shall be one institutional / university examination at the end of first year in the
subject of Basic sciences subjects (Research Methodology and Biostatistics) .

-2-
 A. Course Content

FIRST YEAR

1. Biostatistics n Research methodology

• Basic Principles of Biostatistics and study as applied to dentistry and Research

• Collection /organization of data/ measurement scales presentation data and
analysis.
• Measures of central tendency
• Measures of variability
• Sampling and planning of health survey
• Probability, normal distribution and indicative statistics.
• Estimating population values.
• Tests of significance (Parametric/nonparametric qualitative methods).
• Analysis of variance.
• Association, correlation and regression.

Approach:
• Didactic lectures on Biostatistics an discussion on Research methodology.
• Two day Post graduate orientation course including General approach PG course
,library , Main dissertation, journal club topics selection and presentation,
seminars, clinicopathological meetings, teaching technology and use of
audiovisual aids.

2. Applied Gross Anatomy of Head and Neck including Histology:

• Temporomandibular Joint
• Trigeminal nerve and Facial nerve.
• Muscles of Mastication.
• Tongue
• Salivary glands
• Nerve supply, blood supply, lymphatic drainage and venous drainage of
Orodental tissues
• Embryology
- Development of face, palate, mandible, maxilla, tongue and applied
aspect of the same.
- Development of teeth and dental tissues and developmental defects of
oral and maxillofacial region and abnormalities of teeth.

• Maxillary sinus.
• Jaw muscles and facial muscles

-3-
 Genetics:

Introduction , mode of inheritance, chromosomal anomalies of oral tissues and

single gene disorder.

Approach:

• To be covered as didactic lectures.

• Posting in department of Anatomy for demonstration of dissection of Head, face
and neck.

3. Physiology (General and Oral)

• Saliva
• Pain.
• Mastication
• Taste
• Deglutition
• Wound healing
• Vitamins (Influence on growth, Development and structure of Oral soft and hard
tissues and para oral tissues.)
• Calcium metabolism.
• Theories of mineralization
• Tooth eruption and shedding
• Hormones((Influence on growth, Development and structure of Oral soft and hard
tissues and para oral tissues.)
• Blood and its constituents.

Approach:

To be covered as didactic lectures.

4. Cell Biology:

• Cell structure and function (Ultra structural and molecular aspects), intercellular
junctions, cell cycle and division, cell cycle regulators, cell to cell extra cellular
matrix interactions.
• Detailed molecular aspects of DNA, RNA and intracellular organelles, transcription
and translation and molecular biology techniques.

Approach:

To be covered as seminars.

-4-
 5. General Histology:

Light and electron microscopy considerations of epithelial tissues and gland, bone,
hemopoietic system, lymphatic system, muscle, neural tissue, endocrinal
system(Thyroid, pituitary, parathyroid)

Approach:

• Topics to be covered as didactic lectures.

• Postings in the dept of Anatomy and histology for slide discussion.
• Record book to be maintained.

6. Biochemistry:

• Chemistry of carbohydrates, lipids and proteins.

• Methods of identification and purification.
• Metabolism of carbohydrates, lipids and proteins.
• Biologicaloxidation.
• Various techniques- cell fractionation and ultra filtration, centrifugation,
electrophorosis, spectrophotometry and radioactive techniques.

Approach:
• Topics to be covered as didactic lectures.
• Posting I the dept of Biochemistry to familiarize with various techniques.
• Record book to be maintained.

7. General Pathology:

• Inflammations and chemical mediators, thrombosis, embolism, necrosis, repair,

degeneration , shock, hemorrhage, pathogenic mechanisms at molecular level and blood
dyscrasias, carcinogenesis and neoplasia.

Approach:

To be covered as seminars and didactic lectures.

8. General Microbiology:

• Definitions of various types of infections.

• Routes of infection and spread.
• Sterilization, disinfection and antiseptics.
• Bacterial genetics.
• Physiology and growth microorganisms.

-5-
Approach:

• To be cover as didactic lectures.

• Record book to maintained.

9. Basic Immunology:

• Basic principles of immunity, antigens, and antibody reactions.

• Cell mediated immunity and humoral immunity.
• Immunology of hypersensitivity.
• Immunological basis of autoimmune phenomenon.
• Immunodeficiency with relevance to opportunistic infections.
• Basic principles of transplantation and tumour immunity.

Approach:

To be covered as didactic lecture.

10. Systemic microbiology /Applied microbiology:

Morphology, classification, pathogenicity, mode of transmission, methods of prevention,

collection and transport of specimen for laboratory diagnosis, staining methods, common
culture media, interpretation of laboratory reports and antibiotic sensitivity tests.

• Staphylococci
• Streptococci
• Cornybacterium diphtheria
• Mycobacteria.
• Clostridia, bacteroids and fusobacteria.
• Actinomycetales.
• Spirochetes.

Virology:

General properties: structure, broad classification of viruses, pathogenesis, pathology of viral

infections.

Herpes virus: List of viruses included, lesions produced, pathogenesis, latency principles and
laboratory diagnosis.

Hepatitis virus: List of viruses, pathogenesis, mode of infection, list of diagnostic tests an their
interpretations, methods of prevention and control.

-6-
Human Immunodefiency Virus: Structure with relevance to laboratory diagnosis, types of
infection, laboratory tests and their interpretation, universal precautions, specific precautions and
recent trends in diagnosis and prophylaxis.

Mycoloy:

• General properties of fungi, classification bases of diseases, superficial subcutaneous and

deep opportunistic infections.
• General principles of fungal infections, diagnosis, rapid diagnosis method collection of
sample and examination for fungi.

Approach:

• To be covered as seminars and didactic lectures.

• Posting in the dept of microbiology to familiarize with relevant diagnostic methods.
• Record book to be maintained.

11. Oral Biology (Oral and Dental Histology)

• Structure and functions of oral, dental and paraoral tissues including their ultra structure,
molecular and biochemical aspects.
• Study of morphology of permanent and deciduous teeth.(Lectures and practicals to be
given by P students)

Approach:
• To be covered as seminars and didactic lectures
• Record book to be maintained.

12. Basic molecular biology and techniques.

Experimental aspects – DNA extraction , PCR, Western blotting.

Approach:
• To be covered as didactic lectures.
• Posting in the centres where facilities are available for demonstration of routine ,
molecular biology techniques.
• Record book to be maintained.

13. Basic Histotechniques and microscopy:

• Routine hematological tests and clinical significance of the same.
• Biopsy procedures for oral lesions.
• Processing of tissues for paraffin embedding.

-7-
 • Microtomes and principles of microtomy.
• Routine stains, principles and theories of staining techniques.
• Microscope and principle of microscopy.
• Light microscopy and various other types including electron microscopy.
• Methods of tissue preparation for ground sections, decalcified sections.

Approach:

• Topics to be covered as seminars.

• Preparation of ground and decalcified sections, tissue processing , sectioning and
staining.
• Record book to be maintained.

Academic Activities:
• Submission of synopsis of dissertation in the 10 month of first year.
• Journal clubs and seminars to be presented by every post graduate student by turn.
• To attend the interdepartmental meetings.
• To attend dental camps based on survey to be done.
• Part 1 year ending examination to be conducted by college/university at the end of the
academic year in optional subjects.

SECOND YEAR

Oral Pathology
• Developmental defects of oral and maxillofacial region and abnormalities of teeth.
• Dental caries(Introduction, Epidemiology, microbiology, cariogenic bacteria including
properties, acid production in plaque, development of lesion, response to dentine-pulp
unit, histopathology root caries, sequelae and immunology)
• Pulpal and perapical diseases.
• Infections of oral para oral regions (bacterial, viral and fungal infections)
• Non neoplastic disorders of salivary glands.
• Bone pathology
• Hematological disorders.
• Physical and chemical injuries, allergic and immunological diseases.
• Cysts of odontogenic origin
• Dermatologic diseases.
• Periodontal diseases.
• Oral manifestations of systemic diseases.
• Facial and neuromuscular disorder including TMJ disorders.
• Regressive alteration of teeth.

Clinical Pathology:
• Laboratory investigations-hematology, microbiology and urine analysis.
• Posting in clinical pathology to relevant training.

-8-
 • Record book to be maintained.

Specialized histotechniques and special stains:

Specialized staining technique for different tissues.
Immunohistochemistry.
Preparation of frozen sections and cytological smears.

Approach:
Training to imparted in the department or in the institutions having facility.
Record book to be maintained.

Recording of case history and clinicopathological discussions:

Approach

Posting to the department of Oral Medicine, Medicine and Radiology and Oral and
Maxillofacial surgery for 15 days.
Record book to be maintained.

Dermatology
Study of selected mucocutenous lesions-etiopathogenesis, pathology clinical presentation and
diagnosis.

Approach:
• Posting to dept dermatology of medical college for 15 days.
• Topics to be covered as seminars.
• Record book to be maintained.

Oral Oncology

Detailed study including pathogenesis, molecular and biochemical changes of various tumours,
tumour like lesions and premalignant lesions affecting the hard and soft tissues of oral and
paraoral tissues tumour markers.

Approach:
• To be covered as seminars..
• Posting in cancer centres to familiarize with the pathological appearances, diagnosis
radiodiognosis and treatment modalities.

Oral Microbiolgy and Immunology

• Normal Oral microbial flora
• Defence mechanism in the oral cavity
• Microbiology and immunology of dental caries and periodontal diseases.
• Tumour immunology
• Infections of pulp and periapical and periodontal tissues.
• Oral sepsis and bacterimia

-9-
 • Infections of oral and paraoral regions (Bacterial,viral and fungal infections)

Approach:

To be covered as seminars.

Forensic Odontology:

Legal procedures like inquest, medicolegal evidences, post mortam examination of violence
around mouth and neck, identification of deceased indivisuals –dentalimportance bitemaks,
rugae patterns and lip prints.

Approach:

To be covered as seminars.

Histopathology slide discussion

Record book to be maintained.

Other topics in Oral Pathology

• Detailed description of diseases affecting oral mucosa, teeth supporting tissues and jaws.
• Cysts of oral and paraoral regions.
• Systemic diseases affecting oral cavity.

Approach:

Seminars and slide discussions. Record book to be maintained. Training in histopathology slide
reporting.

Experimental aspects of oral diseases

Approach: Posting desirable in the centres where animal experimentation is carried out to
familiarize with laboratory techniques , upkeep and care of experimental animals.

Academic activities:

• Library assignment to be submitted at the end of 6 months.

• Commencement of dissertation work.
• Journal club and seminars to be presented by every PG students turn by turn.
• Clinicopathological discussions once in a month by every PG student.
• To attend the interdepartmental meetings.
• Lectures and practical classes and slide discussion to be taken for ii BDS students in oral
anatomy and histology, physiology.

- 10 -
THIRD YEAR

• Non neoplastic disorders of salivary glands.

• Bone pathology
• Physical and chemical injuries, allergic and immunological diseases.
• Cysts of odontogenic origin.
• Oral manifestation of systemic diseases.

Approach:

• To be covered as seminars
• Slide discussion of the same.
• Record book to be maintained.

Academic activities:

• Visit to centre where animal experimentation is carried out to familiarize with laboratory
techniques , upkeep and care of experimental animals.
• Completion of dissertation work and submission of the same six months before the final
university examination.
• Study of journals, internet browsing and group discussion to update knowledge in recent
advances in oral pathology.
• Lectures and practical demonstration for third BDS students in oral pathology.
• Reporting of histopathology slides.

- 11 -
 SYLLABUS OF PART – I

SUBJECT: ORTHODONTICS AND DENTOFACIAL ORTHOPEDICS:

Applied Anatomy:

 Prenatal growth of head:

Stages of embryonic development, origin of head, origin of face, origin of teeth.
 Postnatal growth of head:
Bones of skull, the oral cavity, development of chin, the hyoid bone, general growth of head, face growth.
 Bone growth:
Origin of bone, composition of bone, units of bone structure, schedule of Ossification, mechanical
properties of bone, roentgen graphic appearance of bone.
 Assessment of growth and development:
Growth prediction, growth spurts, the concept of normality and growth, increments of growth, differential
growth, gradient of growth, methods of gathering growth data. Theories of growth and recent advances,
factors affecting physical growth.
 Muscles of mastication:
Development of muscles, muscle change during growth, muscle function, facial development, muscle
function and malocclusion
 Development of dentition and occlusion:
Dental development periods, order of tooth eruption, chronology of permanent tooth formation, periods of
occlusal development, pattern of occlusion.
 Assessment of skeletal age
The carpal bones, carpal x - rays, cervical vertebrae .
 TMJ – Development & its anatomy

Physiology:

 Endocrinology and its disorders

Growth hormone, thyroid hormone, parathyroid hormone, ACTH, pituitary gland hormones, thyroid gland
hormones, parathyroid gland hormones.
 Calcium and its metabolism
 Nutrition-metabolism and their disorders: proteins, carbohydrates, fats, vitamins and minerals.
 Muscle physiology
 Craniofacial Biology
 Bleeding disorders in orthodontics: Hemophilia.
 Saliva
 Tooth structure and PDL
 Sleep physiology and sleep disorder
 Pain Pathways
  Deglutition and Stages
 Swallowing Patterns

Dental Materials:

 Gypsum products: dental plaster, dental stone and their properties, setting reaction etc.

 Impression materials: impression materials in general and particularly of alginate impression material.

 Acrylics: chemistry, composition physical properties

 Composites: composition types, properties setting reaction

 Banding and bonding cements: Zn (P04)2, zinc silicophosphate, Zinc polycarboxylate, resin cements and
glass lonomer cements

 Wrought metal alloys: deformation, strain hardening, annealing, recovery, recrystallization, grain growth,
properties of metal alloys

 Orthodontic arch wires: stainless steel gold, wrought cobalt chromium nickel alloys, alpha &beta titanium
alloys and new wires in orthodontics

 Elastics: Latex and non-latex elastics

 Applied physics, Bioengineering and metallurgy.

 Specification and tests methods used for materials used in Orthodontics

 Survey of all contemporary literature and recent advances in above – mentioned materials.

 Bite registration materials

 Thermoplastic resins

 Magnets

 Soldering and Welding

Genetics:

 Cell structure, DNA, RNA, protein synthesis, cell division

 Chromosomal abnormalities

 Principles of orofacial genetics

 Genetics in malocclusion

 Molecular basis of genetics

 Studies related to malocclusion

 Recent advances in genetics related to malocclusion

 Genetic counseling

 Bioethics and relationship to Orthodontic management of patients.

 Genetics and syndromes

Applied Pharmacology:
  NSAID’s, Prostaglandin, Biphosphanate, Anti-Sialogogues
 Allergies
 Drugs for accelerated orthodontics

Research Methodology and bio statistics:

 Statistical principles

 Data Collection

 Method of presentation

 Method of Summarizing

 Methods of analysis - different tests/errors

 Sampling and Sampling technique

 Experimental models, design and interpretation

 Experimental design

 Animal experimental protocol

 Principles in the development, execution and interpretation of methodologies in Orthodontics

 Critical Scientific appraisal of literature

Pathology:

 Pain

 Inflammation

 Necrosis.

 Osteoporosis

 Wound Healing

 Fracture Healing

 Infection Control in Orthodontics / Sterilization

 Role of local and general factors in the etiology of malocclusion

 Developmental defects of the orofacial structures.

Physical Anthropology:

 Evolutionary development of dentition

 Evolutionary development of jaws
 ORTHODONTICS & DENTOFACIAL ORTHOPEDICS

The training programme in Orthodontics is to structure and achieve the following

four objectives

Knowledge:
1. The dynamic interaction of biologic processes and mechanical forces acting on the
stomatognathic system during orthodontic treatment
2. The etiology, pathophysiology, diagnosis and treatment planning of various common Orthodontic
problems
3. Various treatment modalities in Orthodontics – preventive, interceptive and
corrective.
4. Basic sciences relevant to the practice of Orthodontics
5. Interaction of social, cultural, economic, genetic and environmental factors and their relevance to
management of oro – facial deformities
6. Factors affecting the long-range stability of orthodontic correction and their management
7. Personal hygiene and infection control, prevention of cross infection and safe disposal of hospital
waste, keeping in view the high prevalence of Hepatitis and HIV and other highly contagious
diseases.
Skills:

1. To obtain proper clinical history, methodical examination of the patient, perform essential
diagnostic procedures, and interpret them and arrive at a reasonable diagnosis about the Dento-
facial deformities.
2. To be competent to fabricate and manage the most appropriate appliance – intra or extra oral,
removable or fixed, mechanical or functional, and active or passive – for the treatment of any
orthodontic problem to be treated singly or as a part of multidisciplinary treatment of oro-facial
deformities.
Attitude:

1. Develop an attitude to adopt ethical principles in all aspects of Orthodontic practice.Professional

honesty and integrity are to be fostered
2. Treatment care is to be delivered irrespective of the social status, cast, creed and religion of the
patients.
3. Willingness to share the knowledge and clinical experience with professional colleagues
4. Willingness to adopt, after a critical assessment, new methods and techniques of orthodontic
management developed from time to time based on scientific research, which are in the best
interest of the patient
5. Respect patients’ rights and privileges, including patients right to information and right to seek a
second opinion
6. Develop attitude to seek opinion from allied medical and dental specialists as and when required

Communication Skills:

1. Develop adequate communication skills particularly with the patients giving them the various
options available to manage a particular Dento-facial problem and to obtain a true informed
consent from them for the most appropriate treatment available at that point of time.
2. Develop the ability to communicate with professional colleagues, in Orthodontics or other
specialties through various media like correspondence, Internet, e-video, conference, etc. to
render the best possible treatment.
COURSE CONTENT:

The program outlined, addresses both the knowledge needed in Orthodontics and
allied Medical specialties in its scope.
Spread of the Curriculum:

F:\Uploading_2308021\04-Orthodontics & Dentofacial Orthopedics Part II Syllabus.docx 1

 For second year M.D.S course students need to study following topics and also learn
clinical knowledge by studying different types of malocclusions and various treatment
modalities to treat them successfully

List of the Topics :

OrthodonticHistory:
a. Historical perspective,
b. Evolution of orthodontic appliances,
c. Pencil sketch history of Orthodontic peers
d. History of Orthodontics in India

Concepts of Occlusion and Esthetics:

a. Structure and function of all anatomic components of occlusion,
b. Mechanics of articulation,
c. Recording of masticatory function,
d. Diagnosis of Occlusal dysfunction,
e. Relationship of TMJ anatomy and pathology and related neuromuscular physiology.

Etiology and Classification of Malocclusion:

a. A comprehensive review of the local and systemic factors in the causation of
malocclusion
b. Various classifications of malocclusion

Dentofacial Anomalies:
a. Anatomical, physiological and pathological characteristics of major groups
of developmental defects of the orofacial structures.

Diagnostic Procedures and Treatment Planning in Orthodontics:

a. Emphasis on the process of data gathering, synthesis and translating it into a
treatment plan
b. Problem cases – analysis of cases and its management
c. Adult cases, handicapped and mentally retarded cases and their special problems
d. Critique of treated cases.
Cephalometrics
a. Instrumentation
b. Image processing
c. Tracing and analysis of errors and applications
d. Radiation hazards
e. Advanced Cephalometrics techniques including digital cephalometrics
f. Comprehensive review of literature
g. Video imaging principles and application.
h. CBCT-Cone-beam Computed Tomography Systems .

Practice Management in Orthodontics:

a. Economics and dynamics of solo and group practices
b. Personal management
c. Materials management
d. Public relations

e. Professional relationship

F:\Uploading_2308021\04-Orthodontics & Dentofacial Orthopedics Part II Syllabus.docx 2

 f. Dental ethics and jurisprudence
g. Office sterilization procedures
h. Community based Orthodontics.
i. Orthodontic Office design
j. Office sterilization procedures in pandemic situation
k. Orthodontic office ethics

Paper-II:Clinical
Orthodontics
Myofunctional
Orthodontics:

a. Basic principles
b. Contemporary appliances –design, manipulation and management
c. Case selection and evaluation of the treatment results
d. Review of the current literature.

Dentofacial Orthopedics:
a. Principles
b. Biomechanics
c. Appliance design and manipulation
d. Review of contemporary literature

Cleft lip and palate rehabilitation:

a. Diagnosis and treatment planning
b. Mechanotherapy
c. Special growth problems of cleft cases
d. Speech physiology, pathology and elements of therapy as applied to orthodontics
e. Team rehabilitative procedures.

Biology of tooth movement:

a. Principles of tooth movement-review
b. Review of contemporary literature
c. Applied histophysiology of bone, periodontal ligament
d. Molecular and ultra cellular consideration in tooth movement

Orthodontic / Orthognathic surgery:

a. Orthodontist’s role in conjoint diagnosis and treatment planning
b. Pre and post-surgical Orthodontics
c. Participation in actual clinical cases, progress evaluation and post retention study
d. Review of current literature

Orthodontic treatment techniques

a. History
b. Fixed orthodontics
c. Removable orthodontics
d. Lingual mechano therapy
e. Clear aligner

F:\Uploading_2308021\04-Orthodontics & Dentofacial Orthopedics Part II Syllabus.docx 3

 f. Review of contemporary literature

Ortho / Perio / Prostho/Endo inter relationship:

a. Principles of interdisciplinary patient treatment
b. Common problems and their management

Basic principles of mechanotherapy includes removable appliances and fixed

appliances:
a. Design
b. Construction
c. Fabrication
d. Management
e. Review of current literature on treatment methods and results

Applied preventive aspects in Orthodontics:

a. Caries and periodontal disease prevention
b. Oral hygiene measures

c. Clinical procedures

Interceptive Orthodontics:
a. Principles
b. Growth guidance
c. Diagnosis and treatment planning
d. Therapy emphasis on:
o Dento-facial problems
o Tooth material discrepancies
o Minor surgery for Orthodontics

Evidence Based Orthodontics:

Orthodontic Management of TMJ problems, sleep-apnoea etc.:

Retention and relapse:

a. Mechanotherapy – special reference to stability of results with various procedures
b. Post retention analysis
c. Review of contemporary literature

Recent Advances :
a. Use of implants
b. Lasers
c. Application of F.E.M.
d. Distraction Osteogenesis
e. Invisible Orthodontics
f. 3D imaging Digital Orthodontics, Virtual Treatment Planning
g. CAD-CAM bracket Customization
h. Robotic Wire Bending
i. Accelerated Orthodontics
o Surgical

F:\Uploading_2308021\04-Orthodontics & Dentofacial Orthopedics Part II Syllabus.docx 4

 o Device assisted or mechanical stimulation
o Biochemical Mediators
j. Lingual Orthodontics
k. Recent Advances in Wires

CLINICAL WORK:
Once the basic pre-clinical work is completed in three months, the students can take up
clinical cases and the clinical training.

Each postgraduate student should start with a minimum of 50 fixed orthodontics

cases and 20 removable including myofunctional cases of his/her own.
Additionally he/she should handle a minimum of 25 transferred cases.

The type of cases can be as follows:

 Removable active appliances
 Class-I malocclusion with Crowding
 Class-I malocclusion with bi-maxillary protrusion
 Class-II division – 1
 Class-II division – 2
 Class-III (Orthopedic, Surgical, Orthodontic cases)
 Inter disciplinary cases
 Removable functional appliance cases like activator, Bionator, functional regulator,
twin block and new developments
 Fixed functional appliances – Herbst appliance, jasper jumper etc
 Dento-facial orthopedic appliances like head gears, rapid maxillary expansion,
NiTi expander etc.,
 Appliance for arch development such as molar distalization

 Fixed mechano therapy cases (Begg, PEA, Tip edge, Edgewise, lingual)
 Retention procedures of above treated cases.

F:\Uploading_2308021\04-Orthodontics & Dentofacial Orthopedics Part II Syllabus.docx 5

 Scheme of Examination
Theory
Part – I Basic sciences paper 100 Marks
Part – II Paper –I Paper-II & Paper-III 300 Marks
(100 Marks for each paper)
Written examination shall consist of Basic Sciences Paper (Part-I) of three hours duration and should be
conducted at the end of First year of MDS course. Part-II Examination will be conducted at the end of
Third year of MDS course. Part-II Examination will consist of Paper-I, Paper-II & Paper-III, each of three
hours duration. Paper-I & Paper-II shall consist of two long answer questions carrying 25 marks each
and five questions carrying 10 marks each. Paper- III will be on Essays. In Paper-III three Questions will
be given and student has to answer any two questions. Each question carries 50 marks. Questions on
recent advances may be asked in any or all the papers. Distribution of topics for each paper will be as
follows: *

PART-I: Applied Basic Sciences: Applied anatomy, Physiology, Dental Materials, Genetics, Pathology,
Physical Anthropology, Applied Research methodology, Bio-Statistics and Applied Pharmacology
PART-II
Paper I: Orthodontic history, Concepts of occlusion and esthetics, Child and Adult Psychology, Etiology
and classification of maloclusion, Dentofacial Anomalies, Diagnostic procedures and treatment planning
in Orthodontics, Practice management in Orthodontics
Paper II : Clinical Orthodontics
Paper III : Essays (descriptive and analyzing type questions)
*The topics assigned to the different papers are generally evaluated under those sections. However a
strict division of the subject may not be possible and some overlapping of topics is inevitable. Students
should be prepared to answer overlapping topics.
B. Practical / Clinical Examination : 200 Marks

Exercise No: 1 50 Marks

Functional Case :
Selection of case for functional appliance and recording of construction bite. Fabrication and delivery of
the appliance the next day.
Exercise No: 2 : 50 Marks
1. III stage with auxiliary springs/Wire bending of any stage of fixed orthodontics
(OR)
2. Bonding of SWA brackets and construction of suitable arch wire.

Exercise No. 3 75 Marks

Display of records of the
treated cases (Minimum of 5
cases)

Exercise No: 4 25 Marks

Long case discussions

Time allotted for each exercise:

F:\Uploading_2308021\04-Orthodontics & Dentofacial Orthopedics Part II Syllabus.docx 6

 No Exercise Marks Approximate
allotted Time
1 Functional appliance 50 1 hour (each
day)

2 III stage mechanics / 50 1 hr 30 min

Bonding and arch wire fabrication

3 Display of case records 75 1 hour
(a minimum of 5 cases to be presented along with all the
patients and records)
4 Long cases 25 2 hours

Note: The complete records of all the cases should be displayed

(including transferred cases)
A. Viva Voce : 100 Marks
i. Viva-Voce examination: 80 marks
All examiners will conduct viva-voce conjointly on candidate’s comprehension, analytical approach,
expression, interpretation of data and communication skills. It includes all components of course
contents. It includes presentation and discussion on dissertation also.

ii. Pedagogy Exercise: 20 marks

A topic be given to each candidate in the beginning of clinical examination. He/she is asked to make a
presentation on the topic for 8-10 minutes

F:\Uploading_2308021\04-Orthodontics & Dentofacial Orthopedics Part II Syllabus.docx 7

 SYLLABUS OF PART – I

SUBJECT: PEDIATRIC DENTISTRY

Applied Anatomy

Development of oral cavity

Development of maxillary and mandible jaws
Development of palate
Development of tooth
Development of primary and permanent teeth
Development of muscle of mastication
Development of muscles of facial expression
Development of spaces associated with head, neck and face region
Development of course of arteries and nerves and lymphatic drainage supplying to head neck and
face regions
Development of tempro-mandibular joint, movement and its application to development of
harmonious balanced occlusion
Development of tongue
Development of salivary glands
Theories of teeth eruption
Developmental anomalies in teeth and supporting structure

Physiology and Biochemistry

Fluid and electrolyte balance in children

Blood & its constituent
Function of blood, blood grouping
Blood diseases in children
Vital parameters in children
Endocrine system
Mastication and Deglutition
Pain pathways and its management
Saliva- composition, function and its role in maintaining equilibrium of oral cavity

Pathology

Inflammation
Necrosis and gangrene
 Allergy and hypersensitivity reaction
Benign and malignant neoplasm in children
Pathology of oral soft tissue and hard tissue
Pathology of dental caries and periodontal diseases
Attrition, abrasion and erosion of teeth
Oral manifestation of systemic diseases
Developmental and inflammatory cysts
Shock
Infectious diseases in children
Repair and regeneration of pulpo-dentinal complex
Immunity- type and immunoglobulins
Mechanism of repair of initial caries (white spot lesion)

Microbiology

Normal oral flora of oral cavity of children

Role of micro-organisum in dental caries and periodontal diseases
Methods of Sterilization, disinfections and asepsis
Hospital waste management
Microflora related to others oral infections

Pharmacology

Drugs used for general anesthesia, sedation and conscious sedation in children
Local anesthesia in pediatric patients
Analgesics, antipyretics and antibiotics in children
Vitamin A, B complex, C, D and E,
Trace element in prevention of dental caries
Fluoride therapy (local and systemic for preventing dental caries)
Dentifrices

Research Methodology and Bio Statistics:

Statistics
Biostatistics as applied to dentistry and research
Sampling and sampling technique
Application of various probability tests
Data analysis and interpretation
Reliability, Sensitivity and specificity diagnosis test and measurement
Epidemiology of oral diseases
Different types of epidemiological studies
Research strategies
Designing of experimental study
Errors measurement in experiment

Growth & Development

Growth and development – prenatal development of cranium, face, jaws, teeth and supporting
structures
Cephalometric evaluation of growth
Dimensional changes in dental arches
Development of occlusion (primary and permanent dentition)

Dental Plaque

Development of plaque
Oral microflora of plaque
Definition, composition, initiation, pathogenesis, biochemistry,
Different Plaque hypothesis
Acquired pellicle- its role in oral ecosystem

Genetics

Cell Biology, DNA, RNA, protein synthesis, cell division

Chromosomal abnormalities
Principals of oral facial genetics
Genetics of dental caries and periodontal diseases
Genetics risks and bioethenic
Modes of inheritance, hereditary traits in families
 PEDIATRIC DENTISTRY

PAPER-I: CLINICAL PAEDODONTICS

1. CONSCIOUS SEDATION, DEEP SEDATION & GENERAL ANESTHESIA IN
PEDIATRICDENTISTRY
 Indications and Contraindications
 Pre-treatment Documentation and Assessment
 Techniques of conscious sedation, deep sedation & general anesthesia
 Monitoring of the Patient
 Recovery and Discharge
 Other Drugs
 Synergic & Antagonistic Actions of Various Drugs Used in Children
 Local anaesthesia

2. GINGIVAL & PERIODONTAL DISEASES IN CHILDREN

 Normal Gingiva & Periodontium in children.
 Gingival & Periodontal diseases – Etiology, Classification, Risk factors,
Pathogenesis, Systemic effects, Prevention & Management
 Maintenance of oral hygiene in infant and children

3. PEDIATRIC OPERATIVE DENTISTRY

 Principles of operative dentistry
 Restorative materialsused inpast and present; along with recent advances in
tooth-coloured materials.
 Modifications required for cavity preparation in primary and young permanent
teeth
 Various isolation techniques
 Restoration of carious primary, young permanent and permanent teeth in
childrenusing various restorative materials
 Atraumatic Restorative Treatment
 Various crowns used in pediatric dentistry- (Stainless steel, Zirconia
crowns,Pedo-strip crowns, Polycarbonate & Resin Crowns / Veneers, fibre post
systems etc)

4. PEDIATRIC ENDODONTICS
 Diagnosis of pulpal diseases and their management
 Endodontic treatment for primary teeth- Pulp capping, Pulpotomy,
Pulpectomy
 Endodontic treatment for young permanent teeth and permanent teeth -
 Pulp capping, Pulpotomy, Pulpectomy, Apexogenesis, Apexification,
Regenerative endodontic therapy
 Controversies & recent concepts in pediatric endodontics
 Recent advances in diagnostic aids for assessment of pulpal vitality
 Endodontic instruments (Hand and Rotary) for Primary, young permanent
and permanent teeth
 Endodontic irrigants
 Irrigation devices
 Sonic and ultrasonic agitation
 Root canal filling materials for primary teeth
 Recent advances in pediatric endodontics

5. TRAUMATIC INJURIES IN CHILDREN

 Traumatic dental injury- Prevalence, Causes and Predisposing factors,
classification, history and examination
 Sequelae & reaction of teeth to trauma
 Traumatic injuries to anterior teeth and its management
 Management of jaw fractures in children
 Sports related dental injuries and its management.

6. INTERCEPTIVE ORTHODONTICS
 Concepts of occlusion and esthetics: Structure and function of all
anatomiccomponents of occlusion, mechanics of articulations, recording of
masticatoryfunction, diagnosis of Occlusal dysfunction, TMJ anatomy,
related neuromuscular physiology and pathology.
 Myofunctional appliances: Basic principles, contemporary appliances:
Design & Fabrication
 Fixed and removable orthodontic appliances: Basic principles,
contemporary appliances: Design & Fabrication
 Case selection & diagnosis in interceptive Orthodontics (Cephalometrics,
Image processing, Tracing, Radiation hygiene, Video imaging & advance
Cephalometric techniques)
 Recognition and management of normal and abnormal developmental
occlusions in primary, mixed and permanent dentitions in children (Occlusal
Guidance)
 Biology of tooth movement: A comprehensive review of the principles of
teeth movement. Review of contemporary literature. Histopathology of bone
and Periodontal ligament, Molecular and ultra-cellular consideration in tooth
movement
  A comprehensive review of the local and systemic factors in the causation
of malocclusion
 Space Management:
o Etiology, Diagnosis of space problems, Space analysis, Biomechanics
o Objectives, Classification, Requisites
o Indications and Contraindications
o Advantages and Disadvantages
o Space Maintainers and Space Regainers
o Planned extraction in interceptive orthodontics

7. ORAL HABITS IN CHILDREN

 Definition, Etiology& Classification
 Clinical features of digit sucking, tongue thrusting, mouth breathing &
various others oralhabits in children affecting oro-facial structure
 Management of oral habits in children

8. DENTAL CARE OF CHILDREN WITH SPECIAL NEEDS

 Definition, Etiology, Classification, Clinical features and behavioural
aspects of specially abled children(physically, mentally and medically
handicapped child)
 Dental considerations of special children
 Management of infant/children with cleft lip and palate (feeding plate ,
naso-alveolar moulding, Speech rehabilitation)
 Oral manifestations of Systemic Conditions in Children & their Management
 Acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (AIDS)
 Management of children with genetic disorders

9. MINOR ORAL SURGICAL PROCEDURES IN CHILDREN

 Exodontia
 Minor oral surgical procedures in children for-
o Frenal abnormalities,
o Odontogenic infections
o Cystic lesions in children
o Odontogenic and non-odontogenic tumors
o Abnormalities of oral structures
o Others infections in children

10. DENTAL RADIOLOGY AS RELATED TO PEDIATRIC DENTISTRY

 Oral examination, diagnosis and treatment planning- case history taking
  Principles of Radiographic Examination
 Conventional Intraoral Radiographic Techniques
 Digital Radiography
 Extraoral Radiography

11. PEDIATRIC ORAL PATHOLOGICAL CONDITIONS IN CHILDREN

 Developmental Disturbances of Teeth and Surrounding Structures

12. CONGENITAL ABNORMALITIES IN CHILDREN

 Definition, Classification, Clinical features and Management

13. MEDICAL EMERGENCIES IN CHILDREN

 Vital Signs
 Basic Life Support
 Various medical emergencies and
 Management

14. PROSTHETIC MANAGEMENT IN PEDIATRIC DENTISTRY

15. ADVANCES IN PEDIATRIC DENTISTRY

16. DENTAL MATERIALS USED IN PEDIATRIC DENTISTRY

17. SETTING UP OF PEDODONTIC & PREVENTIVE DENTISTRY CLINIC

18. LASERS IN PEDIATRIC DENTISTRY

PAPER-II:
PREVENTIVE AND COMMUNITY DENTISTRY AS APPLIED TO PEDIATRIC
DENTISTRY

1. CHILD PSYCHOLOGY
 Introduction to paediatric dentistry
 Fear, anxiety, apprehension & its management
 Theories of child psychology
 Social and emotional development of child

2. BEHAVIOR MANAGEMENT
 Definitions,Fundamentals of Behaviour Management
 Behaviour Patterns of the Child
 Behaviour Modification/ Guidance Techniques-
 Non- pharmacological and pharmacological behaviour management methods

3. CHILD ABUSE & DENTAL NEGLECT

4. PREVENTIVE PEDODONTICS
 Chair side preventive measures for dental diseases
 Epidemiology of dental caries in India
 Saliva and oral health
 Pit and fissure sealants
 Non-restorative management of dental caries- Silver diamine fluoride
 Caries Vaccine
 Oral hygiene measures
 Dental Health education
 Diet and Dental Caries
 Diet Counselling
5. CARIOLOGY
 Historical background
 Dental Caries- Definition, etiology and classification
 Caries pattern in primary, young permanent and permanent teeth
 Pathogenesis of dental caries
 Caries risk assessment
 Caries activity tests
 Sugar studies
 Diagnosis of dental caries
 Early childhood caries-Definition, Etiology, Pathogenesis, Clinical features,
Complications and its management
 Rampant caries
 Role of diet and nutrition in Dental Caries
 Dietary modifications & Diet counselling
 Subjective & objective methods of Caries detection with emphasis on Caries prediction,
Caries susceptibility & their clinical Applications

6. DENTAL HEALTH EDUCATION & SCHOOL DENTAL HEALTH PROGRAMMES

 Dental health concepts
 Effects of civilization and environment
 Dental Health delivery system
 Public Health measures related to children along with principles of Pediatric and
Preventive Dentistry
7. EPIDEMIOLOGY
 Concepts
 Methods of recording & evaluation of various oral diseases
 Various national & global trends of epidemiology of oral diseases

8. FLUORIDE IN DENTISTRY
Historical background of fluoride
Availability and Physiology and mechanism of fluoride
Systemic fluorides
Topical fluorides
Forms of fluoride
Fluoride toxicityand Management
Fluoride analytical methods
Defluoridation

9. VACCINATION SCHEDULE

10. PROBIOTICS

11. INFECTION CONTROL IN PEDIATRIC DENTISTRY

12. MEDICO-LEGAL CONSIDERATIONS

13. COUNSELLING IN PEDIATRIC DENTISTRY

14. PRINCIPLES OF BIO-STATISTICS & RESEARCH METHODOLOGY &

UNDERSTANDING OF COMPUTERS ANDPHOTOGRAPHY

PAPER-III: ESSAYS (DESCRIPTIVE AND ANALYZING TYPE QUESTIONS)

The topics assigned to the different papers are generally evaluated under those sections.
However, a strict division of the subject may not be possible and some overlapping of topics
is inevitable. Students should be prepared to answer overlapping topics
Any topic from Paper I and paper II can be
 MUHS EXAM

SCHEME 1 OF EXAMINATION

MDS Part II

Paper I / Paper II Total marks 75

Questions Marks

Long answer 40 marks

Question 1 20 marks

Question 2 20 marks

Short answer 35 marks

Question 1 7 marks

Question 2 7 marks

Question 3 7 marks

Question 4 7 marks

Question 5 7 marks

PAPER III

ESSAY 75 marks

Question 1

OR

Question 2
 MUHS EXAM

SCHEME 2 OF EXAMINATION

MDS Part II

Paper I / Paper II Total marks 100

Questions Marks

Long answer 50 marks

Question 1 25 marks

Question 2 25 marks

Short answer 50 marks

Question 1 10 marks

Question 2 10 marks

Question 3 10 marks

Question 4 10 marks

Question 5 10 marks

PAPER III

ESSAY 100 marks

Attempt any 2 questions

Question 1 50 marks

Question 2 50 marks

Question 3
 SCHEME 3 OF EXAMINATION

MDS Part II

Paper I / Paper II Total marks 100

Questions Marks

Long answer 60 marks

Question 1 20 marks

Question 2 20 marks

Question 3 20 marks

Short answer 40 marks

Question 1 8 marks

Question 2 8 marks

Question 3 8 marks

Question 4 8 marks

Question 5 8 marks

PAPER III

ESSAY 100 marks

Attempt any 2 questions

Question 1 50 marks

Question 2 50 marks

Question 3
 SYLLABUS OF PART – I

SUBJECT: PERIODONTICS

Applied Anatomy:

 Evolution and Development of the Periodontium

a. Evolution of Tooth and Related Structures

b. Parts of Periodontium

c. Development of Cementum

d. Development of Alveolar Bone

e. Development of Periodontal Ligament

f. Development of Gingiva

g. Molecular Components of Periodontal development

 Micro and Macro structural anatomy and biology of the periodontal tissues

a. Gingiva

Macro – parts of gingiva, sulcus, GCF

Micro – epithelium, connective tissue: cells, fibers, ECM

b. Alveolar Bone, Periodontal ligament, cementum

 Age Changes in the Periodontal Tissues

a. Effects of Aging on Periodontium

b. Effects of Aging on the Progression of Periodontal disease

c. Effects of Aging on Response to Treatment of Periodontal Tissues

 Anatomy of the Periodontium

a. Macroscopic and microscopic anatomy

b. Blood supply of the Periodontium

c. Lymphatic system of the Periodontium

d. Nerves of the Periodontium

 Temporomandibular Joint, Maxillae and Mandible

a. Structure of Joint- Articular Surfaces, Ligaments, Articular Disc

b. Relations of Temporomandibular Joint

c. Blood Supply

d. Nerve Supply

e. Movements

 Nerves of Periodontics

a. Trigeminal nerve: Origin, Motor and sensory Root, Branches and Type of Nerve

b. Maxillary Nerve: Origin, Branches, Supply

c. Mandibular Nerve: Origin, Branches, Supply

d. Applied Anatomy

 Tongue:

a. Structure: parts of tongue, papillae of tongue

b. Muscles of tongue

c. Histology of tongue,
d. Development,
e. Blood and nerve supply

 Hard and Soft Palate

a. Clinical Anatomy:

b. Hard Palate - Structure: Margins and Surfaces

i) Vessels and Nerves: Arteries, Veins, Nerves and Lymphatics

c. Soft palate - Structure: Margins and Surfaces

i) Muscles of Soft Palate

ii) Vessels and Nerves: Arteries, Veins, Nerves and Lymphatics

iii) Action of muscles of Soft palate

d. Development of Palate

e. Clinical Significance and Applied Aspects

 Pharynx, Larynx and Tonsils

a. Pharynx: Structure and parts of pharynx, Waldeyer’s Lymphatic Ring

b. Larynx:

i) Structure: Cartilages and Muscles

ii) Movements

iii) Clinical significance: Mechanism of Speech

c. Tonsils: Structure, Vessels and Nerve Supply, Development

 Muscles of Mastication

a. Classification: Main and Accessory Muscles of Mastication

b. Main Muscles of Mastication: Origin, Insertion, Nerve Supply and Blood Supply

c. Action of Muscles of Mastication

d. Clinical Significance and Applied Aspects

 Salivary Glands

a. Classification of Salivary Glands

b. Anatomy of Salivary Glands

c. Development of Salivary Gland

d. Saliva

e. Clinical Significance and Applied Aspects

 Paranasal Air Sinuses:

a. Classification, Development
b. Maxillary sinus: anatomy, embryology, functional importance, clinical evaluation,
applied aspects

 Nervous System, Cranial Nerves

 Mandible:
a. Anatomy

b. Attachment and relations

c. Foramina and relations to nerves and vessels

d. Ossification
e. Age changes
 Maxilla:

a. Anatomy

b. Attachment and relations

c. Normal features

d. Ossification

e. Age changes

 Facial Muscles

a. Classification and types

b. Nerve supply

c. Muscles producing common facial expression

d. Clinical aspects

 Lymphatic System
a. Components of Lymphatic system
b. Functions of Lymphatic system
c. Lymphatic drainage of Head and Neck
d. Clinical Aspects

 Physiology:
1. Blood: composition, cells, functions, disorders

2. Anemia- types, polycythemia

3. Respiratory system – Acknowledge of the respiratory disease which are a cause of

periodontal diseases (periodontal Medicine)

4. Cardiovascular system

a. Cardiac cycle, cardiac output, venous return

b. Blood pressure

c. Normal ECG

d. Shock

5. Endocrinology – thyroid, pancreas, adrenaline, growth hormones, sex hormones and

hormonal influences on Periodontium

6. Gastrointestinal system
a. Salivary secretion – composition, function & regulation

7. Nervous System

a. Pain pathways

b. Local anesthesia: Classification, composition, mechanism, complications

 c. Tongue – Taste buds, primary taste sensation & pathways for sensation

8. Cell: Structure, function, injury, transport of substances

9. Food and Nutrition

10. Mastication and deglutition

11. Immunity: Types, Cells

12. Allergy and hypersensitivity reactions

13. Haemostasis- mechanism, clotting factors, coagulation, disorders, haemostatic agents

14. Anticoagulant and anti-platelet agents

15. Salivary glands: secretions and mechanism of salivary secretion

16. Calcium and phosphate metabolism, formation of bone and teeth, regulation of vitamin D

17. Liver- physiology and functions

18. Thyroid

a. Synthesis and secretion of thyroid hormones

b. Regulation of thyroid hormones
c. Physiology and functions

19. Tongue
a. Taste buds
b. Pathway for taste
c. Taste sensations and chemical constituents
d. Taste transduction
e. Applied physiology: Abnormalities of taste sensation

20. Diabetes Mellitus

a. Classification
b. Complication
c. Pathogenesis
d. 2 way relation between diabetes mellitus and periodontitis

Biochemistry:

1.Carbohydrates: classification, functions, metabolism

2. Proteins: functions, metabolism

3. Lipids: classification, functions, metabolism

4. Vitamins: classification, functions, dietary sources, deficiency

5. Diet and nutrition and Periodontium

a. Macro and micro-nutrients and its effect on periodontium

6. Biochemical tests and their significance

7.Calcium and Phosphorus

8. Connective Tissue:

a. Collagen-function

b. Structure

c. Biosynthesis and abnormalities

9. Diet and Nutrition

a. Definition of diet and nutrition

b. Balanced diet

c. Components of food and their deficiency diseases

d. Nutrient value of food

e. Food pyramid

10.PCR and its Application

a. Principle

b. Steps

c. Advantages and limitations

11.ELISA and its Application

a. Principle

b.Methods

c.Type

d.Application
12.Basal Metabolic Rate
a. Definition
b. Measurement
c. Normal values of BMR
d. Factors affecting BMR

Pathology:
1.Cell structure and metabolism

2.Inflammation- details of cellular events, chemical mediators: promoters and suppressors

3.Repair, regeneration, necrosis and degeneration

4.Immunity system, organs, cells and their functions

5.Hypersensitivity reactions

6.Circulatory disturbances – edema, haemorrhage, shock, thrombosis, embolism, infarction

 and hypertension

7.Disturbances of nutrition, vitamin physiology and deficiencies

8.Diabetes mellitus, classification, etiology, pathogenesis, risk factors, clinical features,

complications, diagnosis

9.Cellular growth and differentiation, regulation

10. Lab investigations

11.Neoplasia, Metastasis

a. Nomenclature and classification of tumors

b. Etiology and pathogenesis

c. Pathologic diagnosis of cancer

12.Healing

a. Regeneration

b. Repair

c. Wound healing

d. Healing after periodontal surgeries

13.Blood Disorders
a. Hemorrhagic diathesis due to vascular disorders
b. Hemorrhagic diathesis due to platelet disorders
c. Hemorrhagic diathesis due to fibrolytic defects
d.Disseminated intravascular coagulation (DIC)
e.Coagulation disorders
f. Investigations of haemostatic function

Microbiology:

1.General bacteriology: morphology, staining techniques, bacterial anatomy, growth and multiplication of
bacteria, bacterial nutrition

2.Sterilization and disinfection, sterilizing agents, testing of disinfectants

3.Culture media,

a.Types of culture media

b.Culture methods

4. Immunology:

a.Types of immunity

b.Antigens and antibodies

 c.Antigen-antibody reactions

d.Complement system

e.Structure

f.Functions of immune system

5.Infection:

a. Classification

b.Sources of infection

c.Methods of transmission

d.Predisposing factors for microbial pathogenicity

e.Types of infectious diseases

6.Systemic bacteriology with special emphasis on oral microbiology – staphylococci, genus actinomyces and
periodontal microbiology

7.Virology

a.General properties of viruses

b.Classification and nomenclature

c. Cultivation methods

d.Viral infections, pathogenesis of viral infections, host response to viral infections

e. Herpes, Hepatitis, virus, HIV virus

8.Mycology
a. Candidiasis

9.Applied microbiology

10.Healthcare associated infections

11. Recent advances in Diagnostic microbiology

12. Antibiotic sensitive testing

Bio medical waste management

Pharmacology:
1.General pharmacology

a.Definitions – pharmacokinetics with clinical applications, routes of administration

including
local drug delivery in Periodontics
b.Adverse drug reactions and drug interactions
2.Detailed pharmacology of

a.Analgesics – opioid and non -opioid

 b.Local anesthetics

c.Haematinics and coagulants, Anticoagulants

d.Vitamin D and Calcium preparations

e.Antidiabetic drugs

f.Steroids

g.Antibiotics

h.Antihypertensive

i.Immunosuppressive drugs and their effects on oral tissues

j. Antiepilectic drugs

3.Brief pharmacology, dental use and adverse effects of

a.General anaesthetics

b.Antipsychotics

c.Antidepressants

d.Anxiolytic drugs

e.Sedatives

f.Antiepileptics

g.Antihypertensives

h.Anti anginal drugs

i.Diuretics

j.Hormones

k.Pre-anesthetic medication

4.Drugs used in Bronchial asthma cough

5.Drug therapy of

a.Emergencies

b.Seizures

c.Anaphylaxis

d.Bleeding

e.Shock

f.Diabetic ketoacidosis

g.Acute addisonian crisis

6.Dental Pharmacology
 a.Antiseptics

b.Astringents
c.Sialogogues

d.Disclosing agents

e.Antiplaque agents

f.Anticalculus Agents

g.Dentifrices

7.Fluoride pharmacology

8.Vaccine

Research Methodology and Biostatistics:

1. Introduction, definition and branches of biostatistics

2. Collection of data, sampling, types, bias and errors

3. Compiling data-graphs and charts

4. Measures of central tendency (mean, median and mode), standard deviation and variability

5. Tests of significance (chi square test, ’t’test , Z-test, ANOVA)

6. Null hypothesis

7. Presentation of data, measures of dispersion

8. Research methodology - introduction, purpose, categories, scientific

methods,
hypothesis formulations, writing protocol

9. Correlation, regression

10. Index- requirement, classification, Gingival and Periodontal Indices

11. Clinical trials

12. Epidemiology- aims and principles, tools of measurement, methods, uses

Survey procedures, types of survey, uses, steps in surveying

 PERIODONTOLOGY

CLINICAL AND THERAPEUTIC PERIODONTOLOGY AND ORAL IMPLANTOLOGY

1 Classification of periodontal diseases & conditions affectingperiodontium.

a) Gingivaldiseases
b) Periodontitis
c) Necrotizing periodontaldiseases
d) Abscesses ofperiodontium
e) Periodontitis associated with endodonticlesions
f) Developmental or acquired deformities &conditions
2 Fundamentals in the methods of periodontal diseaseepidemiology.
a) Need forepidemiology
b) Epidemiologic studydesigns
c) Causes/ etiology
d) Diagnosis
3 Defence mechanisms ofgingiva.
a) Sulcularfluid
b) Leukocytes in the dentogingivalarea
c) Saliva
4 Periodontalmicrobiology.
a) Oral cavity from a microbe'sperspective
b) Bacteria and their biofilm mode ofliving
c) Characteristics of biofilm bacteria (life in “slimecity”)
d) Bacterial transmission andtranslocation
e) Nonbacterial inhabitants of the oralcavity
f) Microbiologic specificity of periodontaldiseases
g) Transition from health todisease
h) Virulence factors ofperiodontopathogens
i) Future advances in periodontal microbiology

5 Basic concepts of inflammation andimmunity.

a) Inflammation
b) Acute inflammation is self-limited
c) Unresolved chronic inflammation in periodontaldiseases
d) Systemiclink
e) Therapeutic actions of resolutionmediators

G:\Uploading_2308021\03-Periodontology Part II Syllabus.docx11

 6 Microbial interactions with the host in periodontaldiseases.
a) Microbiologic aspects of the microbial –hostinteraction
b) Immunologic aspects of the microbial interaction with thehost
c) Microbiology and immunology in gingivalhealth
d) Microbiology and immunology in periodontaldisease

7 Pathogenesis of plaque associated periodontaldiseases.

a) Histopathology of periodontaldisease
b) Inflammatory responses in theperiodontium
c) Linking pathogenesis to clinical signs ofdisease
d) Resolution of inflammation
e) Immune responses in periodontalpathogenesis
f) Concept of hostsusceptibility
8 Dental calculus.
a) Supragingival&subgingivalcalculus
b) Clinical appearance, prevalence anddistribution
c) Calculus formation andstructure
d) Attachment to tooth surfaces andimplants
e) Calculuscomposition
f) Clinicalimplications
g) Materia alba, food debris, dentalstains
h) Role of iatrogenic and other localfactors
9 Genetic factors associated with periodontaldisease.
a) Introduction anddefinitions
b) Evidence for the role of genetics inperiodontitis
c) Heritability of aggressive periodontitis (early onsetperiodontitis)
d) Heritability of chronic periodontitis (adultperiodontitis)
e) The twinmodel
f) Human genes andpolymorphisms
g) Genetics in relation to disease ingeneral
h) A major disease gene associated withperiodontitis
i) Modifying disease genes in relation toperiodontitis
j) Cytokine genepolymorphisms
k) IL-1 genepolymorphisms
l) TNF-a genepolymorphisms
m) IL-10 genepolymorphisms
n) FCYR genepolymorphisms
10 Influence of systemic conditions on theperiodontium.
a) Endocrine disorders and hormonalchanges

G:\Uploading_2308021\03-Periodontology Part II Syllabus.docx22

 b) Hematologic disorders and immunedeficiencies
c) Cardiovasculardiseases
d) Geneticdisorders
e) Stress and psychosomaticdisorders
f) Nutritionalinfluences
g) Medications
h) Other systemicconditions
11 Role of environmental factors in the etiology of periodontaldisease.
12 Stress and periodontal diseases.
13 Occlusion and periodontal disease.
a) Adaptive capacity of the periodontium to occlusalforces
b) Trauma fromocclusion
c) Stages of tissue response to increased occlusalforces
d) Effects of insufficient occlusalforce
e) Reversibility of traumaticlesions
f) Effects of excessive occlusal forces on dentalpulp
g) Relationship between plaque induced periodontal diseases and trauma from
occlusion
h) Pathologic toothmigration
14 Smoking and tobacco in the etiology of periodontaldiseases.
a) The smoking epidemic
b) Effects of smoking on the prevalence and severity of periodontaldiseases
c) Effects of smoking on the etiology and pathogenesis of periodontaldisease
d) Effects of smoking on the response to periodontaltherapy
e) Effects of smoking cessation on periodontal treatmentoutcomes
15 AIDS andperiodontium.

a) Epidemiology &demographics
b) Classification &staging
c) Pathogenesis
d) Oral and periodontal manifestations of human immunodeficiencyvirus
e) Infection
f) Dental treatmentcomplications
g) Gingival and periodontaldiseases
h) Periodontal treatmentprotocol

G:\Uploading_2308021\03-Periodontology Part II Syllabus.docx33

 16 Periodontalmedicine.

a) Pathobiology of periodontitis
b) Focal infection theoryrevisited
c) Evidence –based clinicalpractice
d) Subgingival environment as a reservoir ofbacteria
e) Periodontal disease andmortality
f) Periodontal disease and coronary heart disease/atherosclerosis
g) Periodontal disease andstroke
h) Periodontal disease and diabetesmellitus
i) Periodontal disease and pregnancyoutcome
j) Periodontal disease and chronic obstructive pulmonarydisease
k) Periodontal disease and acute respiratoryinfection
l) Periodontal medicine and clinicalpractice
17 Gingivalinflammation.

a) Stage I gingival inflammation: the initiallesion

b) Stage II gingival inflammation: the earlylesion
c) Stage III gingival inflammation: the establishedlesion
d) Stage IV gingival inflammation: the advancedlesion
e) Clinical features ofgingivitis
f) Course andduration
18 Gingivalenlargement.

a) Inflammatoryenlargement.
b) Drug-induced gingivalenlargement
c) Idiopathic gingivalenlargement
d) Enlargements associated with systemicdiseases
e) Neoplasticenlargements
f) Falseenlargements
19 Acute gingivalinfections.

a) Necrotizing ulcerativegingivitis
b) Primary herpeticgingivostomatitis
c) Pericoronitis

G:\Uploading_2308021\03-Periodontology Part II Syllabus.docx44

 20 Desquamative gingivitis and oral mucous membranediseases.

a) Chronic desquamativegingivitis
b) Diagnosis of desquamative gingivitis: a systematicapproach
c) Diseases that can manifest as desquamativegingivitis
d) Drug-relatederuptions
e) Miscellaneous conditions that mimic desquamativegingivitis
21 Gingival diseases in thechildhood.

a) Periodontium of the primarydentition

b) Periodontal changes associated with normaldevelopment
c) Gingival diseases ofchildhood
d) Periodontal diseases ofchildhood
e) Gingival manifestation of systemic disease inchildren
f) Oral mucosa in childhooddiseases
g) Therapeutic considerations for pediatricpatients
22 Periodontalpocket.

a) Classification
b) Clinicalfeatures
c) Pathogenesis
d) Histopathology
e) Periodontal diseaseactivity
f) Site specificity
g) Pulp changes associated with periodontalpockets
h) Relationship of attachment loss and bone loss to pocketdepth
i) Area between base of pocket and alveolarbone
j) Relationship of pocket tobone
k) Periodontalabscess
l) Lateral periodontalcyst
23 Bone loss and patterns of bonedestruction.

a) Bone destruction caused by the extension of gingivalinflammation

b) Bone destruction caused by trauma fromocclusion
c) Bone destruction caused by systemicdisorders
d) Factors determining bone morphology in periodontaldisease
e) Bone destruction patterns in periodontaldisease

G:\Uploading_2308021\03-Periodontology Part II Syllabus.docx55

 24 Masticatory systemdisorders.

a) Temporomandibularjoint
b) Muscles and nerves of the masticatorysystem
c) Centricrelation
d) Biomechanics of the masticatorysystem
e) Dysfunction anddeterioration
f) Orofacialpain
g) Comprehensiveevaluation
h) Diagnostic decisionmaking
25 Chronicperiodontitis.

a) Clinicalfeatures
b) Risk factors fordisease
c) Pathogenesis
26 Aggressiveperiodontitis.
a) Overview
b) Historicalbackground
c) Classification and clinicalcharacteristics
d) Epidemiology
e) Pathobiology and riskfactors
f) Therapeutic considerations in aggressive periodontitispatients
27 Necrotising ulcerativeperiodontitis.

a) Clinicalfeatures
b) Microscopicfindings
c) Patients with HIV/AIDS
d) Etiology of necrotizing ulcerativeperiodontitis
e) Malnutrition
28 Clinicaldiagnosis.

a) Overall appraisal of thepatient

b) Health history, dental history, photographicdocumentation
c) Clinicalexamination
d) Tactile periodontalexamination
e) Periodontalcharting
f) Examination of the teeth andimplants
g) Radiographicexamination
h) Laboratory aids to clinical diagnosis
G:\Uploading_2308021\03-Periodontology Part II Syllabus.docx66
 i) Periodontaldiagnosis
j) Assessment of biofilm control and patienteducation

29 Radiographic and other aids in the diagnosis of periodontaldiseases.

a) Normal interdentalbone
b) Radiographictechniques
c) Bone destruction in periodontal disease
d) Radiographic appearance of periodontaldisease
e) Digital intraoralradiography
f) Advanced diagnostictechniques
30 Interdisciplinaryapproaches.

a) Orthodonticconsiderations

 Benefits of orthodontictherapy

 Pre-orthodontic osseoussurgery

 Orthodontic treatment of osseousdefects

 Orthodontic treatment of gingivaldiscrepancies

 Implant interactions inorthodontics

b) Endodonticconsiderations

 Factors initiating pulpal and apicaldiseases

 Classification of pulpal and apicaldiseases

 Biologic effects of pulpal infection on periodontaltissues

 Biologic effects of periodontal infection on the dentalpulp

 Effects of endodontic pathosis on development of retrogradeperi-implantitis

 Interactions between extra-radicular infection and theperiodontium

 Differential diagnosis of pulpal and periodontalinfection

31 Riskassessment.

a. Definitions
b. Risk factors for periodontaldisease
c. Risk determinants/background characteristics for periodontaldisease
d. Risk indicators for periodontaldiseases
e. Risk markers/predictors for periodontaldisease
f. Clinical risk assessment for periodontaldisease

G:\Uploading_2308021\03-Periodontology Part II Syllabus.docx77

 32 Determination ofprognosis.

a. Definitions
b. Types ofprognosis
c. Factors in determination ofprognosis
d. Prognosis of specific periodontaldiseases
e. Determination and reassessment ofprognosis
f. Relationship between diagnosis &prognosis
33 Treatmentplan.

a. Overall treatmentplan
b. Sequence oftherapy
c. Explaining the treatment plan to thepatient
34 Rationale for periodontaltreatment.

a. Factors that affecthealing

b. Healing after periodontaltherapy
c. Periodontalreconstruction
35 Levels of clinical significance.

a. Tangible versus intangiblebenefits

b. Size of treatmenteffect
c. Defining four levels of clinicalsignificance
36 Generalprinciplesofanti-infectivetherapywithspecialemphasisoninfectioncontrol
in periodontalpractice.
a. Definitions
b. Systemic administration ofantibiotics
c. Serial and combination antibiotictherapy
d. Local deliveryagents
e. Local delivery of antimicrobial agents &peri-implantmucositis/implantitis
37 Oralmalodor.

a. Semantics and classification

b. Epidemiology
c. Etiology
d. Fundamentals of malodor detection
e. Diagnosis ofmalodor
f. Treatment of oralmalodor
38 Bruxism and itstreatment
G:\Uploading_2308021\03-Periodontology Part II Syllabus.docx88
 39 Periodontalinstrumentation.

a. Classification of periodontalinstruments
b. Principles of periodontalinstrumentation
c. Principles of scaling & rootplaning
d. Sharpening of periodontalinstruments.
40 Plaquecontrol.

a. Thetoothbrush
b. Poweredtoothbrushes
c. Dentifrices
c) Toothbrushingmethods
d) Interdental cleaningaids
e) Gingival massage
f) Oral irrigationdevices
g) Cariescontrol
h) Chemical plaque biofilm control with oralrinses
i) Disclosingagents
j) Frequency of plaque biofilm removal
k) Patient motivation andeducation
41 Periodontal management of HIV infectedpatients.
a. Periodontal treatmentprotocol
b. Oralcandidiasis
d) Oral hairyleukoplakia
e) Kaposi’ssarcoma
f) Bacillaryangiomatosis
g) Non-specific oral ulcerations and recurrentaphthae
h) Periodontal disease in HIV positiveindividual
42 Occlusal evaluation and therapy in the management of periodontaldisease.
a) Terminology
b) Occlusal function anddysfunction
c) Biologic basis of occlusalfunction
d) Pathogenesis
e) Parafunction
f) Clinical evaluation procedures
g) Interpretation & treatmentplanning
h) Occlusaltherapy
43 Role of orthodontics as an adjunct to periodontaltherapy.

G:\Uploading_2308021\03-Periodontology Part II Syllabus.docx99

 a) Benefits of orthodontictherapy
b) Pre-orthodontic osseoussurgery
c) Orthodontic treatment of osseousdefects
d) Orthodontic treatment of gingivaldiscrepancies
e) Implant interactions inorthodontics
44 Special emphasis on precautions and treatment for medically compromised
patients.
45 Periodontalsplints.
46 Dentinalhypersensitivity.
47 Periodontal surgicalphase.

a) General principles of periodontalsurgery

b) Outpatient surgery
c) Hospital periodontalsurgery
d) Surgicalinstruments
48 Surgical anatomy of periodontium and relatedstructures.
a) Mandible
b) Maxilla
c) Exostoses
d) Muscles
e) Anatomic spaces
49 Gingivalcurettage.
a) Rationale
b) Indications
c) Procedure
d) Healing after scaling andcurettage
e) Clinical appearance after scaling and curettage
50 Gingivectomytechnique.
a) Indications &contraindications
b) Sugicalgingivectomy
c) Healing after surgicalgingivectomy
d) Gingivectomy by electrosurgery
e) Hearing after gingivectomy by electrosurgery
f) Laser gingivectomy
g) Gingivecomy by chemosurgery

51 Treatment of gingivalenlargements.
a) Treatment of chronic inflammatoryenlargement
G:\Uploading_2308021\03-Periodontology Part II Syllabus.docx1010
 b) Treatment of periodontal and gingivalabcesses

c) Treatment of drug associated gingivalenlargement

d) Treatment of leukemic gingivalenlargement

e) Treatment of gingival enlargement inpregnancy

f) Treatment of gingival enlargement inpuberty

g) Recurrence of gingival nlargement

52 Periodontalflap.
a) Classification offlaps
b) Design of theflap
c) Incisions
d) Elevation of theflap
e) Suturingtechniques
f) Healing after flapsurgery
53 Flap technique for pockettherapy.
a) Modified WidmanFlap
b) Undisplacedflap
c) Apically displacedflap
d) Flaps for reconstructivesurgeries
e) Distal molarsurgeries
54 Osseous surgery (Resective andRegenerative).
a) Resective

 Selection of treatmenttechnique

 Rationale

 Normal alveolar bonemorphology

 Terminology

 Factors in selection of resective osseoussurgery

 Examination and treatmentplanning

 Methods of resective osseoussurgery

 Osseous resectiontechnique

 Flap placement andclosure

 Postoperativemaintenance

 Specific osseous reshapingsituations

b) Regenerative

 Assessment of new attachment & periodontalreconstruction

 Reconstructive surgicaltechniques
G:\Uploading_2308021\03-Periodontology Part II Syllabus.docx1111
  Factors that influence therapeuticsuccess

 Future directions for periodontalregeneration

55 Furcation: Involvement & treatment.
a) Etiologicfactors
b) Diagnosis and classification of furcationdefects
c) Local anatomicfactors
d) Anatomy of the bonylesions
e) Indices of furcationinvolvement
f) Treatment
g) Nonsurgicaltherapy
f) Surgicaltherapy
g) Prognosis
56 Periodontic plastic and estheticsurgery.
a) Terminology
b) Objectives
c) Cause of marginal tissuerecession
d) Factors that affect surgicaloutcome
e) Techniques to increase attachedgingiva
f) Techniques to deepen thevestibule
g) Techniques to remove thefrenum
h) Techniques to improveaesthetics
i) Tissue engineering
j) Criteria for selection oftechniques
57 Host modulation.
a) Systemically administeredagents
b) Locally administeredagents
c) Host modulation & comprehensive periodontal management
d) Sub-antimicrobial doseDoxycycline
e) Emerging host modulatorytherapies
f) Host modulation factors in systemicdisorders
58 The periodontic- endodonticcontinuum.
a) Rationale fortherapy
b) Sequence oftreatment
c) Control of activedisease
d) Preprostheticsurgery
e) Biologicconsiderations
f) Esthetic tissue management
g) Occlusal considerations in restorativetherapy

G:\Uploading_2308021\03-Periodontology Part II Syllabus.docx1212

 h) Special restorativeconsiderations
59 Periodontalmicrosurgery.

a) Philosophy of periodontalmicrosurgery
b) Advantages of microsurgery
c) Magnification systems
d) Microsurgicalsutures
e) Esthetic periodontalmicrosurgery
f) Microsurgicalknots
60 Lasers in periodontal and peri-implanttherapy.
a) Laser physics and biologicinteractions
b) Laser applications inperiodontics
c) Lasers in the management of periodontitis
d) Lasers in the management ofperi-implantitis
e) Complications and risks of lasertherapy
61 Leukocyte- and platelet-richfibrin.
a) Introduction
b) General characteristics of l-PRFmembranes
c) Extraoral applications ofl-PRF
d) L-PRF in the treatment of periodontal bonydefects
e) L-PRF for ridgepreservation
f) L-PRF and sinus floorelevation
g) L-PRF and implantsurgery
h) L-PRF for periodontal mucogingivalsurgery
i) L-PRF and medication-related osteonecrosis of thejawbone
j) Initial observations on thePRF-block
62 Periodontal maintenancephase.

a) Supportive periodontaltreatment

 Rationale for supportive periodontaltreatment

 Maintenanceprogram

 Classification of post treatment patients and riskassessment

 Referral of patients to theperiodontist

 Tests for diseaseactivity

 Maintenance for dental implantpatient

a) Results of periodontaltreatment
G:\Uploading_2308021\03-Periodontology Part II Syllabus.docx1313
  Prevention and treatment of gingivitis

 Prevention and treatment of loss ofattachment

 Tooth mortality
63 Future directions and controversial questions in periodontaltherapy.

a) Future directions for infectioncontrol

b) Research directions in regenerativetherapy
c) Future directions in anti-inflammatorytherapy
d) Future directions in measurement of periodontaldiseases
64 Oralimplantology.

a) Introduction and historicalreview

b) Biological, clinical and surgical aspects of dentalimplants
c) Biomaterials
d) Peri-implant anatomy, biology, andfunction
e) Implant geometry(macrodesign)
f) Implant surface characteristics(microdesign)
g) Hard tissueinterface
h) Soft tissueinterface
i) Clinical comparison of teeth andimplants
j) Clinical evaluation of the implantpatient
k) Case types andindications
l) Pretreatmentevaluation
m) Risk factors andcontraindications
n) Post treatmentevaluation
o) Diagnosis and treatmentplanning
p) Standardprojections
q) Cross-sectionalimaging
r) Interactive “simulation” softwareprograms
s) Patientevaluation
t) Clinical selection of diagnosticimaging
65 Implantsurgery.

a) Basic implant surgicalprocedures

 General principles of implantsurgery

 Two-stage “submerged” implantplacement

 One-stage “non-submerged” implantplacement

G:\Uploading_2308021\03-Periodontology Part II Syllabus.docx1414
 b) Localized bone augmentation and implant sitedevelopment

 Guided boneregeneration

 Localized ridge augmentation

 Alveolar ridge preservation/management ofextractions

c) Advanced implant surgicalprocedures

 Maxillary sinus elevation and boneaugmentation

 Supracrestal/vertical boneaugmentation

 Growth factors in boneaugmentation

d) Esthetic management of difficult cases (minimally invasiveapproach)

 Surgical strategy for predictableaesthetics

 Immediate implant placement for predictability andaesthetics

 Surgical management of difficult cases (minimally invasiveapproach)

e) Dental implantmicrosurgery
f) Piezoelectric bonesurgery

 Clinical characteristics of ultrasoniccutting

 Clinical applications & advanced clinicalapplications

 Digitally assisted implantsurgery

66 Prosthetic aspects of dentalimplants.

a) Impression makingtechniques
b) Implantconsiderations
c) Abutment/prosthesis considerations for singleunits
d) Management of partially edentulous implant treatment in the aestheticzone
e) Fully edentulous: prostheticconsiderations
67 Implant-related complications andfailures.

 Definitions of implant survival and success

 Types and prevalence of implantcomplications

 Types of dentalimplants

 Surgicalcomplications

 Biologiccomplications

 Complications related to augmentationprocedures

 Complications related to placement and loadingprotocols

G:\Uploading_2308021\03-Periodontology Part II Syllabus.docx1515
  Prosthetic or mechanicalcomplications

 Aesthetic and phoneticcomplications

68 Diagnosis and treatment of peri-implantcomplications.

 Incidence

 Etiology

 Technical implantfailures

 Diagnosis of peri-implant tissuebreakdown

 Removal of failedimplants

 Initial phase of peri-implantitistreatment

 Surgical techniques for treatment ofperi-implantitis

 Maintenance

 Special emphasis on plaque control measures in implantpatients

 Maintenancephase.
69 Management of medical emergencies in periodontalpractice.
70 Evidence based decision making in clinicalpractice .

G:\Uploading_2308021\03-Periodontology Part II Syllabus.docx1616

 Scheme of Examination
A) Theory
Part – I Basic sciences paper 100 Marks
Part – II Paper –I Paper-II, aper-III
300 Marks
(100 Marks for each paper)
Written examination shall consist of Basic Sciences Paper (Part -I) of three hours duration and should
be conducted at the end of First year of MDS course. Part-II Examination will be conducted at the
end of Third year of MDS course. Part-II Examination will consist of Paper-I, Paper-II & Paper-III,
each of three hours duration. Paper-I , Paper-II and Paper III shall consist of two long answer
questions carrying 25 marks each and five questions carrying 10 marks each. Distribution of
topics for each paper will be as follows:
Part- I: Applied Basic Sciences: Applied Anatomy, Physiology, & Biochemistry, Pathology,
Microbiology, Pharmacology, Research Methodology and Biostatistics.
Part-II
Paper I: Normal Periodontal structure, Etiology & Pathogenesis of Periodontal diseases,
epidemiology as related to Periodontics
Part-II Paper II: Periodontal diagnosis, therapy & Oral Implantology Paper III: Essays
(descriptive and analyzing type questions)

*The topics assigned to the different papers are generally evaluated under those sections. However, a
strict division of the subject may not be possible and some overlapping of topics is inevitable. Students
should be prepared to answer overlapping topics.
B) Practical / Clinical Examination: 200 Marks
The clinical examination shall be of two days duration
1st day
Case Discussion

 Long Case- One

 Short case –One
 Periodontal surgery – Periodontal Surgery on a previously prepared case after getting
approval from the Examiners

2nd day
Post-surgical review and discussion of the case treated on the 1st day Presentation of dissertation &
discussion
All the examiners shall participate in all the aspects of clinical examinations / Viva Voce Distribution of
Marks for Clinical examination (recommended)

a) Long Case discussion 75 marks

b) I short case 25 marks
c) Periodontal surgery 1. Anesthesia 10
2. Incision 20
3.Post Surgery Evaluation 25
4. Sutures 10
5. Pick up (if any) 10

Post – operative review 25

Total 200
C. Viva Voce: 100 Marks
i. Viva-Voce examination: 80 marks
All examiners will conduct viva-voce conjointly on candidate’s comprehension, analytical approach,
G:\Uploading_2308021\03-Periodontology Part II Syllabus.docx1717
 expression, interpretation of data and communication skills. It includes all components of course
contents. It includes presentation and discussion on dissertation also.

ii. Pedagogy Exercise: 20 marks

A topic will be given to each candidate in the beginning of clinical examination. He/she is asked to make
a presentation on the topic for 8-10 minutes.

G:\Uploading_2308021\03-Periodontology Part II Syllabus.docx1818

G:\Uploading_2308021\03-Periodontology Part II Syllabus.docx1919
G:\Uploading_2308021\03-Periodontology Part II Syllabus.docx2020
G:\Uploading_2308021\03-Periodontology Part II Syllabus.docx2121
G:\Uploading_2308021\03-Periodontology Part II Syllabus.docx2222
G:\Uploading_2308021\03-Periodontology Part II Syllabus.docx2323
 SYLLABUS OF PART – I

SUBJECT : PROSTHODONTICS AND CROWN & BRIDGE

Applied Anatomy

 Anatomy of the stomatognathic system. - Maxilla, Mandible, Maxillary sinus, Face ( muscles &
nerve supply) , Trigeminal ganglion, Cranial nerves, Salivary glands, Larynx, Pharynx, Trachea and
esophagus, Muscles of mastication, Maxillary artery, TemperoMandibular Joint, Mandibular Nerve,
sympathetic & parasympathetic ganglion,

 Anatomy of T.M.J. its movements, disorders and its management.

 Anatomy physiology and function of the masticator system.

Embryology

 Derivatives of Neural Crest, Pharyngeal arches

Growth & Development Genetics

 Growth and development of face jaws and teeth.

 Growth and development of Maxilla, Mandible ,Face, Hard Palate, Soft Palate, Tongue

 Consequences and management of age changes in the dentition

 Principles of orofacial genetics

 molecular basis of genetic defects

Immunology

 Basic principles of immunity, antigen and antibody reactions

 Immunological disorders,

 Sensitivity, Delayed Hypersensitivity

 Cell mediated immunity

Physiology

 Mastication, swallowing, Speech and deglutition mechanism.

 Salivary glands and saliva,

 Healing of wound & Fracture

 Blood: Composition , volume , functions , blood groups , RBC and haemoglobin , WBC: Structure and
Functions , Platelets : Function and applied aspects and Plasma Proteins
  Physiology of pain , sympathetic and para-sympathetic nervous systems , physiology of pulpal pain and non
odontogenic pain , pain disorders-typical and atypical

Nutrition & Biochemistry

 Role of Vitamin A, C and B complex in oral mucosal and periodontal health.

 Role of Calcium and Vitamin D in growth and development of teeth and jaws.

 Balanced diet

 Nutrition in geriatric patients

Pathology & Microbiology

 Pathology of the periodontal, Pulp and peri-apical tissues

 Pathology of dental tissues and oral cavity.

 Dental plaque in relation to dental disease.

 Sensory perception and pain

 Oral pre-cancerous lesions.

 Malignant lesions of the oral cavity and head and neck region.

 Developmental anomalies of face, jaws and teeth

 Microbiological & virological effects & its treatment options.

 Biomedical waste disposal system

 Sterilization & Disinfection

 Staphylococci, Streptococci, Fungi- Candida ,Tuberculosis

 Blood Coagulation with applied aspects , Blood Transfusion , shock, lymph and applied aspects ,
Inflammation , Repair and regeneration , necrosis and Gangrene , Neoplasm , classification of tumors and
carcinogenesis.

Virology

 Microbiological & virological effects & its treatment options.

 HIV, Hepatitis, Herpes Virus

Applied Pharmacology

 Medical conditions and medications affecting dental treatment in Geriatric patients

 Antihypertensive

 NSAIDS
  Anti-Histaminics

 Anti-cholinergic

 Adrenergic drugs

 Antibiotics

 Antacids

 Anticoagulants

 Dosage and mode of administration of drugs

 Brief Pharmacology of : drugs acting on Central Nervous System, general anesthetics ,hypnotics,
analeptics and tranquilizers, Local anesthetics, antibiotics, analgesics and antipyretics, antiseptics,
styptics , Sialogogues and anti-sialogogues, Haematinics , Cortisone , ACTH , Insulin and other ant
diabetics

 Chemotherapy and Radiotherapy

Applied Dental Materials:

 Physical, mechanical and biological properties of modem dental materials.

 Gypsum products used in prosthodontics.

 Die and counter die materials.

 Various resins used in prosthodontics including Denture base materials

 Impression materials used in Dentistry.

 Duplicating materials.

 Metals and alloys used in Dentistry.

 Dental Waxes including inlay casting wax

 Investments.

 Casting machines procedures and defects.

 Soldering and Welding

 Cements - restorative and looting

 Composites - various generations and system in order of development.

Composition, uses and manipulation.

 Tissue conditioner and soft reline.

 Porcelain Including Porcelain fused to Metal alloys.

  Porcelain furnace, firing and techniques.

 Mechanics of tooth cutting (burs and points)

 Cutting, polishing and finishing agents.

 Implant materials.

 Bonding agents – enamel and dentin bonding agents and various other

adhesives.

 CAD-CAM System & material science & digital scanning systems

Research Methodology and Biostatistics

 Scope and need for statistical application to biological data.

 Definition of selected terms- scale of measurements related to statistics.

 Methods of collecting data.

 Presentation of data statistical diagrams and graphs

Applied Dental Anatomy and Histology

 Biology and anatomy of dental tissues

 Biology and physiology enamel, dentine Cementum, pulp and periodontium

 Anatomy and histology of oral mucous membrane.

 Anatomy of T.M.J. its movements, disorders and its management.

 Anatomy physiology and function of the masticator system.

 Normal occlusion, development of occlusion in deciduous, mixed and permanent

 Dentitions.

Oral Pathology & Oral Microbiology

 Pathology of the periodontal, Pulp and peri-apical tissues

 Pathology of dental tissues and oral cavity.

 Dental plaque in relation to dental disease.

 Sensory perception and pain

 Oral pre-cancerous lesions.

 Malignant lesions of the oral cavity and head and neck region.

 Developmental anomalies of face, jaws and teeth

 Microbiological & virological effects & its treatment options.

 Regressive changes of teeth

 Bacterial ,viral and mycotic infections of oral cavity

 Dental caries

 Physical and chemical injuries of the oral cavity

 Oral manifestations of metabolic and endocrinal disturbances

 Diseases of blood and blood forming organisms in relation to oral cavity

 Diseases of skin, nerves and muscles in relation to oral cavity

 Anatomy of TMJ, its movements , disorders and its management

 PROSTHODONTICS AND CROWN & BRIDGE

1. NON-SURGICAL AND SURGICAL

METHODSOFPROSTHODONTICSANDIMPLANTOLOGY

A) Complete Denture Prosthesis

1 Definitions
2 Terminologies, G.P.T., Boucher’s clinical dental terminology
3 The Cranio Mandibular system and its functions,
4 Reasons for loss of teeth,
5 Consequences of loss of teeth
6 Treatment modality with various restorations and replacements
7 Edentulous Predicament,
i Biomechanics of the edentulous state,
iiSupportmechanism for the natural dentition and complete dentures,
iii Biological considerations,
iv Functional and Para functional considerations,
v Esthetic, behavioral and adaptive responses,
vi Temporomandibular jointschanges.
8 Effects of aging of edentulous patients
i. Aging populationdistributionedentulism in old age
ii. Impact of age on edentulous mouth – Mucosa, Bone, saliva, jaw movements in old
age,
taste and smell, nutrition, aging, skin and teeth, concern for personal appearance in
ldage

9 Sequelae caused by wearing complete denture

i. Mucosal reactions,
ii. Altered taste perception,
iii Burning mouth syndrome,
iv Gagging,
v. Residual ridge (reduction) resorption,
vi. Denture stomatitis,
vii Flabby ridge,
viiiDenture irritation hyperplasia,
ix Traumatic Ulcers,
x Oral cancer in denture wearers,
xi Nutritional deficiencies,
xii Masticatory ability and performance,
xiii Nutritional status and

g:\uploading_2308021\01 prosthodontics part ii syllabus.docx1

 xiv Masticatoryfunctions.
10 Temporomandibulardisorders in edentulous patients –
i. Epidemiology,
ii Etiology and
iii Management,
iv Pharmacotherapy,
v Physical andBio-behavioralmodalities
11 Nutrition Care for the denture wearing patient –
i. Impact of dental status onfood intake
ii. Gastrointestinal functions
iii. Nutritional needs and status of older adults
iv. Calcium and bone health
v. Vitamin and herbal supplementation
vi. Dietary counseling
vii. Risk factor for malnutrition in patients with dentures
viii. When teeth areextracted
12 Preparing patient for complete denture patients –
i. Diagnosis and treatment planning for edentulous and partially edentulous patients
- Familiarity with patients
- Principles of perception
- Health questionnaires
- Identification data
- Problem identification
- Prognosis and treatment identification data
- Problem identification,
Ii Prognosis and treatment planning
- Contributing history
- Patient’s history
- Social information
- Medical status
- Systemic status with special reference to debilitating diseases
- Diseases of the joints
- Cardiovascular disorders
- Diseases of the skin
- Neurological disorders
- Oral malignancies

g:\uploading_2308021\01 prosthodontics part ii syllabus.docx2

 - Climacteric
- Use of drugs
- Mental attitude
- Psychological changes
- Adaptability
- Geriatric changes
- Intra oral changes
- Intra oral health (mucus membrane, alveolar ridges, palate and vestibular
sulcus and dental health)

13 Data collection and recording (visual observation, radiography, palpation,

measurement of sulci or fossae, extra oral measurement, the vertical dimension of
occlusion, diagnostic casts).
14 Specific observations
i. Existing dentures
ii. Soft tissue health
iii. Hard tissue health – teeth, bone
15 Biomechanical considerations
i. Jaw relations
ii. Border tissues
iii. Saliva
iv. Muscular development (muscle tone, neuromuscular co-ordination, tongue,
cheek and lips).
16 Interpreting diagnostic findings and treatment planning
17 Immediate Denture
a) Advantages
b) Disadvantages
c) Contraindications
d) Diagnosis, treatment planning
e) Prognosis
f) Explanation to the patient
g) Oral examinations
h) Examination of existing prosthesis
i) Tooth modification
j) Prognosis
k) Referrals/adjunctive care
l) Oral prophylaxis and other treatmentneeds.
18 First visit-

g:\uploading_2308021\01 prosthodontics part ii syllabus.docx3

 a) Preliminary impressions and diagnostic casts,
b) Management of loose teeth
c) Custom trays
d) Final impressions and master casts
e) Two tray or sectional custom impression tray
f) Location of posterior limit and jaw relation records
g) Setting of the posterior denture teeth / verifying jaw relations and the patient
try in.
19 Laboratory phase
a) Setting of anterior teeth
b) Wax contouring
c) Flasking and boil out
d) Processing and finishing

20 Surgical templates
a) Surgery and immediate denture insertion
b) Post operative care and patient instructions, subsequent service for the patient
on the immediate denture.
21 Over dentures (tooth supported complete dentures)
a) Indications and treatment planning
b) Advantages and disadvantages
c) Selection of abutment teeth
d) Loss of abutment teeth
e) Tooth supported complete dentures
f) Non-coping abutments
g) Abutment with copings
h) Abutments with attachments
i) Submerged vital roots
j) Preparations of the retainedteeth.
22 Single Dentures:
a) Single Mandibular denture to oppose natural maxillary teeth,
b) Single complete maxillary denture to oppose natural Mandibular teeth to
oppose a partially edentulous Mandibular arch with fixed prosthesis
c) Partially edentulous Mandibular arch with removable partial dentures
d) Opposing existing complete dentures
e) Preservation of the residual alveolar ridge, necessity for retaining maxillary
teeth and preventing mentaltrauma.

g:\uploading_2308021\01 prosthodontics part ii syllabus.docx4

 23 Pre prosthetic surgery
24 Non surgical methods
i. Rest for the denture supporting tissues
ii. Occlusal correction of the old prosthesis
iii. Good nutrition
iv. Conditioning of the patientsmusculature
A Surgical methods –

 Correction of conditions, that preclude optimal prosthetic function

i. Hyperplastic ridge

ii. Epulis fissuratum

iii. Papillomatosis

iv. Frenular attachments

v. Pendulous maxillary tuberosities

vi. Ridge augmentation

vii. Maxillary and mandibular oral implants

viii. Corrections of congenital deformities

ix. Discrepancies in jaw size

x. Relief of pressure on the mental foramen

xi. Enlargement of denture bearing areas

xii. Vestibuloplasty

xiii. Ridge augmentation

xiv. Replacement of tooth roots with Osseo integrated dentureimplants.

Implant supported Prosthesis for partially edentulous patients –Science of

Osseo integration, clinical protocol (diagnostic,surgical and prosthetic) for
treatment with implant supported over dentures, managing problems and
complications. Implant Prosthodontics for edentulous patients: current and future
directions.
Implant supported prosthesis for partially edentulous patients – Clinical and
laboratory protocol: Implant supported prosthesis, managing problems and
complications

i. Introduction and Historical Review

ii. Biological, clinical and surgical aspects of oral implants o Diagnosis
and treatment planning
iii. Radiological interpretation for selection of fixtures
iv. Splints for guidance fort surgical placement of fixtures.

g:\uploading_2308021\01 prosthodontics part ii syllabus.docx5

 v. Surgical andIntra oral plastic surgery, if any Guided bone and Tissue
regeneration consideration for implants fixture.
vi. Implant supported prosthesis for complete edentulism and partial
edentulism o Occlusion for implant supported prosthesis.
vii. Peri-implant tissue and Management of peri-implantitis
viii. Maintenance and after care.
ix. Management of failed restoration.
x. Work authorization for implant supported prosthesis – definitive
instructions, legal aspects, delineation of responsibility.
25 Art of communication in the management of the edentulous predicament
i. Communication–scope
ii. A model of communication, why communication is important? What are the
elements of effective communication? Special significance of doctor /
patient communication
iii. Doctor behavior
iv. The iatro sedative (doctor & act of making calm) recognizing and
acknowledging the problem
v. Exploring and identifying the problem
vi. Interpreting and explaining the problem
vii. Offering a solution to the problem for mobilizing their resources to operate
in a most efficient way
viii. Recognizing and acknowledging the problem
ix. Interpreting and explaining the problem
x. Offering a solution to the problem.
26 Materials prescribed in the management of edentulous patients –
i. Denture base materials
ii. General requirements of biomaterials for edentulous patients
iii. Requirement of an ideal denture base
iv. Chemical composition of denture base resins
v. Materials used in the fabrication of prosthetic denture teeth
vi. Requirement of prosthetic denture teeth
vii. Denture lining materials and tissue conditioners
viii. Cast metal alloys as denture bases – base metal alloys.
27 Articulators – Evolution of concepts
i. Classification
ii. Selection
iii. Limitations
iv. Precision

g:\uploading_2308021\01 prosthodontics part ii syllabus.docx6

 v. Accuracy and sensitivity
vi. Functions of the articulator and their uses
vii. Recent advancements including virtual articulator
28 Fabrication of complete dentures
i. Complete denture impressions–muscles of facial expressions and
anatomical landmarks, support, retention, stability, aims and objectives of
preservation, support, stability, aesthetics, and retention.
ii. Impression materials and techniques – need of 2 impressions the
preliminary impression and final impressions. Preliminary and final
impressions, impression making, custom tray and refining the custom tray,
preparing the tray to secure the final impression, making the final
impression, boxing impression and making the casts
iii. Developing an analogue / substitute for the maxillary denture bearing area
– anatomy of supporting structures – mucous membrane, hard palate,
residual ridge, shape of the supporting structure and factors that influence
the form and size of the supporting bones, incisive foramen, maxillary
tuberosity, sharp spiny process, torus palatinus,
iv. Anatomy of peripheral or limiting structures, labial vestibule, Buccal
vestibule, vibrating lines.
v. Developing an analogue / substitute for the Mandibular denture bearing
area- anatomy of supporting structure, crest of the residual ridge, buccal
shelf, shape of
Supporting structure, mylohyoid ridge, mental foramen, genial tubercles,
torus mandibularis, Anatomy of peripheral or limiting structure – labial
vestibule, Buccal vestibule, lingual border, mylohyoid muscle,
retromylohyoid fossa, sublingual gland region, alveolingual sulcus,
Mandibular impressions – preliminary impressions, custom tray, refining,
preparing the tray\, final impressions.
29 Mandibular movements, Maxillo mandibular relations and concepts of occlusion
–

i. Gnathology,
ii. Identification of shape and location of arch form–Mandibular and maxillary
occlusion rims, level of occlusal plane and recording of trail denture base,
tests to determine vertical dimension of occlusion, interocclusal & centric
relation records.
iii. Biological and clinical considerations in making jaw relation records and
transferring records from the patients to the articulator
iv. Recording of Mandibular movements – influence of opposing tooth
contacts, temporomandibular joint, muscular involvements, neuromuscular

g:\uploading_2308021\01 prosthodontics part ii syllabus.docx7

 regulation of Mandibular motion, the envelope of motion, rest position.
v. Maxillo – Mandibular relations – the centric, eccentric, physiologic rest
position, vertical dimension, occlusion,
vi. Recording methods – mechanical, physiological,
vii. Determining the horizontal jaw relation – Functional graphics, tactile or
interocclusal check record method, Orientation / sagittal relation records,
Arbitrary / Hinge axis and face bow record, significance and requirement,
principles and biological considerations and securing on articulators.
30 Selecting and arranging artificial teeth and occlusion for the edentulous patient
–
i. Anterior tooth selection, posterior tooth selection, and principles in
arrangement of teeth, and factors governing the position of teeth –
horizontal & vertical relations.
ii. The inclinations and arrangement of teeth for aesthetics, phonetics and
mechanics – to concept of occlusion.
31 The Try in –

i. Verifying vertical dimension

ii. Centric relation
iii. Establishment ofposterior palatal seal
iv. Creating a facial and functional harmony with anterior teeth
v. Harmony of spaces of individual teeth position
vi. Harmony with sex
vii. Personality and age of the patient
viii. Co-relating aesthetics and incisal guidance.

32 Speech considerations with complete dentures & speech production –

i. Structural and functional demands,
ii. Neuropsychological background,
iii. Speech production and the roll of teeth and other oral structures
– Bilabial soundslabiodental(s) sounds
– Linguodental sounds
– Linguoalveolarsound
– Articulatoriccharacteristics
– Acoustic characteristics
– Auditory characteristics
– Linguopalatal and linguoalveolar sounds
– Speech analysis and prosthetic considerations.
33 Waxing contouring and processing the dentures their fit and insertion and after
care –
i. Laboratory procedure–

g:\uploading_2308021\01 prosthodontics part ii syllabus.docx8

 – Wax contouring
– Flasking andprocessing
– Laboratory remount procedures
– Selective grinding
– Finishing and polishing.
ii. Critiquing the finished prosthesis –
– Doctors evaluation
– Patients evaluation
– Friends evaluation
– Elimination of basal surface errors
– Errors in occlusion
– Interocclusal records for remounting procedures – verifying centric relation,
eliminating occlusal errors.
iii. Special instructions to the patient – appearance with new denture,
mastication with new dentures, speaking with new dentures, oral hygiene
with dentures, preservation of residual ridges and educational material for
patients, maintaining the comfort and health of the oral cavity in the
rehabilitated edentulous patients. Twenty-four hours oral examination and
treatment and (preventive) Prosthodontic
– periodontic recall for oral examination 3 to 4 months intervals and yearly
intervals.

B Prosthodontic treatment for partially edentulous patients – Removable partial

Prosthodontics

Scope, definition and terminology

 Classification of partially edentulous arches -
requirementsofanaccept ablemethodofclassification,
 Kennedy’sclassification
 Applegate’s rules for applying the Kennedy classification
Components of RPD–
i) Major connector–mandibular andmaxillary
ii) Minor connectors- design
 Functions & form and location of major and minor connectors
 Tissue stops
 Finishing lines
 Reaction of tissue to metalliccoverage
iii) Rest and rest seats – form of the Occlusal rest and rest seat,
 Interproximal Occlusal rest seats

g:\uploading_2308021\01 prosthodontics part ii syllabus.docx9

  Internal Occlusal rests
 Possible movements of partial dentures
 Support for rests
 Lingual rests on canines and incisor teeth
 Incisal rest and restseat.
iv) Direct retainers- Internal attachments &extracoronal direct retainers.
 Relative uniformity of retention
 Flexibility of clasp arms
 Stabilizing reciprocal clasp
 Criteria for selecting a given clasp design
 The basic principles of clasp design
 Circumferential clasp, bar clasp, combination clasp and other type
ofretainers.
v) Indirect Retainers – denture rotation about an axis,
 Factors influencing effectiveness of indirect retainers
 Forms of indirect retainers
 Auxiliary Occlusal rest
 Canine extensions from Occlusal rests, canine rests
 Continuous bar retainers and linguoplates
 Modification areas, rugae support, direct – indirectretention

vi) Teeth and denture bases – types,

 Materials,
 Advantages and dis-advantages,
 Indications and contraindications and clinical use.
vii) Principles of removable partial Denture design –
 Bio mechanical considerations,
 The factors influencing after mouth preparations
 Occlusal relationship of remaining teeth
 Orientation of Occlusal plane
 Available space for restoration
 Arch integrity
 Tooth morphology
 Response of oral structure to previous stress
 Periodontal conditions
 Abutment support
 Tooth supported and tooth and tissue supported,

g:\uploading_2308021\01 prosthodontics part ii syllabus.docx10

  Need for indirect retention
 Clasp design
 Need for rebasing
 Secondary impression
 Need for abutment tooth modification
 Type of major connector
 Type of teeth selection
 Patients past experience
 Method of replacing single teeth or missing anterior teeth.
 Difference between tooth supported and tissue supported partial
dentures, essentials of partial denture design
 Components of partial denture design,
 Tooth support
 Tissue support
 Stabilizing components
 Guiding planes
 Use of splint bar for denture support
 Internal clip attachments
 Overlay abutment as support for a denture base
 Use of a component partially to gain support.
a. Education of patient
b. Diagnosis and treatmentplanning
c. Design, treatment sequencing and mouthpreparation
d. Surveying –
 Description of dental surveyor
 Purposes of surveying
 Aims and objectives in surveying of diagnostic cast and master cast
 Final path of insertion
 Factors that determine path of insertion and removal
 Recording relationofcasttosurveyor
 Measuringamountofretentivearea
 Blockingof master cast – paralleled blockout, shaped blockout,
arbitrary blockout and relief.

e. Diagnosis and treatment planning –

 Infection control and cross infection barriers –
 Clinical and laboratory and hospital waste management
 Objectives of prosthodontic treatment

g:\uploading_2308021\01 prosthodontics part ii syllabus.docx11

  Records
 Systemic evaluation
 Oral examination, preparation of diagnostic cast
 Interpretation of examination data
 Radiographic interpretation
 Periodontal considerations
 Caries activity
 Prospective surgical preparation
 Endodontic treatment
 Analysis of occlusal factors
 Fixed restorations
 Orthodontic treatment
 Need for determining the design of components
 Impression procedures and occlusion
 Need for reshaping remaining teeth
 Reduction of unfavorable tooth contours
 Differential diagnosis: fixed or removable partial dentures
 Choice between complete denture and removable partial dentures,
choice ofmaterials
f. Preparation of Mouth for removable partial dentures –Oral surgical
preparation

 Conditioning of abused and irritated tissues

 Periodontal preparation – objectives of periodontal therapy
 Periodontal diagnosis

 Control therapy
 Periodontalsurgery.
g. Preparation of Abutment teeth –Classification of abutment teeth
 Sequence of abutment preparations on sound enamel or existing
restorations
 Conservative restorations using crowns
 Splinting abutment teeth
 Utilization
 Temporary crowns to be used asabutment.
h. Impression Materials and Procedures for Removable Partial Dentures –
 Rigid materials
 Thermoplastic materials

g:\uploading_2308021\01 prosthodontics part ii syllabus.docx12

  Elastic materials
 Impressions of the partially edentulous arch
 Tooth supported; tooth tissue supported
 Individual impressiontrays
i. Support for the Distal Extension Denture Base –Distal extension
 Removable partial denture
 Factors influencing the support of distal extension base
 Methods of obtaining functional support for the distal extensionbase.
j. Laboratory Procedures –Duplicating a stone cast
 Waxing the partial denture framework
 Anatomic replica patterns
 Spruing
 Investing
 Burnout
 Casting and finishing of the partial denture framework
 Making record bases
 Occlusion rims
 Making a stone occlusal template from a functional occlusal record
 Arranging posterior teeth to an opposing cast or template
 Arrangement of anterior teeth
 Waxing and investing the partial denture before processing acrylic
resin bases
 Processing the denture
 Remounting and occlusal correction to an occlusal template
 Polishing thedenture.
k. Initial placement, adjustment and servicing of the removable partial
denture
 Adjustments to bearing surfaces of denture framework
 Adjustment of occlusion in harmony with natural and artificial dentition
 Instructions to the patient
 Follow – up services
l. Relining and Rebasing the removable partial denture –Relining tooth
supported dentures bases
 Relining distal extension denture bases
 Methods of reestablishing occlusion on a relined partialdenture.
m. Repairs and additions to removable partial dentures –Broken clasp arms
 Fractured occlusal rests

g:\uploading_2308021\01 prosthodontics part ii syllabus.docx13

  Distortion or breakage of other components – major and minor
connectors
 Loss of a tooth or teeth not involved in the support or retention of the
restoration
 Loss of an abutment tooth necessitating its replacement and making a
new direct retainer
 Other types of repairs & repair bysoldering.
n. Removable partial denture considerations in maxillofacial prosthetics

 Maxillofacial prosthetics
 Intra oral prosthesis
 Designconsiderations
 Maxillary prosthesis
 Obturators
 Speech aids
 Palatal lifts
 Palatal augmentations
 Mandibular prosthesis
 Treatment planning
 Framework design
 Class I resection
 Class II resection
 Mandibular flange prosthesis
 Jaw relation records.
o. Management of failed restorations and work authorization details.
C FIXED PROSTHODONTICS
a) Scope,
b) Definitions and terminology,
c) Classification and principles,
d) Design,
e) Mechanical and biological considerations of components –
i. Retainers
ii. Connectors
iii. Pontics
iv. Work authorization
f)Diagnosis and treatment planning
Patients history and interview
Patients desires and expectations and needs

g:\uploading_2308021\01 prosthodontics part ii syllabus.docx14

 Systemic and emotional health
g)Clinical examinations –
i. Head and neck, oral – teeth
ii. Occlusal and periodontal
iii. Preparation of diagnostic cast
iv. Radiographic interpretation
v. Aesthetics
vi. Endodontics considerations
vii. Abutment selection – bone support, root proximities and inclinations,
selection of abutments for cantilever,pier
h) Management of Carious teeth –
i. Caries in aged population
ii. Caries control, removal caries
iii. Protection of pulp
iv. Reconstruction measure for compromised teeth –
v. Retentive pins,
vi. Horizontal slots,
vii. Retentive grooves,
viii. Prevention of caries,
ix. Diet,
x. Prevention of root caries and vaccine forcaries
i) Periodontal considerations –
Attachment units,
Ligaments,
Prevention ofgingivitis,
Periodontitis.
Microbiological aspect of periodontal diseases,
Marginal lesion,
Occlusal trauma,
Periodontal pockets in attached gingiva,
Interdental papilla, gingival embrasures,
Gingival/periodontal prosthesis,
Radiographic interpretations of periodontia,
Intraoral, periodontal splinting –
i. Fixed Prosthodontics with periodontially compromised dentitions,
ii. Placement of marginrestorations
j) Biomechanical principles of tooth preparation –
Individual tooth preparations –

g:\uploading_2308021\01 prosthodontics part ii syllabus.docx15

 Complete metal Crowns – P.F.C.,
All porcelain –
i. Cerestore crowns,
ii. Dicor crowns,
iii. Inceram etc.
iv. Porcelain jacket crowns;
v. Partial 3/4, 7/8,
vi. Telescopic, pin– ledge, laminates, inlays, onlays.
vii. Preparations for restoration of teeth–
Amalgam,
Glass Ionomer and composite resins.
Resin bond retainers,
viii. Gingival marginal preparations –
Design,
Material selection,
ix. Biological and mechanical considerations –
x. Intra coronal retainer and precision attachments
xi. Custom made andprefabricated
k) Isolation and fluid control –
i. Rubber dam application(s),
ii. Tissue dilation–soft tissue management for cast restoration,
iii. Impression materials and techniques,
iv. Provisional restorations,
v. Interocclusal records,
vi. Laboratory support for fixed Prosthodontics,
vii. Occlusion,
viii. Occlusal equilibration, articulators,
ix. Recording and transferring of occlusal relations,
x. Cementing ofrestorations
l) Resins, Gold and gold alloys, glass Ionomer,restorations.
m) Restoration of endodontically treated teeth,
Stomatognathic Dysfunction and management
n) Management of failedrestorations
o) Osseo integrated/ supported fixed Prosthodontics –
Osseo integrated/ supported and tooth supported fixed
Prosthodontics
p) CAD – CAM Prosthodontics
D MAXILLOFACIAL REHABILITATION:

g:\uploading_2308021\01 prosthodontics part ii syllabus.docx16

  Scope
 Terminology
 Definitions
 Cross infection
 Control and hospital waste management

 Work authorization

 Behavioral and psychological issues in Head and neck cancer

 Psychodynamic interactions between clinician and patient.

I. Cancer Chemotherapy: Oral Manifestations

 Complications

 Management
II. Radiation therapy of head and neck tumors: Oral effects
 Dental manifestations and dental treatment: Etiology, treatment and
rehabilitation (restoration).
 Acquired defects of the mandible
 Acquired defects of hard palate, soft palate
 Clinical management of edentulous and partially edentulous
maxillectomy patients
 Facial defects
 Restoration of speech
 Velopharyngeal function
 Cleft lip and palate
 Cranial implants
 Maxillofacial trauma
 Lip and cheek support prosthesis
 Laryngectomy aids
 Obstructive sleep apnoea
 Tongue prosthesis
 Oesophageal prosthesis
 Radiation carriers
 Burn stents
 Nasal stents
 Vaginal and anal stents
 Auditory inserts
 Trismus appliances

g:\uploading_2308021\01 prosthodontics part ii syllabus.docx17

  Mouth controlled devices for assisting the handicapped
 Custom prosthesis
 Conformers, and orbital prosthesis for ocular and orbital defects.
 Osseo integrated supported facial and maxillofacial prosthesis.
 Resin bonding for maxillofacial prosthesis,
 Cranial prosthesis Implant rehabilitation of the mandible compromise by
radiotherapy,
 Prosthodontic treatment,
 Material and laboratory procedures for maxillofacial prosthesis.
E OCCLUSION
EVALUATION, DIAGNOSIS AND TREATMENT OF OCCLUSAL PROBLEMS:
 Scope, definition, terminology, optimum oral health, anatomic harmony, functional harmony,
occlusal stability, causes of deterioration of dental and oral health.
 Anatomical, physiological, neuro – muscular, psychological considerations of teeth
 Muscles of mastication
 Temporomandibular joint
 Intra oral and extra oral and facial musculatures and the functions of Cranio mandibular
system.
 Occlusal therapy
 The stomatognathic system
 Centric relation, vertical dimension
 The neutral zone
 The occlusal plane
 Differential diagnosis of temporomandibular disorders
 Understanding and diagnosing intra articular problems
 Relating treatment to diagnosis of internal derangements of TMJ
 Occlusal splints.
 Selecting instruments for occlusal diagnosis and treatment, mounting casts
 Pankey-Mann-Schuyler philosophy of complete occlusal rehabilitation
 Long centric
 Anterior guidance
 Restoring lower anterior teeth
 Restoring upper anterior teeth
 Determining the type of posterior occlusal contours
 Methods for determining the plane of occlusion
 Restoring lower posterior teeth
 Restoring upper posterior teeth

g:\uploading_2308021\01 prosthodontics part ii syllabus.docx18

  Functionally generated path techniques for recording border movements intra orally
 Occlusal equilibration.
 Bruxism
 Procedural steps in restoring occlusion
 Requirements for occlusal stability
 Solving occlusal problems through programmed treatment planning
 Splinting
 Solving– occlusal wear problems
 Deep overbite problems
 Anterior overjet problems
 Anterior open bite problems
 Treating – end to end occlusion
 Spaced anterior teeth
 Cross bite problems
 Crowded, irregular, or interlocking anterior bite.
 Using Cephalometric for occlusal analysis, solving severe arch mal-relationship problems,
transcranial radiography, postoperative care of occlusal therapy.
F ESTHETICS
Scope, definitions
Morpho psychology and esthetics, structural esthetic rules –

Facial components

Dental components

Gingival components

Physical components.

Esthetics and its relationship tofunction –

Crown morphology

Physiology of occlusion, mastication, occlusal loading and clinical aspect in bio

esthetic aspects

Physical and physiologic characteristic and muscular activities of facial muscle

Perioral anatomy and muscle retaining exercises

Smile –

Classification and smile components

Smile design

Esthetic restoration of smile

g:\uploading_2308021\01 prosthodontics part ii syllabus.docx19

 Esthetic management of the dentogingival unit

Intraoral materials for management of gingival contours, and ridge contours.

Periodontal esthetics

Restorations –

Tooth colored restorative materials

The clinical and laboratory aspects

Marginal fit

Anatomy

Inclinations, form, size, shape, color, embrasures & contact point.

 Infection control, cross infection barrier – clinical &lab ; hospital & lab waste
management

TMJ – Temporomandibular joint dysfunction

Scope

Definitions
Terminology
a) Temporomandibular joint and its function,
b) Orofacial pain,
c) Pin from the temporomandibular joint region,
d) Temporomandibular joint dysfunction,
e) Temporomandibular joint sounds,
f) Temporomandibular joint disorders,
g) Anatomy related,
h) Trauma, disc displacement,
i) Osteoarthrosis/Osteoarthritis,
j) Hyper mobility and dislocation,
k) Infectious arthritis,
l) Inflammatory diseases,
m) Eagle’s syndrome (Styloid – stylohyoid syndrome),
n) Synovial chondromatosis,
o) Osteochondrosis disease,
p) Ostonecrosis,
q) Nerve entrapment process,
r) Growth changes,
s) Tumors
t) Radiographic imaging

g:\uploading_2308021\01 prosthodontics part ii syllabus.docx20

 u) Etiology, diagnosis and cranio mandibular pain,
v) Differential diagnosis and managementoforofacialpain –
i. Painfromteeth,pulp,
ii. Dentin,musclepain,
iii. TMJpain
Psychologic,
Physiologic –
o Endogenous control
o Acupuncture analgesia
o Placebo effects on analgesia
o Trigeminal neuralgia
o Temporal arteritis
Occlusal splint therapy
i. Construction and fitting of occlusal splints
ii. Management of occlusal splints,
iii. Therapeutic effects of occlusal splints
iv. Occlusal splints and general muscles performance
v. TMJ joint uploading and anterior repositioning appliances
vi. Use and care of occlusalsplints
Occlusal adjustment procedures –
Reversible
i. Occlusal stabilization splints and physical therapies
ii. Jaw exercises
iii. Jaw manipulation and other physiotherapy
Irreversible therapy
i. Occlusal repositioning appliances, orthodontictreatment
ii. Orthognathic surgery
iii. Fixed and removable prosthodontic treatment and occlusal adjustment
iv. Removable prosthodontic treatment and occlusal adjustment.
v. Indication for occlusal adjustment, special nature of orofacial pain
vi. Psychopathological considerations, occlusal adjustment philosophies
vii. Mandibular position, excursive guidance
viii. Occlusal contact scheme
ix. Goals of occlusal adjustment
x. Significance of a slide in centric
xi. Preclinical procedures

g:\uploading_2308021\01 prosthodontics part ii syllabus.docx21

 xii. Clinical procedures for occlusaladjustment

Scheme of Examination
A Theory
Part – I Basic sciences paper 100 Marks
Part – II Paper –I Paper-II, aper-III
300 Marks
(100 Marks for each paper)
Written examination shall consist of Basic Sciences Paper (Part -I) of three hours duration and
should be conducted at the end of First year of MDS course. Part-II Examination will be
conducted at the end of Third year of MDS course. Part-II Examination will consist of
Paper-I, Paper-II & Paper-III, each of three hours duration. Paper-I , Paper-II and Paper III
shall consist of two long answer questions carrying 25 marks each and five questions
carrying 10 marks each. Distribution of topics for each paper will be as follows:
Part-I : Applied Basic Sciences: Applied Anatomy
Nutrition & Biochemistry, Pathology & Microbiology, virology, Applied
Dental anatomy & histology, Oral pathology & oral Microbiology, Adult
and geriatric psychology, Applied dental materials
Part-II :
P a rt-I :Removable Prosthodontics and Implant supported prosthesis (Implantology),
Geriatric dentistry and Cranio facial Prosthodontics
Part-II : Fixed Prosthodontics, Occlusion, TMJ and esthetics.
Paper-II Paper-III : Essays (descriptive and analyzing type
questions)
*The topics assigned to the different papers are generally evaluated under those
sections.However a strict division of the subject may not be possible and some overlapping of
topics is inevitable. Students should be prepared to answer overlapping topics.
B Practical 300 Marks
1) Practical/ Clinical Examination- 200 Marks
2) Viva voce 100 Marks

1) Practical/ Clinical Examination ( 200 Marks )

i) Presentation of treated patients and records during their 3years
Training period(35 Marks)
a. C.D. 1 mark
b. R. P.D. 2 marks
c. F.P.D. including single tooth and surface restoration
d. I.S.P. 5 marks
e. Occlusal rehabilitation 5 marks
f. T.M.J 5 marks
g. Maxillofacial Prosthesis 5 marks
h. Pre-Clinical Exercises 10 marks
ii) Presentation of Clinical Exam CD patient’s prosthesis including insertion (75 Marks)

1 Discussion on treatment plan and patient review 10 marks

2 Tentative jaw relation records 5 marks
3 Face Bow – transfer 5 marks

g:\uploading_2308021\01 prosthodontics part ii syllabus.docx22

 4 Transferring it on articulators 5 marks
Extra oral tracing andsecuring centricand 15 marks
5
protrusive/lateral, record
6 Transferring records on articulator and programming. 5 marks
7 Selection of teeth 5 marks
8 Arrangement of teeth 10 marks
9 Waxed up denture trial 10 marks
Check of Fit, insertion and instruction of 5 marks
10
previously
processed characterized, anatomic complete denture
Prosthesis

ALL STEPS WILL INCLUDE CHAIRSIDE, LAB AND VIVA VOCE

iii) Fixed Partial Denture ( 35 Marks)

a. Case discussion including treatment planning and selection of Patient for FPD 5 Marks
b. Abutment preparation, isolation and fluid control. 15 Marks
c. Gingival retraction and impressions (Conventional/ CAD CAM impressions)10 Marks
d. Cementation of provisional restoration. 5 Marks

iv) Removable Partial Denture ( 25 Marks)

a. Sueveying and designing of partially dentate cast. 15 Marks

b. Discussion on components and material selection including 10 Marks
occlusal schemes.

nd
v) Implant supported Prosthesis ( 2 Stage protocol ) ( 30 Marks )

a. Case discussion including treatment planning and selection of

Patient for ISP. 10 Marks
b. Stage II Preparation, Abutment selection, placement and evaluation.10 Marks
c. Implant impression and making of cast. 10 Marks

2) Viva voce : ( 100 Marks )

i) Viva voce Examination: (80 Marks)

All examiners will conduct viva-voce conjointly on candidate’s comprehension, analytical

approach, expressions, interpretation of data and communication skills. It includes all
components of course contents. It includes presentation and discussion on dissertation
also.

ii) Pedagogy (20 Marks)

g:\uploading_2308021\01 prosthodontics part ii syllabus.docx23

g:\uploading_2308021\01 prosthodontics part ii syllabus.docx24